Copyright: Copyright (c) 1993 WordPerfect Corporation.
Citation: Copyright (c) 1993 WordPerfect Corporation. All rights reserved.


Special thanks to all who made this Help file as good as it is.


Contents

Welcome to WordPerfect 6.0 for Windows Help

To find information, choose from the following items.  To search for information and to move through Help, use the buttons along the top of the Help window.

Choose	For information about

Search (Index)	topics listed alphabetically

How Do I	performing tasks

Glossary	meanings of terms

Menu Commands	features by menus

WordPerfect Bars	topics by Feature Bar, Power Bar, Ruler Bar, Button Bar, and Status Bar

Keystrokes	keystrokes and templates

About WordPerfect	license and program dates

New Features	features new to WPWin

Other Products	other WPCorp products

Macros	macro commands

Coach	starting the Coach

Tutorial	starting the tutorial

Using Help	how to use Help


Document Information

File, Document Info

Purpose

Use this feature to count the characters, words, lines, sentences, paragraphs, and pages in a document.

Steps

1	Choose Document Info from the File menu.

See Also

Document Summary


CUA Keyboard Template

Ctrl+Shift			Show Symbols	Clear		Prev Document
Ctrl	Speller	Replace	Redisplay	Close	Draft View	Next Document
Alt+Shift	Grammatik		View Ruler		Hide Bars	Prev Window
Alt	Thesaurus	Find Previous	Reveal Codes	Exit	Page View	Next Window
Shift	Help: What Is?	Find Next	Save	New	Full Page View	Prev Pane
Normal	Help	Find	Save As	Open	Print	Next Pane
Ctrl+Shift	Double Indent				Vert Line	Table Data
Ctrl	Hanging Indent	Margins	Generate	Macro Record/Stop	Horiz Line	Table Format
Alt+Shift	Decimal Tab			Feature Bar Menu
Alt	Flush Right	Styles	Sort	Macro Play	Text Box Create	Table Number
Shift	Center	Select Cell	Merge	Repeat	Text Box Edit	Table Lines/Fill
Normal	Indent	Select	Font	Menu	Figure	Table


How Do I

Steps

1	Click the topic you want information about.

or...  Press Tab until the topic you want is selected, then press Enter.

Basics

Use Help

Use the Coach

Use the Tutorial

Open or Retrieve a Document

Save a Document

Print a Document

Basic Layout

Change the Margins

Change Justification

Adjust Tab Settings

Change Line Spacing

Change the Font

Number the Pages

Center a Page (top to bottom)

Advanced Layout

Create Columns

Create a Table

Address & Print an Envelope

Add a Header or Footer

Make a Watermark

Add Footnotes or Endnote

Create an Outline

Create a Hypertext Link

Writing Tools

Check the Spelling

Check the Grammar (Grammatik)

Use Thesaurus

Graphics/Equations

Use WP Draw

Create a Graphics Box

Create an Equation

Macros

Create a Macro

Play a Macro

(See Macros on the Help menu for more information.)

Merge

Create a Form File

Create a Data File

Merge a Form File with a Data File


Keystrokes

Purpose

Use the following CUA or DOS keystrokes to move around in WordPerfect 6.0 for Windows.

For keystrokes related to a specific keyboard, see CUA Keyboard Template or DOS Keyboard Template.

To move the insertion point to the	Press the CUA keystroke	Press the DOS keystroke
Beginning of a document	Ctrl+Home	Home, Home, Up Arrow
Beginning of a document (before codes)	Ctrl+Home, Ctrl+Home	Home, Home, Home, Up Arrow
Beginning of a line	Home	Home, Home, Left Arrow
Beginning of a line (before codes)	Home, Home	Home, Home, Home,  Left Arrow
Bottom of the screen	PgDn	Home, Down Arrow
End of the document	Ctrl+End	Home, Home, Down Arrow
Next character	Right Arrow	Right Arrow
Next line down	Down Arrow	Down Arrow
Next page	Alt+PgDn	PgDn
Next word	Ctrl+Right Arrow	Ctrl+Right Arrow
Previous character	Left Arrow	Left Arrow
Previous line up	Up Arrow	Up Arrow
Previous page	Alt+PgUp	PgUp
Previous word	Ctrl+Left Arrow	Ctrl+Left Arrow
Specified page	Ctrl+G	Ctrl+Home
Previous document	Ctrl+Shft+F6	Ctrl+Shft+F6
Next document	Ctrl+F6	Ctrl+F6
Previous window	Ctrl+Shft+F6	Alt+Shft+F6
Next window	Ctrl+F6	Alt+F6
Previous pane	Ctrl+Shft+F6	Shift+F6
Next pane	Ctrl+F6	F6
To insert a	Press	Press
Back Tab (Margin Release)	Shift+Tab	Shift+Tab
Hard Page Break	Ctrl+Enter	Ctrl+Enter
Hard Return	Enter	Enter
Hard Space	Ctrl+Space	Home, Space
Hyphen, Hard	Ctrl+-	Home+-
Hyphen, Soft	Ctrl+Shft+-	Ctrl+-
Space	Spacebar	Spacebar
Tab	Tab	Tab
To delete the	Press	Press
Character to the left	Backspace	Backspace
Current character	Delete	Delete
Remainder of a page	Ctrl+Shft+Delete	Ctrl+PgDn
Rest of a line	Ctrl+Delete	Ctrl+End
Word	Ctrl+Backspace	Ctrl+Backspace
Other editing keystrokes	Press	Press
Copy text to the Clipboard	Ctrl+C	Ctrl+Insert
Cut text to the Clipboard	Ctrl+X	Shft+Delete
Typeover	Insert	Insert
Cancel	Esc	Esc
While in a column, to	Press	Press
Move one column to the right	Alt+Right Arrow	Alt+Right Arrow
Move one column to the left	Alt+Left Arrow	Alt+Left Arrow
While in a dialog, to	Press	Press
Move to the next control	Tab	Tab
Move to the previous control	Shft+Tab	Shift+Tab
Perform the default action	Enter	Enter
While in a table, to	Press	Press
Move up one cell	Alt+Up Arrow	Alt+Up Arrow
Move down one cell	Alt+Down Arrow	Alt+Down Arrow
Move right one cell	Alt+Right Arrow or Tab	Alt+Right Arrow or Tab
Move left one cell	Alt+Left Arrow or Shift+Tab	Alt+Left Arrow or Shift+Tab
Move one tab space	Indent (F7)	Indent (F4)


Glossary

Purpose

The Glossary contains definitions for terms used in WordPerfect Help.

Steps

1	Click the appropriate letter above.

2	Click the term you want.

A

active

.ALL file

alphanumeric

ANSI

application

application icon

application window

argument

ASCII

Associated Merge Files

attributes

automatic font change (AFC)

B

back up

Back button

baseline

baud

baud rate

BIOS

bitmap

Browse buttons

built-in font

bullet

button

Button Bar

Button Bar Bitmap Editor Clear Option

Button Bar Bitmap Editor Copy Option

Button Bar Bitmap Editor Paste Option

Button Bar Bitmap Editor Undo Option

byte

C

cache

card

cartridge fonts

cascade

cascading menu

CD-ROM

cell

check box

check mark

choose

clear

click

Clipboard

close

CMYK

codes

command

command button

compressed file

Contents button

Control menu

Control-menu box

conversion

CUA

current directory

D

data table file

data text file

DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange) link

default

delimiter

deselect

desktop

dialog box

dialog box title bar

dimmed

directory

directory dialog box

display font

dither

document window

DOS

DOS prompt

double-click

Draft View

drag

driver

drop-down list

E

ellipsis

embed

expanded memory

extended memory

F

fat bits

field

field (merge)

file

file extension

file format

filename

fixed-pitch font

folder icon

font

form file

function keys

G

group

group box

H

handle

headword

hexadecimal

highlight

History button

HLS

I

icon

inactive window

incrementing button

.INI file

insertion point

J

jump term

K

kerning

kilobyte (K)

L

landscape orientation

language code

leading

.LEX file

link

link icons

list box

list button

logical page

long prompt

M

macro

main dictionary

maximize button

megabyte (M)

memory

menu

menu bar

message box

MIDI

minimize button

mnemonics

modem

monospaced font

mouse button

mouse pointer

movement keys

multitasking

N

newspaper column

O

object linking and embedding (OLE)

OLE

open

option

outline family

P

Page View

palette

parallel column

parallel interface

parallel printer

parameter

path

pathname

physical page

pitch

pixel

point

point size

pop-up definition

pop-up list

port

portrait orientation

Power Bar

print queue

Print button

printer driver

printer definition

program

proportionally spaced font

.PRS file

Q

QuickList

QuickMenu

R

radio button

RAM

range

record

Restore button

RGB

ROM

root directory

route

S

scalable font

screen font

scroll

scroll bar

Search button

select (options or commands)

select (text or objects)

selection insertion point

serial interface

serial printer

shortcut key

size

sizing handle

soft font

sort key

spreadsheet

spreadsheet import

spreadsheet link

Status Bar

submenu

supplementary dictionary

syntax

T

template

temporary file

text box (dialog box)

text box (graphics)

text file

tile

title bar

toggle

Two Page View

U

No entries

V

variable-pitch font

Viewer Find Next

Viewer Find Previous

Viewer Setup

W

wildcard

window

workspace

.WPG file

WYSIWYG

X

No entries

Y

No entries

Z

zoom


End Outline

Tools, Outline, Options, End Outline

Purpose

Use this feature to end an outline.

Steps

1	Choose Outline from the Tools menu.

2	Choose End Outline from the Options drop-down list on the Outline Feature Bar.

See Also

Change Outline Level

Define Outline

Edit Outline Definition

Set Paragraph Number


DOS Keyboard Template

Ctrl+Shift	Prev Pane		Show Symbols	Select Paragraph		Next Window
Ctrl	Next Pane	Speller	Redisplay	Select Sentence	Define Outline Style	Decimal Tab
Alt+Shift	Grammatik		Ruler Bar	Select Cell	Generate	Prev Window
Alt	Thesaurus	Replace	Reveal Codes	Select	Tools	Flush Right
Shift	Preferences	Find	Prev Open Document	Double Indent	Date	Center Line
Normal	Help Context	Find	Next Open Document	Indent	Open	Bold
Ctrl+Shift	Clear
Ctrl	Insert	Font	Sort	Macro Record	Tab Set	Save
Alt+Shift				Feature Bar
Alt	Table Create	Styles	Graphics	Macro Play	Table Create	Envelope
Shift	Print	Layout	Merge	Open	Character	Bookmark
Normal	Close	Underline	End Field	Save As	Reveal Codes	Select


Menu Commands

Purpose

The following represent WordPerfect's pull-down menus and provide Help for respective features:

File

Edit

View

Insert

Layout

Tools

Graphics

Table

Window

Help


About WordPerfect

Help, About WordPerfect

Purpose

Use About WordPerfect to get information about the Program and Shared DLL release dates, your license number, and your computer setup.

Steps

To enter or edit your license number,

1	Choose About WordPerfect from the Help menu.

2	Choose Edit License Number.

3	Type your license number.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Customer Support


Table Gridlines

View, Table Gridlines

Purpose

Use Table Gridlines to display your table with dimmed gridlines.

This makes your display rewrite more quickly when you edit the table.  The table will print with solid lines.

Steps

1	Choose Table Gridlines from the View menu.

See Also

Document (Display Preferences)


Customer Support

Purpose

Use WordPerfect's Customer Support if you need assistance beyond what the Help feature, README files, and WordPerfect manuals can provide.

Before calling, be prepared to explain your problem and have the following available: Learning WordPerfect and WordPerfect Reference, original (master) WordPerfect 6.0 for Windows disks, license number and WordPerfect program date , and the brand name, type, and model of your computer, graphics card, and mouse

If you are an English version user within the United States, U.S. Territories, or Canada, you can get toll-free support by dialing the numbers listed below.  If you are outside the United States, Puerto Rico, the U.S. Virgin Islands, or Canada, please contact your local WordPerfect affiliate or authorized reseller.

Installation of WordPerfect Software

For assistance when installing WordPerfect 6.0 , call the following numbers:

(800) 228-7610 (toll-free)

(801) 228-9964 (toll)

General Features

For assistance when using WordPerfect features, call the following numbers:

Equations, Graphics, Sound, Tables	(800) 228-8720 (toll-free) (801) 228-9962 (toll)
Macros, Merge	(800) 228-2021 (toll-free) (801) 228-9961 (toll)
All other features	(800) 228-9907 (toll-free) (801) 228-9960 (toll)
Printing, Faxing, and Using Fonts

For assistance when selecting a printer, setting up print options, or printing, call the following numbers:

Laser or PostScript printer	(800) 228-2803 (toll-free) (801) 228-9965 (toll)
Dot-matrix printer and all other printers	(800) 228-6646 (toll-free) (801) 228-9966 (toll)
Networks

For assistance when installing and troubleshooting WordPerfect on a local area network (LAN), call the following numbers:

(800) 228-8807 (toll-free)

(801) 228-9963 (toll)

After-Hours Support

For after-hours support for WordPerfect products, call (801) 228-9908 (toll) during the following Mountain Time hours:

Monday	2:00 a.m. to 7:00 a.m. 6:00 p.m. to 7:00 a.m.
Tuesday - Thursday	6:00 p.m. to 7:00 a.m.
Friday	6:00 p.m. to 10:00 p.m.
Saturday	8:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m.
Sunday	Closed
WordPerfect Corporation InfoShare Fax Service

To receive faxed information about WordPerfect Corporation products, supplementary materials and services, and Customer Support solutions to common problems, dial one of the following numbers:

(800) 228-9960 (toll-free)

(801) 228-9920 (toll)

WordPerfect Corporation BBS

Use WordPerfect Corporation's Bulletin Board Service (BBS) to send questions to Customer Support and enhancement suggestions to Development, and to transfer problem files to Customer Support.

BBS (1200 or 2400 baud modems)	(801) 225-4414 (toll)
BBS (9600 baud V.32 modems)	(801) 225-4444 (toll)
WordPerfect Forums on CompuServe

Use the WordPerfect forums on CompuServe to download printer drivers, press releases, product brochures, software change notices, troubleshooting information, utilities, and information about WordPerfect Corporation services.  To access the forums, enter GO WORDPERFECT at the CompuServe prompt.

SpaceWorks

SpaceWorks is an online support system that lets you quickly search the entire WordPerfect technical bulletin database.  To access SpaceWorks, you need a modem, Windows 3.1, and SpaceWorks software provided free to registered users.  SpaceWorks provides local dial access from anywhere within the United States at 9600 baud.  You can contact SpaceWorks at the following numbers:

(800) 577-2235 (toll-free)

(801) 251-4136 (toll)

Electronic Support for the Hearing Impaired

Customers with a telecommunications device for the deaf (TDD) or teletypewriter (TTY) may obtain toll-free electronic support Monday through Friday from 8 a.m. to 4 p.m. Mountain Time.

(800) 321-3256 (toll-free)

(801) 228-9906 (toll)

WordPerfect Corporation Customer Support Fax

If you have a question or problem using WordPerfect, you can fax your question or a description of your problem directly to WordPerfect Customer Support at the following number:

(801) 2224377 (toll)

Direct Correspondence

If you have a question or problem using WordPerfect, you can write directly to WordPerfect Corporation at the following address:

ATTN CUSTOMER SUPPORT

WORDPERFECT CORPORATION

1555 NORTH TECHNOLOGY WAY

OREM UT  84057-2399

General Information

For answers to non-technical questions about WordPerfect Corporation products, call the following:

Information Services	(800) 451-5151 (toll-free) (801) 225-5000 (toll)
Information Services-French	(800) 321-2318 (toll-free) (801) 222-5050 (toll)


WordPerfect Office (def)
WordPerfect Office

WordPerfect Office 4.0 combines e-mail, calendaring, and scheduling with task management and workflow features.  Now you can access all your messages, personal and group appointments, tasks, and notes in one customizable interface.  And because the functionality of WPOffice extends across DOS, Windows, Mac, OS/2, and UNIX platforms, everyone on your network can access the features and benefits that make WPOffice the most advanced workgroup product of its kind.


WordPerfect InForms (def)
WordPerfect InForms

With WordPerfect InForms 1.0 and some help from an e-mail system, your business can put an end to paperwork.  You'll never have to touch another invoice, employee record, application, expense report, or requisition again.  Instead, WPInForms will let you create, distribute, and fill in almost any business form and store and analyze the information right from your computer.  With electronic forms, you can display instructional prompts to extract complete and accurate information.  Your electronic forms can also calculate mathematical functions, check accuracy, retrieve information from databases, and protect confidential information.  With less paperwork to worry about, your business can take on the right form--one that shares and manages information fast and efficiently.


WordPerfect Presentations (def)
WordPerfect Presentations

WordPerfect Presentations 2.0 supplies you with the tools you need to create professional presentations with impact.  The Outliner, Master Gallery, and Slide Sorter help you organize your presentation quickly and easily.  Powerful drawing tools, 1,000 Clip Art images, and built-in paint tools give you the power to customize your slides and drawings.  With OLE client and server support, add video and animation clips to your slide shows.  Multimedia sound capabilities are enhanced by 100 MIDI sound files and direct CD-ROM audio support.  For the most comprehensive presentation package, the choice is easy...WordPerfect Presentations 2.0.


  Italic

Layout, Font, Italic

Purpose

Use Italic to italicize text.

Steps

To italicize text,

1	Choose Font from the Layout menu, then choose Italic from the Appearance group box.

You can also click [image] on the Power Bar.

2	Type the text you want italicized.

3	Choose Font from the Layout menu, then choose Italic from the Appearance group box again to turn off Italic.

To italicize existing text,

1	Select the text you want italicized.

2	Choose Font from the Layout menu, then choose Italic from the Appearance group box.

You can also click [image] on the Power Bar.

See Also

Font


Macros

Tools, Macros

Purpose

Use this feature to record or play a series of commands.

Steps

1	Choose Macros from the Tools menu.

2	If you want help on a Macro feature, choose Macros to open the Macros Help manual.

If you receive the message "Cannot open Help file," you will need to copy the WPMH60US.HLP file that came with your application to your WordPerfect directory.

See Also

Assign Macro to Menu

Macro Feature Bar

Macro Location

Record/Play/Edit a Macro


Coach

Help, Coach

Purpose

Coaches give you step-by-step instruction on our newest and most popular features.  If you prefer, a Coach will apply a feature for you.

Steps

1	Choose Coach from the Help menu.

2	Select the task you want to perform.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Tutorial


Feature Bars

Purpose

Feature Bars provide easy access to options related to a specific feature.

For more information, choose from the following topics:

Caption

Comment

Cross-Reference

Delay Codes

Footnote/Endnote

Graphics Box

Header/Footer

Hypertext

Index

List

Macro Edit

Merge

Outline

Sound

Table Formula

Table of Authorities

Table of Authorities Full Form

Table of Contents

Template

Text Box

Watermark

See Also

Button Bar

Power Bar

Ruler Bar

Status Bar


Tutorial

Help, Tutorial

Purpose

Tutorial lessons guide you step by step through creating, editing, and formatting a document.

Steps

1	Choose Tutorial from the Help menu.

2	Select the lesson you want.

See Also

Coach


Customize Paragraph Border

Layout, Paragraph, Border/Fill, Customize Style

Purpose

Use Customize Paragraph Border to create a customized paragraph border.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point anywhere in the paragraph where you want the border to first appear.

or...  Select any amount of text in the paragraphs you want to surround with a border.

2	Choose Paragraph from the Layout menu, then choose Border/Fill.

3	Select a border style from either the Border Style pop-up palette or the Border Style drop-down list.

If you want only horizontal separator lines between paragraphs, select Column Between.

4	Choose Customize Style.

5	Choose from the border customizing options.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Border

Change Color

Corners (Customize Border)

Define Color Printing Palette

Drop Shadow (Customize Border)

Line Style

Select Sides to Modify (Customize Border)


Customize Page Border

Layout, Page, Border/Fill, Customize Style

Purpose

Use Customize Page Border to create a customized page border.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point anywhere on the page where you want the border to first appear.

or...  Select any amount of text on the pages you want to surround with a border.

2	Choose Page from the Layout menu, then choose Border/Fill.

3	Select a border style from either the Border Style pop-up palette or the Border Style drop-down list.

4	Choose Customize Style.

5	Choose the border customizing options you want.

6	Choose OK until you return to your document.

See Also

Border

Change Color

Corners (Customize Border)

Define Color Printing Palette

Drop Shadow (Customize Border)

Line Style

Select Sides to Modify (Customize Border)


Customize Column Border

Layout, Columns, Border/Fill, Customize Style

Purpose

Use this feature to create a customized column border.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point anywhere in a column.  The border will surround all the columns in your document.

2	Choose Columns from the Layout menu, then choose Border/Fill.

3	Choose a border style from the Border Style drop-down list.

If you want only a vertical separator line between columns, select Column Between.

4	Choose Customize Style.

5	Choose the border customizing options you want.

6	Choose OK until you return to your document.

See Also

Border

Change Color

Corners (Customize Border)

Define Color Printing Palette

Drop Shadow (Customize Border)

Line Style

Select Sides to Modify (Customize Border)


Create or Edit Border Style (Table)

Table, Lines/Fill (Table), Styles, Create or Edit

Purpose

Use Create or Edit Border Style to create a new style or edit a predefined style.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in a table.

2	Choose Lines/Fill from the Table menu.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Lines/Fill.

3	Select Table.

4	Choose Styles.

5	Highlight an existing style, then choose Edit.

or...  Choose Create to make a new border style.

6	If you are creating a new style, type a name for the style in the Style Name text box.

7	Unless you want All lines selected, select individual sides from the Select sides to modify group box.

8	Select a line style from either the Line Style palette or the drop-down list in the Select sides to modify group box.

9	Select a border color from the Border Color palette.

10	Select a shadow position from the Type palette in the Drop Shadow group box.

11	Select a shadow color from the Color palette in the Drop Shadow group box.

12	Specify a shadow width from the Width palette or from the text box.

13	Choose OK.

See Also

Document (Display Preferences)

Line Style


Customize Graphics Borders

Graphics, Edit Box, Border/Fill, Customize Style

Purpose

Use Customize Graphics Borders to create or edit borders surrounding graphics boxes.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box in your document.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Border/Fill.

or... Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Border/Fill from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then select Border/Fill.

3	Choose Customize Style, then choose from the following options:

Change Color

Corners (Customize Border)

Drop Shadow (Customize Border)

Line Style

Select Sides to Modify (Customize Border)

Space (Customize Border)


File Menu

Purpose

Use the options on the File menu to open, save, and print documents and to set preferences.

New

Template

Open

Close

Save

Save As

QuickFinder

Master Document

Compare Document

Document Summary

Document Info

Preferences

Print

Select Printer

Mail

Exit

Last Opened Files

See Also

Menu Commands


Edit Menu

Purpose

Use the options on the Edit menu to modify text, undo your previous options, and create OLE objects.

Undo

Undelete

Repeat

Cut

Copy

Paste

Append

Select

Paste Special

Links

Object

Find

Replace

Go To

Convert Case

See Also

Menu Commands


View Menu

Purpose

Use the options on the View menu to change what you see in the WordPerfect window.

Draft

Page

Two Page

Zoom

Button Bar

Power Bar

Ruler Bar

Status Bar

Hide Bars

Graphics

Table Gridlines

Hidden Text

Show

Reveal Codes

See Also

Menu Commands


Insert Menu

Purpose

Use the options on the Insert menu to insert an object into your document.

Bullets & Numbers

Character

Abbreviations

Date

Other

Footnote

Endnote

Comment

Sound

Bookmark

Spreadsheet/Database

File

Object

Page Break

See Also

Menu Commands


Layout Menu

Purpose

Use the options on the Layout menu to change the text format in your document.

Font

Line

Paragraph

Page

Document

Columns

Header/Footer

Watermark

Margins

Justification

Typesetting

Envelope

Labels

QuickFormat

Styles

See Also

Menu Commands


Tools Menu

Purpose

Use the options on the Tools menu to add special features to your document.

Speller

Thesaurus

Grammatik

Language

Macro

Merge

Sort

Outline

Hypertext

List

Index

Cross-Reference

Table of Contents

Table of Authorities

Generate

See Also

Menu Commands


Graphics Menu

Purpose

Use the options on the Graphics menu to create and edit graphics.

Figure

Text

Equation

Custom Box

Edit Box

Draw

Chart

Text Art

Horizontal Line

Vertical Line

Custom Line

Edit Line

Graphics Styles

See Also

Menu Commands


Table Menu

Purpose

Use the options on the Table menu to define and create tables.

Create

Format

Number Type

Lines/Fill

Insert

Delete

Join

Split

Names

Calculate

Copy Formula

Data Fill

Sum

Cell Formula Entry

Formula Bar

See Also

Menu Commands


Window Menu

Purpose

Use the options on the Window menu to change the document window display.

Cascade

Tile

Document #

See Also

Menu Commands


Help Menu

Purpose

Use the options on the Help menu to get online Help.

Contents

Search for Help On

How Do I

Macros

Coach

Tutorial

About WordPerfect

See Also

Menu Commands

Using Help


Image Tools

Graphics, Edit Box, Tools

Purpose

Use the Image Tools Palette to crop, scale, rotate, make color adjustments, or change the fill type of an image inside a graphics box.

Steps

To display the palette,

1	Select the graphics image you want to edit.

2	Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics image and select Image Tools.

To close the palette,

1	Double-click the Control-menu box in the upper-left corner of the palette.

or...  Click anywhere outside the graphics box and palette.

See Also

Graphics Box

Image Tools Palette


Put Box on Current Page

Graphics, Edit Box, Position, Put Box on Current Page

Purpose

Use Put Box on Current Page to change a paragraph-anchored or a character-anchored graphics box to a page-anchored box.

When a graphics box is anchored to a page, the box remains on that page regardless of how much text is added to or deleted from the document.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box to edit.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Position.

or... Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Position from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then select Position.

3	Select Put Box on Current Page from the Box Placement group box.

4	Under Horizontal in the Position Box group box, specify a horizontal distance in relationship to a page element (such as the right margin).

or... Under Horizontal, select Across Columns, then specify the horizontal position in relationship to the specified columns.

5	Under Vertical, specify a vertical distance in relationship to a page element (such as the top margin).

6	If you want the graphics box to overlap boxes placed with paragraphs, select Allow Box to Overlap Other Boxes.

7	Choose OK, then choose Close from the Graphics Box feature.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box Feature Bar and return to your document.

See Also

Box Position

Put Box in Current Paragraph

Treat Box as Character


Put Box in Current Paragraph

Graphics, Edit Box, Position, Put Box in Current Paragraph

Purpose

Use Put Box in Current Paragraph to change a page-anchored or a character-anchored graphics box to a paragraph-anchored box.

When a graphics box is anchored to a paragraph, the box stays with that paragraph as you add and delete text.  If you add so much text before the graphics box that it no longer fits on the page, the box will move to the following page.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box to edit.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Position.

or... Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Position from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then select Position.

3	Select Put Box in Current Paragraph from the Box Placement group box.

4	Under Horizontal in the Position Box group box, specify a horizontal distance in relation to a page element (such as the right margin).

5	Under Vertical, specify a vertical distance from the top of the paragraph.

6	If you want the paragraph-anchored box to overlap other boxes placed with paragraphs or pages, select Allow Box to Overlap Other Boxes.

7	Choose OK, then choose Close from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box Feature Bar and return to your document.

See Also

Box Position

Put Box on Current Page

Treat Box as Character


Treat Box as Character

Graphics, Edit Box, Position, Treat Box as Character

Purpose

Use Treat Box as Character to change a paragraph-anchored graphics box or a page-anchored graphics box to a character-anchored box.

When a graphics box is anchored to a character, the box is treated as a single character in the text line.  When you add text before the graphics box, the box moves from left to right as any text character would.

The top of the graphics box aligns with the top line of the document text unless you specify otherwise.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box to edit.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Position.

or... Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Position from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then select Position.

3	Select Treat Box as Character from the Box Placement group box.

4	Select a box alignment type from the Position Box group box.

5	If you want the current text line height to be based on the top to bottom height of the character anchored graphics box, select Box Changes Text Line Height.

6	Choose OK, then choose Close from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box Feature Bar and return to your document.

See Also

Box Position

Put Box in Current Paragraph

Put Box on Current Page


Caption Position

Graphics, Edit Box, Caption, Caption Position

Purpose

Use Caption Position to position caption text in relation to a graphics box.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box with the caption you want to reposition.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Caption.

or... Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Caption from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box with a caption, then select Edit Caption.

3	Select from the following options:

Option	Lets You

Side of Box	Choose the side of the graphics box where the caption is placed.

Border	Choose to display the caption inside the box border, outside the box border, or directly on the box border.

Position	Specify the alignment of a caption in conjunction with the Border option above.

Absolute Offset	Specify the distance you want to shift the caption text from the Alignment.

Percent Offset	Specify a percentage of the distance you want to shift the caption text from the Alignment, based on the width or height of the box.

4	Choose OK, then choose Close from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box Feature Bar and return to your document.

See Also

Box Caption

Caption Numbering and Styles

Caption Width

Rotate Caption


Caption Width

Graphics, Custom Box, Styles, Create or Edit, Caption, Caption Width

Purpose

Use Caption Width to adjust the white space above or below the caption.

Steps

1	Select the graphics box with the caption you want to adjust.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Caption.

or... Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Caption from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

3	Select from the following options:

Option	Lets You

Auto Width	Automatically adjust the width of a caption based on the caption length and the width or height of the box.

Fixed	Specify a caption width measurement no greater than the width or height of the box.

Percent	Adjust the caption width by specifying a percentage based on the width or height of the box.

4	Choose OK, then choose Close from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box Feature Bar and return to your document.

See Also

Box Caption

Caption Numbering and Styles

Caption Position

Rotate Caption


Rotate Caption

Graphics, Edit Box, Caption, Rotate Caption

Purpose

Use Rotate Caption to turn a caption 90, 180, or 270 degrees.

A caption rotates counterclockwise around its center.

Steps

1	Select the graphics box with the caption you want to rotate.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Caption.

or... Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Caption from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

3	Select a degree of rotation from the Rotate Caption group box.

4	Choose OK, then choose Close on the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box Feature Bar and return to your document.

See Also

Box Caption

Caption Numbering and Styles

Caption Position

Caption Width


Caption Numbering and Styles

Graphics, Custom Box, Styles, Create or Edit, Caption, Caption Numbering and Styles

Purpose

Use Caption Numbering and Styles to change the Counter, Initial Style, and Number Style of a graphics box style.

Steps

1	Choose Custom Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Styles.

2	Highlight a box style in the Styles list box, then choose Edit.

or... Choose Create, then type a name for the new box style in the Style Name text box.

3	Choose Caption, then choose Change to the far right of Counter in the Caption Numbering and Styles group box.

4	Highlight a counter method from the Counters list box, then choose Select.

5	Choose Change to the far right of Initial Style or Number Style, then select the style you want.

6	Choose Apply, then choose OK until you return to the Box Styles dialog box.

7	Choose Select, then choose OK to return to the document window.

8	Choose Close from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box Feature Bar and return to your document.

See Also

Create or Edit Box Style

Select Counter

Style List

Styles Editor

Box Caption

Caption Position

Caption Width

Rotate Caption


Current Cell or Selection (Table)

Table, Lines/Fill, Current Cell or Selection

Purpose

Use the Current Cell or Selection option on the Table Lines/Fill dialog box to change the line style, color, and fill options of the current cell or selection.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in the cell that contains the lines you want to change.

or... Select several cells that contain lines you want to change.

2	Choose Lines/Fill from the Table menu.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Lines/Fill.

3	Select a line style from the Left, Right, Top, Bottom, Inside (available if you selected cells), or Outside palettes or drop-down lists in the Line Styles group box.

4	To turn off a line, select <None> from the appropriate drop-down list.

5	If you want all the lines in the current cell or selection to have a uniform color, choose Custom Color, then choose a color from the color palette.

6	Select a fill style from the Fill Style palette or drop-down list in the Fill Options group box.

7	Select a color from the Foreground or Background palettes.

8	Choose OK.

See Also

Define Color Printing Palette


Table

Table, Lines/Fill, Table

Purpose

Use Table to change the line and border styles, color, and fill options of the entire table.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in a table.

2	Choose Lines/Fill from the Table menu.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Lines/Fill.

3	Choose Table.

4	Select a line style from either the Line Style palette or drop-down list.

5	Select a color from the Custom Color palette.

6	To turn off all table lines, choose <None> from either the Line Style palette or drop-down list in the Default Line Style group box.

7	Select a border style from either the Border palette or drop-down list in the Border Lines group box.

8	To turn off the border, select <None> from either the Border palette or drop-down list in the Border Lines group box.

9	Select a fill style from either the Fill Style palette or drop-down list in the Fill Options group box.

10	Select a color from the Foreground and Background palettes in the Fill Options group box.

11	If you want to save the line settings you have created for use in other tables in the document and for tables you create during subsequent WordPerfect sessions, select Use as Default.

12	Choose OK.

See Also

Border

Create or Edit Border Style (Table)

Current Cell or Selection (Table)

Document (Display Preferences)

Line Style

Table Line Settings


Content Position Inside a Graphics Box

Graphics, Edit Box, Content, Content Position

Purpose

Use Content Position Inside a Graphics Box to change the horizontal and vertical positioning of the contents inside the graphics box.

Steps

1	Select the graphics box whose contents you want to move.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Content.

or... Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Content from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then select Content.

3	Choose the horizontal position you want from the Horizontal Position pop-up list.

4	Choose the vertical position you want from the Vertical Position pop-up list.

5	Choose OK, then choose Close from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box Feature Bar and return to your document.

See Also

Box Position

Box Content

Rotate Box Text


Last Opened Files

File, Filename

Purpose

Use Last Opened Files to open one of the last four opened documents.

Steps

1	Choose the filename from the File menu.

or... Choose File, then type the number to the left of the file you want to retrieve.

See Also

Menu (Environment Preferences)


Position/Length

Graphics, Edit Line, Position/Length

Purpose

Use Position/Length to move a horizontal or vertical graphics line or to increase or decrease the line length.

Steps

1	Double-click the graphics line you want to edit.

2	Choose from the following options:

Option	Lets You

Horizontal	Specify the horizontal position of a line.

Select Set, Left, Right, Centered, Full, or Column Aligned, depending on whether the line type is horizontal or vertical.

Select Set to specify a distance from the left edge of the page.  Select Full if you want the horizontal line to extend from the left to the right margin.

Vertical	Specify the vertical position of a line.

Select Set, Baseline, Top, Bottom, Centered, or Full, depending on whether the line type is horizontal or vertical.

Select Set to specify a distance from the top edge of the page.  Select Baseline to position the bottom edge of the horizontal line along the text baseline.  Select Full if you want the vertical line to extend from the top margin to the bottom margin.

3	Specify a line length in the Length text box.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Change Color

Change Thickness

Create or Edit Graphic Line

Custom Line/Graphics Spacing

Custom Line Styles

Line Style


Change Color

Purpose

Use Change Color to change the border line color of graphics boxes, graphics lines, or borders surrounding document text.

Steps

To change the color of a graphics box border,

1	Select the graphics box with the border color you want to change.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Border/Fill.

or... Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Border/Fill from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then choose Border/Fill.

3	Choose Customize Style.

4	To use the line color specified in the current line style, make sure Use Line Style Color is selected.

or... Select a line color from the Border Color pop-up palette.

5	Choose OK twice.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box Feature Bar and return to your document.

To change the color of a paragraph, page, or column border,

1	Place the insertion point anywhere inside a paragraph, page, or column border.

2	Choose Paragraph, Page, or Columns from the Layout menu, then choose Border/Fill.

3	Choose Customize Style.

4	To use the line color specified in the current line style, make sure Use Line Style Color is selected.

or... Select a line color from the Border Color pop-up palette.

5	Choose OK.

To change the color of a horizontal or vertical graphics line,

1	Select a graphics line to edit.

2	Choose Edit Line from the Graphics menu.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics line, then choose Edit Horizontal Line or Edit Vertical Line.

3	To use the line color specified in the current line style, make sure Use Line Style Color is selected.

or... Select a line color from the Line Color pop-up palette.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Corners (Customize Border)

Create or Edit Graphic Line

Drop Shadow (Customize Border)

Line Style

Select Sides to Modify (Customize Border)

Space (Customize Border)


Change Thickness

Graphics, Edit Line, Change Thickness

Purpose

Use Change Thickness to alter the thickness of a graphics line.

Steps

1	Select a graphics line to edit.

2	Choose Edit Line from the Graphics menu.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics line, then select Edit Horizontal Line or Edit Vertical Line.

3	To use the line thickness specified in the current line style, make sure Use Line Style Thickness is selected.

or... Specify a line thickness from either the Thickness pop-up palette or the Thickness text box.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Change Color

Create or Edit Graphic Line

Custom Line/Graphics Spacing

Custom Line Styles

Line Style

Position/Length


Custom Line/Graphics Spacing

Graphics, Edit Line, Spacing

Purpose

Use Custom Line/Graphics Spacing to specify the spacing above and below a horizontal graphics line or the spacing between the margin and a left- or right-aligned vertical line.

Steps

1	Select a graphics line to edit.

2	Choose Edit Line from the Graphics menu.

You can also click the right button, then choose Edit Horizontal Line or Edit Vertical Line.

3	If the line type is horizontal, specify line spacing from either the Above Line or Below Line pop-up palette or the Above Line or Below Line text box.

or... If the line type is vertical, specify line spacing from either the Border Offset pop-up palette or the Border Offset text box.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Change Color

Change Thickness

Create or Edit Graphic Line

Custom Line Styles

Line Style

Position/Length


Blend Colors

Layout, Font, Palette, Blend

Purpose

 Use Blend to combine two colors on the color palette.

Steps

1	Choose Font from the Layout menu, then choose Palette.

2	If you want the blend to span a complete row of the color palette, drag from the starting color you want to the ending color you want.

or...  If you want the blend to be contained to a block of the color palette, mark Select Rectangle, then drag from the starting color you want to the ending color you want.

3	Choose Blend.

4	Choose OK to replace the current palette.

or...  Choose Save As to save the palette with a new name.

See Also

Color Model

Color Wheel

Copy/Paste Colors

Default Color Palette

Invert Colors

Rainbow Colors

Save Color Palette


Color Model

Layout, Font, Palette, Color Model

Purpose

Use Color Model to replace squares on the color palette with colors you define.

Steps

1	Choose Font from the Layout menu, then choose Palette.

2	Choose Size, then select a size for the palette.

The numbers represent how many color squares will be included in the palette.

3	Highlight the square on the color palette that you want to replace.

4	Choose a color model from the Select Model pop-up list:

RGB

HLS

CMYK

5	Specify a value for each color model method in the Color Model group box.

6	Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each color you want to replace.

7	Choose OK to replace the current palette.

or...  Choose Save As to save the palette with a new name.

See Also

Blend Colors

Color Wheel

Copy/Paste Colors

Default Color Palette

Invert Colors

Rainbow Colors

Save Color Palette


Select Sides to Modify (Customize Border)

Purpose

Use Select Sides to Modify to select which border lines (top, bottom, left, right, or all) you want to modify for a graphics box or a paragraph, page, or column border.

Steps

To select the graphics box border lines you want to modify,

1	Select a graphics box to edit.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Border/Fill.

or... Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Border/Fill from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then select Border/Fill.

3	Choose Customize Style.

4	Make sure All is selected in the Select sides to modify group box.

or... Select or deselect individual lines.

5	Choose a line modification option from the list below.

To select the paragraph, page, or column border lines you want to modify,

1	Place the insertion point anywhere inside a paragraph, page, or column border.

2	Choose Paragraph, Page, or Columns from the Layout menu, then choose Border/Fill.

3	Choose Customize Style.

4	Make sure All is selected in the Select sides to modify group box.

or... Select or deselect individual lines.

The Separator line option inserts a horizontal line between paragraphs or a vertical line between columns.

5	Choose from the following line modification options:

Change Color

Corners (Customize Border)

Drop Shadow (Customize Border)

Line Style

Space (Customize Border)


Space (Customize Border)

Purpose

Use Space to adjust the spacing inside and outside graphics box borders and borders surrounding paragraphs, pages, or columns.

Steps

To adjust the border space of a graphics box,

1	Select a graphics box to edit.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Border/Fill.

or... Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Border/Fill from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then select Border/Fill.

3	Choose Customize Style.

4	Select Show Inside/Outside Spacing.

5	Make sure Auto Spacing is selected.

or... Specify spacing from either the Inside Space pop-up palette or text box, or the Outside pop-up palette or text box.

6	Choose OK until you return to the document window.

7	Choose Close from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box Feature Bar and return to your document.

To adjust the border space of a paragraph, page, or column border,

1	Place the insertion point anywhere inside a paragraph, page, or column border.

2	Choose Paragraph, Page, or Columns from the Layout menu, then choose Border/Fill.

3	Choose Customize Style.

4	Select Show Inside/Outside Spacing.  This allows you to see the spacing (as indicated by the gray area) in the preview box.

5	Make sure Auto Spacing is selected.

or... Specify spacing from either the Inside Space pop-up palette or text box, or the Outside pop-up palette or text box.

6	Choose OK twice to return to your document window.

See Also

Change Color

Corners (Customize Border)

Drop Shadow (Customize Border)

Line Style

Select Sides to Modify (Customize Border)


Corners (Customize Border)

Purpose

Use Corners to make rounded or square corners for a graphics box that has identical line styles on all sides.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box to edit.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Border/Fill.

or... Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Border/Fill from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then select Border/Fill.

3	Choose Customize Style.

4	If you want square corners, select Square Corners from the Corners group box.

or... If you want rounded corners, specify a corner radius in the Radius text box.

5	Choose OK twice, then choose Close from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box Feature Bar and return to your document.

See Also

Change Color

Drop Shadow (Customize Border)

Line Style

Select Sides to Modify (Customize Border)

Space (Customize Border)


Drop Shadow (Customize Border)

Purpose

Use Drop Shadow to specify the color, placement, and width of a shadow behind a graphics box or a paragraph, page, or column border.

Steps

To specify a drop shadow for a graphics box,

1	Select a graphics box to edit.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Border/Fill.

or... Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Border/Fill from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then select Border/Fill.

3	Choose Customize Style.

4	Select a shadow position from the Type pop-up palette in the Drop Shadow group box.

5	Select a shadow color from the Color pop-up palette.

6	Specify a shadow width from either the Width pop-up palette or the Width text box.

7	Choose OK twice, then choose Close from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box Feature Bar and return to your document.

To specify a drop shadow for a paragraph, page, or column border,

1	Place the insertion point anywhere inside a paragraph, page, or column border.

2	Choose Paragraph, Page, or Columns from the Layout menu, then choose Border/Fill.

3	Choose Customize Style.

4	Select a shadow position from the Type pop-up palette in the Drop Shadow group box.

5	Select a shadow color from the Color pop-up palette in the Drop Shadow group box.

6	Specify a shadow width from either the Width pop-up palette or the Width text box.

7	Choose OK twice.

See Also

Change Color

Corners (Customize Border)

Line Style

Select Sides to Modify (Customize Border)

Space (Customize Border)


Color Wheel

Layout, Font, Palette, Color Wheel

Purpose

Use the Color Wheel to define colors to be added to the color palette.

Steps

1	Choose Font from the Layout menu, then choose Palette.

2	Choose Size, then select a size for the palette.

The numbers represent how many color squares will be included with the palette.

3	Highlight the square on the color palette that you want to replace.

4	Drag the pointer on the color wheel until the color you want to use appears in the Current Color box, then release the mouse button.

5	Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each color you want to add.

6	Choose OK to replace the current palette.

or...  Choose Save As to save the palette with a new name.

See Also

Blend Colors

Color Model

Copy/Paste Colors

Default Color Palette

Invert Colors

Rainbow Colors

Save Color Palette


Power Bar (View)

View, Power Bar

Purpose

Use the Power Bar to quickly access commonly used features with the mouse.

Steps

To display or hide the Power Bar,

1	Choose Power Bar from the View menu.

You can customize the Power Bar by adding more items to the bar from the predefined list.

See Also

Power Bar Preferences

Button Bar (View)


Create Footnotes or Endnotes

Insert, Footnote or Endnote, Create

Purpose

Use this feature to create footnotes or endnotes.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want to insert the reference number for a new footnote or endnote.

2	Choose Footnote or Endnote from the Insert menu, then choose Create.

3	Type the text of the note.

You can also paste information you have cut or copied, or you can insert a file into the note.

If you delete a number, you can restore it by using the Note Number button.

4	Choose Close.

The superscript footnote or endnote number appears in the text of your document.  While using Page view, you can see the footnote by scrolling to the bottom of the page.  You can see the endnote by scrolling to the end of the document.  To see the entire page at once, use Two Page view.

See Also

Cut, Copy, Paste

Edit Footnote or Endnote

Edit Numbering Style (Footnotes, Endnotes)

Endnote Options

Footnote Options

Footnote or Endnote Number

Line Separator

Numbering Method (Footnotes, Endnotes)

Position of Footnotes

Spacing Between Notes

Styles Editor


Hypertext Feature Bar

Tools, Hypertext

Purpose

Use the Hypertext Feature Bar to perform a hypertext link you have created or to create, edit, or delete a hypertext link.

Steps

1	Choose Hypertext from the Tools menu, then click the Deactivate button to change it to Activate.

2	Place the insertion point on the hypertext link you want to perform.

3	Choose from the following topics:

Option	Lets You

Perform	Jump when the link is inactive.

Back	Move the insertion point from the bookmark back to the link.

Next	Locate the hypertext link after the insertion point.

Previous	Locate the hypertext link located before the insertion point.

The insertion point will move to the bookmark you have defined.

See Also

Bookmark

Create or Edit Hypertext Link

Macros

Style List


Column Break

Layout, Columns, Column Break

Purpose

Use this feature to end a column and move to the next column.

Steps

1	Choose Columns from the Layout menu.

2	Choose Column Break.

See Also

Column Spacing, Column Widths


Booklet Printing

Layout, Page, Binding

Layout, Page, Subdivide Page

File, Print, Options, Booklet Printing

Purpose

Use this feature to create programs and booklet-style documents with pages numbered and arranged for you.

If you have a printer that supports duplexing, you can also print on both sides of the page.

Steps

1	If your printer supports double-sided printing, choose Page from the Layout menu, then choose Binding.

2	Select a Duplexing option, then choose OK.

3	To subdivide pages, choose Page from the Layout menu, then choose Subdivide Page.

4	Specify 2 columns and 1 row for booklet format, then choose OK.

5	Create the text and graphics for your document in normal sequential order.

For example, create the front cover, then page 1 through the last page.

6	Choose Print from the File menu, then choose Options.

7	Select Booklet Printing.

8	Choose OK, then choose Print.

When the document finishes printing, information will be arranged and numbered on the physical page so that you can fold the pages in the middle to make a booklet.

See Also

Print Output Options

Subdivide Page


Print Individual Labels

File, Print, Multiple Pages

Purpose

Use this feature to print individual labels.

Steps

1	Choose Print from the File menu

2	Select Multiple Pages, then choose Print.

3	Select Page(s), then type the number of each label or a range of labels, according to the following table:

Type	To Print

3	Label 3

3,5,8	Labels 3, 5, and 8

3 8	Labels 3 and 8

3-	Label 3 through the end of the document

-3	The beginning of the document through label 3

3-8	Labels 3 through 8

1-3 8	Labels 1 through 3 and label 8

3,5,9-15	Labels 3, 5, and 9 through 15

4	Choose Print.

See Also

Labels

Printers/Labels (File Preferences)


Numbering Method (Footnotes, Endnotes)

Insert, Endnote, Options, Numbering Method

Insert, Footnote, Options, Numbering Method

Purpose

Use Numbering Method to change the footnote or endnote numbering method.

Steps

1	Using one of the routes above ( [image]), display the Footnote Options or Endnotes Options dialog box.

2	Choose a numbering method from the Method pop-up list.

If you choose Characters, type the character(s) in the Characters text box.  You can also press Ctrl+w, then specify any WordPerfect character.

3	If you want to restart footnote numbering on every page, select Restart Numbering on Each Page.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Create Footnotes or Endnotes

Edit Footnote or Endnote

Edit Numbering Style (Footnotes, Endnotes)

Footnote or Endnote Number


Edit Numbering Style (Footnotes, Endnotes)

Insert, Endnote, Options, Edit Numbering Style

Insert, Footnote, Options, Edit Numbering Style

Purpose

Use Edit Numbering Style to specify a format for all footnote or endnote numbers in document text and to format your footnotes or endnotes so they look the same throughout the document.

Steps

1	Using one of the routes above ( [image]), display the Footnote Options or Endnotes Options dialog box.

2	If you want to specify a format for all footnote or endnote numbers in document text, choose In Text, make formatting changes, then choose OK.

3	If you want to format your footnotes or endnotes so that they look the same throughout the document, choose In Note, make formatting changes, then choose OK.

See Also

Create Footnotes or Endnotes

Edit Footnote or Endnote

Footnote or Endnote Number

Numbering Method (Footnotes, Endnotes)

Styles Editor


Spacing Between Notes

Insert, Endnote, Options, Spacing Between Notes

Insert, Footnote, Options, Spacing Between Notes

Purpose

Use Spacing Between Notes to specify the amount of space between footnotes or endnotes.

Steps

1	Using one of the routes above ( [image]), display the Footnote Options or Endnotes Options dialog box.

2	Specify a new measurement in the Space text box, then choose OK.

See Also

Create Footnotes or Endnotes

Continuous Notes

Edit Footnote or Endnote

Endnote Placement (in Document)

Footnote or Endnote Number

Line Separator

Position of Footnotes (on Page)


Continuous Notes

Insert, Endnote, Options, Continuous Notes

Insert, Footnote, Options, Continued Footnotes

Purpose

Use Continuous Notes or Continued Footnotes to change the formatting for notes that continue from one page to another.

Steps

1	Using one of the routes above ( [image]), display the Footnote Options or Endnotes Options dialog box.

2	If you want, change the amount of footnote or endnote to keep together.

If space is not available for a footnote near the bottom margin of a page, it is moved to the next page.

3	If you want to print (continued...) on the last footnote line of each page and the first footnote line of each subsequent page, select Insert (continued...) Message.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Create Footnotes or Endnotes

Edit Footnote or Endnote

Edit Numbering Style (Footnotes, Endnotes)

Endnote Placement (in Document)

Endnote Options

Footnote or Endnote Number

Footnote Options

Line Separator

Numbering Method (Footnotes, Endnotes)

Spacing Between Notes


Position of Footnotes (on Page)

Insert, Footnote, Options, Position

Purpose

Use Position of Footnotes to specify whether footnotes print immediately below the last line of text or at the bottom of the page.

Steps

1	Choose Footnote from the Insert menu, then choose Options.

2	Select an option under Position to indicate whether you want to print footnotes immediately below the last line of text or at the bottom of the page.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Create Footnotes or Endnotes

Edit Footnote or Endnote

Footnote or Endnote Number

Line Separator


Options (Style List or Outline Style)

Layout, Styles, Options

Tools, Outline, Options, Define Outline, Options

Purpose

Use Options to set up, copy, delete, reset, retrieve, and save styles.

Steps

1	Using one of the routes above ( [image]), display the Style List dialog box or the Outline Define dialog box.

2	Choose any of the following options:

Setup

Copy

Delete

Retrieve

Save As

See Also

Style List

Styles Editor


Convert Case

Edit, Convert Case

Purpose

Use Convert Case to change text to uppercase or lowercase letters or initial caps.

Steps

1	Select the text to be changed.

2	Choose Convert Case from the Edit menu.

3	Choose Lowercase, Uppercase, or Initial Capitals.

See Also

Select


Cut, Copy, Paste

Edit, Cut or Copy or Paste

Purpose

Use Cut with Paste to move selected text or graphics, or use Copy with Paste to copy selected text or graphics.  Once you have cut or copied information, you can paste it anywhere in the current document, in another document, or in another application.

Steps

To cut or copy information,

1	Select the text or graphics you want to cut or copy.

2	Choose Cut or Copy from the Edit menu.

You can also click [image] or [image] on the Power Bar.

To paste information,

1	Position the insertion point where you want to insert the information.

2	Choose Paste from the Edit menu.

You can also click [image] on the Power Bar.

See Also

Append

Drag and Drop Text

Undo


Append

Edit, Append

Purpose

Use Append to add selected text or graphics to the end of the contents on the Windows Clipboard.

The Windows Clipboard must contain text or graphics before you can use Append.

Steps

1	Select the text or graphics you want to append.

2	Choose Append from the Edit menu.

The selection stays on the Clipboard until you use Cut or Copy to replace it with a new selection or until you exit Windows.

3	Paste the Clipboard contents into a document by choosing Paste from the Edit menu.

See Also

Cut, Copy, Paste

Select


Select

Edit, Select

Purpose

Use Select to select a sentence, paragraph, page, tabular column, or rectangular portion of text.

Steps

To use the mouse,

1	Drag across the text you want to select.

2	Release the mouse button.

3	To cancel a selection, click the mouse anywhere outside the selection.

To use the Select menu item,

1	Place the insertion point anywhere in the text you want to select.

2	Choose Select from the Edit menu, then choose from the following options:

Option	Lets You

Select	Select the sentence at the insertion point.

Paragraph	Select the paragraph at the insertion point.

Page	Select all text and graphics on the page.

All	Select the entire document.

Tabular Column	Select columns created using Tab or Indent.

Rectangle	Select a rectangular-shaped portion of text without disturbing other text on the page.

See Also

Cut, Copy, Paste

Drag and Drop Text

Find and Replace Text

Undelete

Undo


  Undo

Edit, Undo

Purpose

Use Undo to reverse your last editing action.  Unlike Undelete, which lets you restore recently deleted information at the insertion point, Undo lets you restore information in its original location.

Steps

1	Choose Undo from the Edit menu.

You can also click [image] on the Power Bar.

You cannot undo an action that does not affect your document (such as scrolling).

See Also

Undelete


  View Modes

View, Draft or Page or Two Page

Purpose

You can work with your documents in three view modes: Draft, Page, and Two Page.  In Draft and Page view, you can use Zoom to change the display size of the text or graphics you are viewing.

Steps

To change the view mode,

1	Choose Draft, Page, or Two Page from the View menu.

To use Page view with full page zoom,

1	Click [image] on the Power Bar to turn Page Zoom Full on or off.

To change the default view mode,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Display.

2	Choose View/Zoom.

3	Select the Default View you want, choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Windowing

Zoom


Show Symbols

View, Show

Purpose

Use Show Symbols to display a symbol wherever there is a space, a hard return, a tab, or an indent.  Symbols also display when you use center, flush right, soft hyphen, advance, or center page.

Steps

To display or hide symbols,

1	Choose Show from the View menu.

To customize the display of symbols,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the Display icon.

2	Select Show.

Make sure that the options you want to display symbols for are selected.

If you choose Show Symbols on New and Current Document, all of the symbols you have selected will appear each time you start WordPerfect until you change them.

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Show (Display Preferences)


Reveal Codes

View, Reveal Codes

Purpose

Use Reveal Codes to view the formatting codes in your document.

Steps

To view or hide codes,

1	Choose Reveal Codes from the View menu.

You can make the Reveal Codes area larger or smaller by dragging the Reveal Codes dividing line up or down.

You can also drag the divider line to the top or bottom of the window, or click the right mouse button in the Reveal Codes area, then choose Hide Reveal Codes from the QuickMenu that appears.

See Also

Reveal Codes (Display Preferences)


Sort By (Merge)

Tools, Sort, Sort By

Purpose

Use Record Type to specify what type of record you want to sort by.

Steps

1	Choose Sort from the Tools menu.

2	Select one of the record types shown in the table below:

Record Type	Record Definition	Record Division
Line	Each line ends with a hard return.	Field Word
Paragraph	Each paragraph ends with two or more hard returns.	Field Line Word
Merge Records	Each merge record ends with an ENDRECORD codes.	Field Line Word
Table Row	Each record is a row of cells.	Cell Line Word
Column	Each record is a row of columns.	Column Line Word
See Also

Key Definitions (Sort)

Select Records (Sort)

Sort


Key Definitions (Sort)

Tools, Sort, Key Definitions

Purpose

Use Key Definitions to specify which piece of the record to sort by.

Steps

1	Choose Sort from the Tools menu.

2	Choose Add Key to add a new key definition to the end of the list.

or...  Choose Insert Key to insert a new key definition above the currently selected key definition.

3	Change the options in the Key Definition to define the key, then choose OK.

See Also

Record Selection (Sort)

Sort

Sort By


Select Records (Sort)

Tools, Sort, Select Records

Purpose

Use Select Record to extract records that meet specified criteria.

Steps

1	Choose Sort from the Tools menu.

2	Place the insertion point in the Select Records text box.

3	Using the selection operators (visible on the Status Bar), type the selection statement in text box.

For example, key 4=84057 selects only those records that have 84057 in the field defined in key 4.

Operator	What It Does

| (OR)	Selects records that meet the conditions of either key.

& (AND)	Selects records that meet the conditions of both keys.

=	Selects records that have exactly the same information in an indicated key.

< >	Selects records that do not match the information for an indicated key.

>	Selects records that have information greater than the information for an indicated key.

<	Selects records that have information less than the information for an indicated key.

> =	Selects records that have information greater than or equal to the information for an indicated key.

< =	Selects records that have information less than or equal to the information for an indicated key.

If you do not want to sort the records that will be extracted, choose Select Without Sorting.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Key Definitions (Sort)

Sort

Sort By


Page Numbering Options

Layout, Page, Numbering, Options

Purpose

Use Page Numbering Options to format the page numbers in your document with text and multiple numbers.

Steps

To change the number type,

1	Choose Page from the Layout menu, then choose Numbering.

2	Choose Options.

3	Select a numbering method from the Page, Secondary, Chapter, or Volume pop-up list.

4	Choose OK.

To include text with the page number,

1	Choose Page from the Layout menu, then choose Numbering.

2	Choose Options.

3	Type the text in the Format and Accompanying Text text box.

The page number code [Pg#] shows the position of the page number in the text you type.

4	Choose OK until you return to your document.

To include chapter numbers, volume numbers, and secondary numbers,

1	Choose Page from the Layout menu, then choose Numbering.

2	Choose Options.

3	Place the insertion point in the Format and Accompanying Text text box where you want the chapter, volume, or secondary number to go.

4	Choose Insert.

5	Choose Chapter Number, Volume Number, or Secondary Number.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Numbering Value (Page Numbering)

Page Numbering


Document Summary Options

File, Document Summary, Options

Purpose

Use Document Summary Options to perform several tasks.

Steps

To print a summary,

1	Choose Document Summary from the File menu.

2	Choose Options, then choose Print Summary.

To delete a summary,

1	Choose Document Summary from the File menu.

2	Choose Options, choose Delete Summary From Document, then choose Yes.

To extract information from a document,

1	Choose Document Summary from the File menu.

2	Choose Options, then choose Extract Information From Document.

To save a summary as a separate document file,

1	Choose Document Summary from the File menu.

2	Choose Options, then choose Save Summary As New Document.

3	Type a filename in the Filename text box.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Document Summary

Document Summary Configuration

Document Summary Preferences


Word Spacing and Letterspacing

Layout, Typesetting, Word/Letterspacing

Purpose

Use Word Spacing and Letterspacing to increase or decrease the space between words and letters in your document.

Steps

1	Choose Typesetting from the Layout menu, then choose Word/Letter Spacing.

2	Choose from the following options:

Automatic Kerning

Baseline Placement for Typesetting

Letterspacing

Line Height (Leading) Adjustment

Word Spacing

Word Spacing Justification Limits


Word Spacing Justification Limits

Layout, Typesetting, Word/Letter Spacing, Word Spacing Justification Limits

Purpose

Use Word Spacing Justification Limits to adjust spacing between words in fully justified text.

Steps

1	Choose Typesetting from the Layout menu, then choose Word/Letter Spacing.

2	Specify the lower limit (Compressed To:  (0% to 100%)).

If the lower limit is set at 60%, then the space between words in justified text will be at least 60% of the original space.

3	Specify the upper limit (Expanded To:  (100% to 9999%)).

If the upper limit is set at 400%, then the space between words in justified text will not be larger than 400% of the original space.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Word Spacing and Letterspacing


Line Height (Leading) Adjustment

Layout, Typesetting, Word/Letterspacing, Adjust Leading

Purpose

Use Line Height (Leading) Adjustment to adjust the leading between lines of text in your document.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want the new leading to begin.

or...  Select the text for which you want to change the leading.

2	Choose Typesetting from the Layout menu, then choose Word/Letterspacing.

3	Select Adjust Leading.

4	Specify the amount of space you want to add to the line height.  A negative number will decrease the line height.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Line Height


Automatic Kerning

Layout, Typesetting, Word/Letterspacing, Automatic Kerning

Purpose

Use Automatic Kerning to adjust the spacing for all occurrences of predefined pairs of letters.  The font you are using determines which letter pairs are kerned.

Steps

1	Choose Typesetting from the Layout menu, then choose Word/Letterspacing.

2	Select Automatic Kerning.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Advance

Manual Kerning

Word Spacing and Letterspacing


Baseline Placement for Typesetting

Layout, Typesetting, Word/Letterspacing, Baseline Placement for Typesetting

Purpose

Use Baseline Placement for Typesetting to place the first baseline at the top margin of the page.

Steps

1	Choose Typesetting from the Layout menu, then choose Word/Letterspacing.

2	Select Baseline Placement for Typesetting.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Advance


Date

Insert, Date

Purpose

Use Date to place the current date and time in your documents and to change the date format.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want to insert the date.

2	Choose Date from the Insert menu, then choose Date Text or Date Code.

Date text is never updated to reflect the current date.  A date code is updated each time you open, insert, or print the document.

See Also

Date Format

Custom Date Format


Insert Filename/Path and Filename

Insert, Other, Filename or Path and Filename

Purpose

Use Insert Filename to insert the name of the current file into your document text, comment, header, or footer.  Use Insert Path and Filename to insert both the path and the filename.

Steps

1	Save the current document.

2	Place the insertion point where you want to insert the filename or path and filename.

3	Choose Other from the Insert menu.

4	Choose Filename to insert the filename.

or...  Choose Path and Filename to insert the path with the filename.

The filename or path and filename is inserted into the document and displays on screen.  If you change the name of your document, WordPerfect updates the filename in your document to correspond to the actual filename.

See Also

Comment

Headers/Footers

Save


Invert Colors

Layout, Font, Palette, Invert

Purpose

Use Invert to create complements for a single color or for a group of colors.

Complementary colors are colors found at opposite sides of the color wheel.

Steps

1	Choose Font from the Layout menu, then choose Palette.

2	Select a color from the color palette.

or...  If you want to invert a complete row of the color palette, drag from the starting color you want to the ending color you want.

or...  If you want to invert a block of the color palette, mark Select Rectangle, then drag from the starting color you want to the ending color you want.

3	Choose Invert.

4	Choose OK to replace the current palette.

or...  Choose Save As to save the palette with a new name.

See Also

Blend Colors

Color Model

Color Wheel

Copy/Paste Colors

Default Color Palette

Rainbow Colors

Save Color Palette


Copy/Paste Colors

Layout, Font, Palette, Copy or Paste

Purpose

Use Copy and Paste to copy a color from one cell of the color palette to another.

Steps

1	Choose Font from the Layout menu, then choose Palette.

2	Select a color from the color palette.

or...  If you want to copy a complete row of the color palette, drag from the starting color you want to the ending color you want.

or...  If you want to copy a block of the color palette, mark Select Rectangle, then drag from the starting color you want to the ending color you want.

3	Choose Copy.

4	Select the box where you want to copy the color, then choose Paste.

5	Choose OK to replace the current palette.

or...  Choose Save As to save the palette with a new name.

See Also

Blend Colors

Color Model

Color Wheel

Default Color Palette

Invert Colors

Rainbow Colors

Save Color Palette


Page Break

Insert, Page Break

Purpose

Use Page Break to insert a hard page break anywhere you want a new page to begin.

Steps

To insert a hard page break,

1	Place the insertion point where you want to end the page.

2	Choose Page Break from the Insert menu.

To delete a hard page break,

1	Move the insertion point to the end of the page before the hard page break, then press Delete.

or...  Choose Reveal Codes from the View menu, then drag the [HPg] code off the screen.

See Also

Footnote/Endnote

Headers/Footers

Keep Text Together

Master Document

Reveal Codes


Center Line

Layout, Line, Center

Purpose

You can center a single line of text between the left and right margins of your document.

Steps

To type centered text,

1	Place the insertion point where you want to type centered text.

2	Choose Line from the Layout menu, then choose Center.

You can also click the right mouse button anywhere in the document window, then choose Center.

3	Type the text, then press Enter.

You can also center existing text by placing the insertion point in front of the text, then following step 2.

To center text at a specific position,

1	Tab or space to the position on the line where you want to begin centering text.

2	Choose Line from the Layout menu, then choose Center.

You can also click the right mouse button anywhere in the document window, then choose Center.

3	Type the text, then press Enter.

See Also

Center Page

Justification


Flush Right

Layout, Line, Flush Right

Purpose

Use Flush Right to align a single line of text with the right margin, to align selected lines of text, to move part of a line to the right margin, or to insert dot leaders.

Steps

To align a single line of text,

1	Choose Line from the Layout menu, then choose Flush Right.

2	Type the text you want aligned at the right margin.

The text should be one line or shorter.

3	Press Enter to end the flush right alignment and begin a new line.

To align selected text,

1	Select the text you want aligned at the right margin.

2	Choose Line from the Layout menu, then choose Flush Right.

To align part of a line,

1	Place the insertion point at the beginning of the text you want aligned at the right margin.

2	Choose Line from the Layout menu, then choose Flush Right.

To insert a dot leader,

1	Choose Line from the Layout menu, then choose Flush Right.

2	Repeat step 1, then type text.

See Also

Justification


  New Document

File, New

Purpose

Use New to open a new document window.

Steps

1	Choose New from the File menu.

You can also click [image] on the Power Bar.

See Also

Open

Templates

View Modes


Close and Exit

File, Close or Exit

Purpose

Use Close to exit the current document.  Use Exit to exit any open documents, and then exit WordPerfect.

WordPerfect prompts you to save any changes you have made to a document before you close or exit it.

Steps

To close the current document,

1	Choose Close from the File menu.

If you have not changed the document since the last time you saved it, the document closes.  If you have changed the document, you are prompted to save your work.

2	Choose Yes to save the changes and exit the document.

or...  Choose No to close the document without saving it.

To exit WordPerfect,

1	Choose Exit from the File menu.

2	Choose Yes to save the changes to the document and exit WordPerfect.

or...  Choose No to continue exiting without saving the document.

See Also

Clear


Line Layout

Layout, Line

Purpose

Choose from the following topics for information on changing the format of a line:

Tab Set

Height

Spacing

Numbering

Hyphenation

Center

Flush Right

Other Codes

See Also

Document Layout

Font

Page Layout

Paragraph Layout


Indent

Layout, Paragraph, Indent

Purpose

Use Indent to move a complete paragraph one tab stop to the right.  Use Hanging Indent to move all but the first line of a paragraph one tab stop to the right.  Use Double Indent to move an entire paragraph in one tab stop from both margins.

Steps

1	Choose Paragraph from the Layout menu, then choose Indent, Hanging Indent, or Double Indent.

2	Type the text you want to indent.

3	Press Enter to end the indentation.

You can indent an existing paragraph by placing the insertion point in front of the first character in the paragraph, then choosing the type of indent you want.

See Also

Margins

Paragraph Format

Tab Set


Back Tab

Layout, Paragraph, Back Tab

Purpose

Use Back Tab to move the insertion point to the previous tab setting.  You can also move the insertion point left of the left margin to the previous tab setting.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want to tab to the left.

2	Choose Paragraph from the Layout menu, then choose Back Tab.

See Also

Indent

Margins

Ruler Bar

Tab Key

Tab Set


Paragraph Layout

Layout, Paragraph

Purpose

Choose from the following topics for information on changing the format of a paragraph:

Format

Border/Fill

Indent

Hanging Indent

Double Indent

Back Tab

See Also

Document Layout

Font

Line Layout

Page Layout


Page Layout

Layout, Page

Purpose

Choose from the following topics for information on changing the format of a page:

Center

Suppress

Delay Codes

Force Page

Keep Text Together

Border/Fill

Numbering

Subdivide Page

Binding

Paper Size

See Also

Document Layout

Font

Line Layout

Paragraph Layout


Document Layout

Layout, Document

Purpose

Choose from the following topics for information on changing the format of a document:

Initial Font

Initial Codes Style

Redline Method

Character Mapping

See Also

Font

Line Layout

Page Layout

Paragraph Layout


  Justification

Layout, Justification

Purpose

Use Justification to align text on the right and left margins or to center text between the margins.

Steps

To use justification,

1	Place the insertion point where you want the justification to begin.

2	Choose Justification from the Layout menu, choose the justification type you want, then type the text.

You can also click [image] on the Power Bar to quickly select a justification setting.

To justify existing text,

1	Select the text you want to justify.

or...  Place the insertion point anywhere on a line or in a paragraph where you want justification to begin.

2	Choose Justification from the Layout menu, then choose the justification type you want.

See Also

Center Line

Center Page(s)

Flush Right

Format (Table)

Power Bar

Select


Typesetting

Layout, Typesetting

Purpose

Use the typesetting features to adjust justification limits, letterspacing, word spacing, text advance and overstrike, baseline placement, and kerning and to insert printer commands.

Choose from the following topics:

Advance

Overstrike

Printer Command

Word/Letterspacing

Manual Kerning

See Also

Baseline Placement for Typesetting

Line Height (Leading)


Graphics Box

Graphics, Figure or Text or Equation or Table or User or Button or Watermark or Inline Equation

Purpose

Use Graphics Box to import clip art images, logos, charts, or drawings into your document and to create tables, quotes, text, sidebars, or equations.

You can put an image, text, or an equation into any graphics box style.  The name of each graphics box indicates which category of boxes in your document the box belongs to.

You can also create your own custom graphics box styles with the border, fill, position, and size options you want.

Choose from the following graphics box styles:

Style	Suggested Contents

Figure	Clip art images, charts, logos, or drawings created in WordPerfect graphics format (.WPG) or in another supported graphics format

Text	Quotes, sidebars, or any other textual information you want to set off from the main document

Equation	Mathematical, scientific, or business formulas and expressions

Table	Tables, spreadsheets, statistical data, or text

User	Clip art images, drawings, charts, text, equations, or tables

Button	Text, clip art images or drawings; use to graphically document a keystroke, a pushbutton, or an icon in your document

Watermark	A image printed behind the text in your document

Inline Equation	An equation or expression inserted in a line of text

The Figure, Text, and Equation box styles are already added to the Graphics menu; you can add additional graphics box styles.

Steps

To add a graphics box,

1	Place the insertion point where you want the graphics box to appear.

2	Choose Custom Box from the Graphics menu.

3	Highlight a box style in the Style Name group box,then choose OK.

4	Choose Content from the Feature Bar, then select Empty, Image, Text, Equation, or Image on Disk from the Content pop-up list.

5	If you selected Image or Image on Disk from the Content pop-up list, specify the path and filename of the image file.

or... Click the list button, then specify the path and filename of the image file.

6	If you selected Image or Image on Disk from the Content pop-up list, choose Edit to enter WP Draw and edit the image, or choose OK to return to your document.  To return to your document from WP Draw, choose Close and Return to Document from the File menu.

or... If you selected Text from the Content pop-up list, choose Edit, then type the text you want, create a table, define columns, or retrieve an existing document file.  When you are finished, choose Close on the Feature Bar to return to your document.

or... If you selected Equation from the Content pop-up list, choose Edit to enter the Equation Editor and create your equation.  When you are finished, choose Close from the File menu.

To add a graphics image directly into a document,

1	Place the insertion point where you want the image to appear.

2	Choose Figure from the Graphics menu.

3	Specify the path and filename of the image file.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Box Content

Create or Edit Equations

Edit Graphics Menu

Watermark


Join Cell/Table

Table, Join, Cell or Table

Purpose

Use Join Cells to join together cells you have selected.  Use Join Table to join two tables that have the same number of columns.

Steps

To join cells,

1	Select the cells you want to join.

2	Choose Join from the Table menu, then choose Cell.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Join Cells.

To join tables,

1	If the two tables are separated by text, move the text so that the second table immediately follows the first table.

2	Turn on Reveal Codes, then delete all hard return codes and any other codes between the Tbl Off code of the first table and the Tbl Def code of the second table until the Table codes are next to each other.

3	Place the insertion point in the first table.

4	Choose Join from the Table menu, then choose Table.

See Also

Cut, Copy, Paste

Split Cell

Split Table


Split Table

Table, Split

Purpose

Use Split to divide a table into two parts.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want to divide the table.

2	Choose Split from the Table menu, then choose Table.

3	Turn on Reveal Codes and move the insertion point between the Tbl Off code of the first table and the Tbl Def code of the second table, then press Enter a few times to separate the tables.

See Also

Join Cell/Table

Reveal Codes

Split Cell


Cascade

Window, Cascade

Purpose

When you have more than one document window open (not minimized), you can use Cascade to arrange the windows.  Cascaded windows overlap so that the title bar of each window is displayed.

Steps

1	Choose Cascade from the Window menu.

See Also

Tile

Windowing


Tile

Window, Tile

Purpose

When you have more than one document window open (not minimized), you can use Tile to arrange the windows.  Tiled windows are arranged on the screen with no overlapping.

Steps

1	Choose Tile from the Window menu.

See Also

Cascade

Windowing


Select Cell

Purpose

Use this feature to select a cell in your table so you can apply line and fill attributes to that cell.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in the cell you want to select.

2	Press Shft+F8.

See Also

Table Lines/Fill


  Speller

Tools, Speller

Purpose

Use Speller to check your document for misspelled words, duplicate words, and irregular capitalization.

Steps

1	Choose Speller from the Tools menu.

You can also choose [image] from the Power Bar.

2	If you want help on a Speller feature, choose Contents from the Speller Help menu.

or...  Choose Speller to open Speller Help.

If you receive the message "Cannot open Help file," you will need to copy to your WordPerfect directory the WPSH20US.HLP file that came with your application.

See Also

Grammatik

Language

Thesaurus

Writing Tool Preferences


  Thesaurus

Tools, Thesaurus

Purpose

Use Thesaurus to display synonyms or antonyms of words.

Steps

1	Choose Thesaurus from the Tools menu.

You can also choose [image] from the Power Bar.

2	If you want help on a Thesaurus feature, choose Contents from the Thesaurus Help menu.

or...  Choose Thesaurus to open Thesaurus Help.

If you receive the message "Cannot open Help file," you will need to copy to your WordPerfect directory the WPSH20US.HLP file that came with your application.

See Also

Grammatik

Language

Speller

Writing Tool Preferences


  Grammatik

Tools, Grammatik

Purpose

Use Grammatik to check your document for spelling, grammar and punctuation errors and style flaws.

Steps

1	Choose Grammatik from the Tools menu.

You can also choose [image] from the Power Bar.

2	If you want help on a Grammatik feature, choose Contents from the Grammatik Help menu.

or...  Choose Grammatik to open Grammatik Help.

If you receive the message "Cannot open Help file," you will need to copy to your WordPerfect directory the GWT51US.HLP file that came with your application.

See Also

Speller

Thesaurus

Writing Tool Preferences


  WP Draw

Graphics, Draw or Chart

Purpose

Use WP Draw to create or edit figures, graphs, or charts for your WordPerfect document.

Steps

1	Choose Draw from the Graphics menu.

or...  Choose Chart from the Graphics menu.

2	If you want help on a WP Draw feature, choose Contents from the WP Draw Help menu.

or...  Choose WP Draw to open the WP Draw Help.

If you receive the message "Cannot open Help file," you will need to copy to your WordPerfect directory the file WPDRUS.HLP that came with your application.


Equation Editor

Graphics, Equation

Use the Equation Editor to create and edit mathematical, scientific, or business formulas and expressions, then include them in your WordPerfect documents.

An equation or expression can be composed of numbers, letters, commands, symbols, and mathematical functions.

You can insert numbers and letters (also called variables) into the editing window by typing them from the keyboard.  You can insert commands, symbols, and mathematical functions by selecting them from the equation palette on the left side of the equation editor screen.

The equation palette has several groups that contain different sets of commands, symbols, and mathematical functions.  You can select the group from the Equation Palette pop-up list.

Choose from the following equation topics:

Create or Edit Equations

Equation Font

Equation Palette


Format Cell

Table, Format, Cell

Purpose

Use Format Cell to format the text in the current cell or in a group of cells.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in the cell you want to format.

or... Select the cells you want to format.

2	Choose Format from the Table menu.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Format.

3	Choose from the following options:

Option	Lets You
Appearance	Change the appearance of text in the cell(s).
Ignore Cell When Calculating	Prevent WordPerfect from using the contents of a cell when formulas are calculated.
Justification	Align cell text horizontally.
Lock	Prevent information in cell from being changed.
Text Size	Position text as superscript or subscript, or select a new size.
Use Column Appearance and Text Size	Clear current cell settings and use column settings.
Use Column Justification	Apply the current column justification setting to a cell.
Vertical Alignment	Align cell text vertically.
4	Choose OK.

See Also

Format Column (Table)

Format Row

Format Table


Format Column (Table)

Table, Format, Column

Purpose

Use Format Column to format the text in the current column or several columns.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in the column you want to format.

or... Select the columns you want to format.

2	Choose Format from the Table menu.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Format.

3	Select Column.

4	Choose from the following options:

Option	Lets You

Appearance	Change the appearance of text in column(s).

Column Margins	Set the left and right column margins.

Column Width	Set column width.

Digits after Decimal	Set the position, in decimal places, where the decimal will be placed.

Fixed Width	Keep the width of a column fixed regardless of margin or width changes in adjacent columns.

Justification	Align text horizontally in column(s).

Position from Right	Set the position, in a distance from the right of the cell, where the decimal will be placed.

Text Size	Position text as superscript or subscript, or select a new size.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Format Cell

Format Table


Format Row

Table, Format, Row

Purpose

Use Format Row to format the text in the current row or several rows.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in the row you want to format.

or... Select the rows you want to format.

2	Choose Format from the Table menu.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Format.

3	Select Row.

4	Choose from the following options:

Option	Lets You

Header Row	Designate a row (or rows) as a header.

Lines Per Row	Specify whether a single line or multiple lines of text are allowed in a row.

Row Margins	Specify top and bottom row margins.

Row Height	Specify a fixed row height, or set Auto height adjustment.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Format Cell

Format Column (Table)

Format Table


Format Table

Table, Format, Table

Purpose

Use Format Table to format all cells in a table.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in a table.

2	Choose Format from the Table menu.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Format.

3	Select Table.

4	Choose from the following options:

Option	Lets You

Appearance	Change the appearance of text in a table.

Column Margins	Set the left and right column margins.

Column Width	Set column width.

Digits after Decimal	Set the position, in decimal places, where the decimal will be placed.

Disable Cell Locks	Temporarily unlock a cell for editing or to place the insertion point in a locked cell so you can calculate it.

Fixed Width	Keep the width of a column fixed regardless of margin or width changes in adjacent columns.

Justification	Align text horizontally in a table.

Position from Right	Set the position, in a distance from the right of the cell, where the decimal will be placed.

Table Position	Position a table horizontally on the page, or specify an exact measurement from the left edge of the page.

Text Size	Position text as superscript or subscript, or select a new size.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Format Cell

Format Column (Table)

Format Row


Master Document

File, Master Document

Purpose

Use Master Document to help you manage large documents.

A master document is a WordPerfect file with links to subdocuments.  When a master document is expanded, the linked subdocuments are retrieved into the master document.

Steps

1	Open an existing or new WordPerfect document.

If you are creating links, place your insertion point where you want the link.

2	Choose Master Document from the File menu.

3	Choose from the following options:

Option	Lets You

Subdocument	Create links to subdocuments from the master document.

Expand Master	Retrieve linked documents in the master document.

Condense Master	Remove the subdocuments from the master document.  (The links for the subdocuments remain in the master document.)

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Condense Master

Expand Master

Subdocument


Default Color Palette

Layout, Font, Palette, Reset

Purpose

Use Default to return the color palette to its original state.

Steps

1	Choose Font from the Layout menu, then choose Palette.

2	Choose Default.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Blend Colors

Color Model

Color Wheel

Copy/Paste Colors

Invert Colors

Open Color Palette

Rainbow Colors

Save Color Palette


Documents/Backup (File Preferences)

File, Preferences, File, Documents/Backup

Purpose

Use Documents/Backup to specify a default pathname to document and backup files.

You can also turn on the Timed Document Backup and Original Document Backup features.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the File icon.

2	Select Documents/Backup.

3	Type pathnames in the Default Directory and Backup Directory text boxes.

You can click on the list button to select a directory.

4	If you want all your documents to be saved with the same extension, select Use Default Extension on Open and Save, then type an extension in the text box.

5	To make a backup copy of documents at regular intervals, select Timed Document Backup every, then specify a time interval.

6	To guard against accidentally replacing work that you did not intend to replace, select Original Document Backup.

7	Select Update QuickList with Changes if you want to update the QuickList with the changes you have specified.

8	Choose OK.

See Also

QuickList

Select Directory


Templates (File Preferences)

File, Preferences, File, Templates

Purpose

Use Templates to specify default and supplemental pathnames for template files.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the File icon.

2	Select Templates.

3	Type a pathname in the Default Directory text box, Supplemental Directory text box, or both.

You can click on the list button to select a directory.

4	Type a filename for the default and supplementary template files in the Default File and Supplemental File text boxes.

You can click on the Select File button to select a file.

5	To specify a template extension, type the extension in the Template File Extension text box.

6	Select Update QuickList with Changes if you want to update the QuickList with the changes you have specified.

7	Choose OK.

See Also

QuickList

Select Directory

Template


Spreadsheets (File Preferences)

File, Preferences, File, Spreadsheets

Purpose

Use Spreadsheets to specify default and supplemental pathnames for spreadsheet files.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the File icon.

2	Select Spreadsheets.

3	Type a pathname in the Default Directory text box, Supplemental Directory text box, or both.

You can click on the list button to select a directory.

4	Select Update QuickList with Changes if you want to update the QuickList with the changes you have specified.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Import Data or Create/Edit Data Link

QuickList

Select Directory


Databases (File Preferences)

File, Preferences, File, Databases

Purpose

Use Databases to specify default and supplemental pathnames for database files.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the File icon.

2	Select Databases.

3	Type a pathname in the Default Directory text box, Supplemental Directory text box, or both.

You can click the list button to select a directory.

4	Select Update QuickList with Changes if you want to update the QuickList with the changes you have specified.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Import Data or Create/Edit Data Link

QuickList

Select Directory


Printers/Labels (File Preferences)

File, Preferences, File, Printers/Labels

Purpose

Use Printers/Labels to specify default and supplemental pathnames for printer files and to specify a default label file.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the File icon.

2	Select Printers/Labels.

3	Type a pathname in the Default Directory text box, Supplemental Directory text box, or both.

4	Type the filename of the default label file you want to use in the Label File text box.

You can click on the list button to select a directory or filename.

5	To display specific types of labels, select Laser, Tractor Fed, or Both from the Default Labels to Display group box.

6	Select Update QuickList with Changes if you want to update the QuickList with the changes you have specified.

7	Choose OK.

See Also

Print

QuickList

Select Directory


Hyphenation (File Preferences)

File, Preferences, File, Hyphenation

Purpose

Use Hyphenation to specify a default pathname to hyphenation files.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the File icon.

2	Select Hyphenation.

3	Type a pathname in the Default Directory text box.

You can click on the list button to select a directory.

4	Select Update QuickList with Changes if you want to update the QuickList with the changes you have specified.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Line Hyphenation

Position Hyphen

QuickList

Select Directory


Graphics (File Preferences)

File, Preferences, File, Graphics

Purpose

Use Graphics to specify default and supplemental pathnames for graphics files.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the File icon.

2	Select Graphics.

3	Type a pathname in the Default Directory text box, Supplemental Directory text box, or both.

You can click on the list button to select a directory.

4	Select Update QuickList with Changes if you want to update the QuickList with the changes you have specified.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Graphics Menu

QuickList

Select Directory


Macros (File Preferences)

File, Preferences, File, Macros

Purpose

Use Macros to specify default and supplemental pathnames for macros files.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the File icon.

2	Select Macros.

3	Type a pathname in the Default Directory text box, Supplemental Directory text box, or both.

You can click on the list button to select a directory.

4	Select Update QuickList with Changes if you want to update the QuickList with the changes you have specified.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Macros

QuickList

Select Directory


Save Format

File, Save or Save As

Purpose

For a document you have converted to WordPerfect 6.0 file format, use this feature to save that document in another version of WordPerfect or in other file formats.

Steps

To save your document in a new format,

1	Choose Save from the File menu.

2	Select the file format you want, then choose OK.

If you choose Other, select the format you want, then choose OK.

To save a copy of your document in a new format,

1	Choose Save As from the File menu.

2	Select the file format you want, then choose OK.

3	Type a name for the document in the Name text box.

If you choose Other, select the format you want, then choose OK.

See Also

Directory Dialog Box (Save As)


Document (Display Preferences)

File, Preferences, Display, Document

Purpose

Use Document Display Preferences to display and activate features that affect the document window.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the Display icon.

2	Select Document.

3	Select Vertical and Horizontal to display the vertical and horizontal scroll bars.  If you want the horizontal scroll bar to appear all the time, select Show Always.  If you want the horizontal scroll bar to appear only when text runs off the screen, select When Required.

4	To change the units of measure used on dialog boxes and Reveal Codes, select a unit of measurement from the Units of Measure pop-up list.

5	To change the units of measure used on the Status Bar and Ruler Bar, select unit of measurement from the Status/Ruler Bar Display pop-up list.

6	Select any of the following options:

Option	Lets You

Comments	Display Comments in your document.

Table Gridlines	Display dashed lines to represent table lines when you have turned off table lines.

Graphics	Display graphics lines inside the graphics boxes in your document.

Hidden Text	Show hidden text.

Sculptured Dialog Boxes	Display dialog boxes that look three dimensional.

Windows System Colors	Display Windows system colors for text, document background, and dialog boxes.

7	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Graphics (View)

Hidden Text (View)


File Management

Purpose

Choose from the following topics for information on opening, organizing, and saving files stored on disks and network drives:

Open

QuickList

QuickFinder

Save

Save As


Show (Display Preferences)

File, Preferences, Display, Show

Purpose

Use Show Display Preferences to display a symbol wherever there is a space, a hard return, a tab, or an indent.  Symbols also display when you use Center, Flush Right, Soft Hyphen, Advance, or Center Page.  You cannot edit symbols.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the Display icon.

2	Select Show Symbols.

3	Make sure that the options you want to display symbols for are selected.

If you choose Show Symbols on New and Current Document, all of the symbols you have selected will appear by default until you change them again.

4	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Show Symbols


View/Zoom (Display Preferences)

File, Preferences, Display, View/Zoom

Purpose

Use View/Zoom Display Preferences to select a default view type and to specify the default zoom percentage for all documents.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the Display icon.

2	Select View/Zoom.

3	Select Draft, Page, or Two Page from the Default View group box.

4	Select a predefined zoom percentage or specify a custom percentage in the Other text box.

5	Select Margin Width, Page Width, or Full Page to calculate a zoom percentage based on your selection.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Zoom


Reveal Codes (Display Preferences)

File, Preferences, Display, Reveal Codes

Purpose

Use Reveal Codes Display Preferences to change the font, color, and size of Reveal Codes text and set other options.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the Display icon.

2	Select Reveal Codes.

You can also click the right mouse button in the Reveal Codes window, then choose Preferences.

3	Select a font from the Font list box, then select a point size from the Size list box.

4	Select a color for Reveal Codes text from the Text color palette in the Color group box.

5	Select a color for the background in the Reveal Codes window from the Background palette in the Color group box.

6	You can also choose from the following options:

Option	Lets You
Show Reveal Codes on New and Current Document	Turn on Reveal Codes every time you start WordPerfect or open a new document.
Wrap Lines At Window	Prevent codes from running off the display window by wrapping codes at code breaks.
Show Spaces as Bullets	Display diamond bullets wherever there are spaces.
Show Codes in Detail	Display formatting information with codes in the Reveal Codes window.
Show Codes Help Prompt	Display Help prompts for codes when you place the insertion point on them.
Sculptured Codes	Display codes that look three dimensional.
Window Size	Change the size of the Reveal Codes window as a percentage of the document window.
7	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Reveal Codes


Ruler Bar (Display Preferences)

File, Preferences, Display, Ruler Bar

Purpose

Use Ruler Bar to customize the way the Ruler Bar functions.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the Display icon.

2	Select Ruler Bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on the Ruler Bar, then choose Preferences.

3	Choose from the following options:

Option	Lets You
Show Ruler Bar on New and Current Document	Show the Ruler Bar for the current document and every time you start or open a new document.
Tabs Snap to Ruler Bar Grid	Make tabs snap to invisible grid lines in your document that occur every millimeter or 1/16 of an inch.
Show Ruler Bar Guides	Display a dotted vertical line (ruler guide) that extends from any tab or margin marker to the bottom of the document window when moving the tab or margin marker.
Sculptured Ruler Bar	Display the Ruler Bar so that it looks three dimensional.
4	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Ruler Bar (View)


Merge (Display Preferences)

File, Preferences, Display, Merge

Purpose

Use Merge (Display Preferences) to display merge codes as full codes or as markers or to hide the codes completely.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the Display icon.

2	Select Merge.

3	Choose from the following options:

Option	Lets You

Display Merge Codes	Display merge codes as text.

Display Merge Codes as Markers	Display merge codes as markers.

Hide Merge Codes	Display text without merge codes.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Merge


Column Spacing, Column Widths

Layout, Columns, Define, Column Spacing or Column Widths

Purpose

Use Column Spacing to adjust the spacing between columns.  Use Column Widths to adjust the widths of columns.

Steps

1	Choose Columns from the Layout menu.

2	Choose Define,  then choose from the following options:

Option	Lets You
Spacing Between Columns	Set a default space between columns.
Line Spacing Between Rows in Parallel Columns	Change the space between rows.
Space	Adjust the amount of space between two specific columns.
Fixed	Keep the width of the current column or space regardless of width or margin changes in other columns.
3	Choose OK.

See Also

Columns


Create or Edit Equations

Graphics, Equations

Purpose

Use the Equation Editor to create and edit mathematical, scientific, or business formulas and expressions, then include them in your WordPerfect documents.

Steps

1	To create an equation, place the insertion point where you want the equation to appear, then choose Equation from the Graphics menu to enter the Equation Editor.

or... To edit an existing equation, click the right mouse button on an equation, then select Edit Equation.

2	Type variables, and insert commands and symbols from the equation palette in the editing window.

or... To retrieve an equation, choose Insert File from the File menu, then type the path and filename of the equation file.

If you want to see how the equation looks in the display window, choose Redisplay from the View menu.

3	Choose Close from the File menu to save the equation and return to your document.

See Also

Edit Graphics Menu

Equation Editor

Equation Font

Equation Palette


Equation Palette

Graphics, Equation, View, Palette

Purpose

Use the Equation Palette to create or edit equations.  You can choose from eight palettes on the Equation Palette pop-up list.

Choose any of the following palettes:

Palette	What It Does

Commands	Displays formatting commands represented by keywords.

Large	Displays large and small mathematical, scientific, bracket, and brace symbols.

Symbols	Displays commonly used symbols.

Greek	Displays uppercase and lowercase Greek characters and some variants.

Arrows	Displays arrow styles and hollow and solid figures such as triangles, squares, and circles.

Sets	Displays set symbols, relational operators, and some Fraktur and hollow letters.

Other	Displays diacritical marks (accents) and orientations of ellipses.

Function	Displays mathematical functions (such as cos, sin, and log).

Steps

1	Choose a palette from the Equation Palette pop-up list.

See Also

Create or Edit Equations

Equation Font

WordPerfect Characters


Redisplay

Graphics, Equation, View, Redisplay

Purpose

Use Redisplay to update the display of an equation in the display window.

Steps

1	From the Equation Editor, choose Redisplay from the View menu.

See Also

Create or Edit Equations

Equation Editor


User Information (Environment Preferences)

File, Preferences, Environment, User Info for Comments and Summary

Purpose

Use User Info for Comments and Summary to add your full name, initials, and a unique color to the comments and summaries you insert in documents.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the Environment icon.

2	Type your name in the Name text box.

3	Type your initials in the Initials text box.

4	Choose the User Color button, then select a color.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Comment

Document Summary


Formatting (Environment Preferences)

File, Preferences, Environment, Formatting

Purpose

Use Formatting to control hyphenation, confirm the deleting of table formulas, confirm the deletion of codes, and note the location of hidden codes as you delete them.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the Environment icon.

2	Select how you want WordPerfect to prompt you for hyphenation from the Hyphenation Prompt drop-down list.

Option	What It Does

Always	Prompts you to position the hyphen for each word that spans the hyphenation zone.

Never	Hyphenates words that span the hyphenation zone without prompting you.

When Required	Prompts you to position the hyphen for any word that spans the hyphenation zone and is not found in the Speller file.

3	Select Confirm Deletion of Codes, Stop Insertion Point at Hidden Codes to delete codes only if Reveal Codes is turned on and to note the position of hidden codes.

4	Select Confirm Deletion of Table Formula to guard against accidentally typing text over the formulas you have created in tables or floating cells.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Line Hyphenation

Delete (Table)

Delete Table


Beep On (Environment Preferences)

File, Preferences, Environment, Beep On

Purpose

Use Beep On to specify when your computer sounds a beep in WordPerfect.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the Environment icon.

2	Select or deselect Error, Hyphenation, and Find Failure.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Find and Replace Text

Find Text

Hyphenation


Save Workspace (Environment Preferences)

File, Preferences, Environment, Save Workspace

Purpose

Use Save Workspace to save the document windows currently displayed on your screen.  This is useful if you plan to work on the same document the next time you start WordPerfect.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the Environment icon.

2	Choose one of the following options:

Option	Lets You

Always	Save the workspace every time you exit WordPerfect without being prompted.

Never	Not save the workspace during exiting.

Prompt on Exit	Decide at a prompt whether to save the workspace.

3	Choose OK.


Save (Environment Preferences)

File, Preferences, Environment, Save

Purpose

Use Save to set options that are in effect as you save a document.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the Environment icon.

2	Choose from the following options:

Option	Lets You
Set QuickMark on Save	Place a QuickMark at the insertion point whenever you save a document.
Reformat Document for Default Printer on Open	Format documents you open for the current printer.
3	Choose OK.

See Also

Bookmark


Menu (Environment Preferences)

File, Preferences, Environment, Menu

Purpose

Use Menu to either display or not display last opened filenames on the File menu, the shortcut keys on all menus, and the Help prompts that appear at the top of the screen.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the Environment icon.

2	Select or deselect Display Last Open Filenames, Display Shortcut Keys, and Show Help Prompts from the Menu group box.

3	Choose OK.


Create Horizontal or Vertical Line

Graphics, Horizontal Line or Vertical Line

Purpose

Use Horizontal Line or Vertical Line to add horizontal and vertical lines to your document.

Steps

1	For a horizontal line that is placed along the text baseline and extends from the left margin to the right margin, place the insertion point on the line of text where you want to add the line.

or... For a vertical line that is place on the left margin of the page and extends from the top margin to the bottom margin, place the insertion point anywhere on the page.

2	Choose Horizontal Line or Vertical Line from the Graphics menu.


Text Border Fill Style

Graphics, Edit Box, Border/Fill

Purpose

Use Border Fill/Style to add a fill style to the Text graphics box style.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box containing text.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Border/Fill.

or... Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Border/Fill from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then select Border/Fill.

3	Select a shade, pattern, or gradient fill style from either the Fill Style pop-up palette or the drop-down list.

If you select a pattern fill style or a gradient fill style, you can select a foreground color and a background color.

4	Select a foreground color from the Foreground pop-up palette.

5	Select a background color from the Background pop-up palette.

6	Choose OK, then choose Close from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box Feature Bar and return to your document.

See Also

Edit Fill Style


Create Text Box

Graphics, Text

Purpose

Use Text to create a text box in your document.

Steps

1	Choose Text from the Graphics menu.

2	Type the text you want.

3	Choose Close from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box Feature Bar and return to your document.

See Also

Text Border Fill Style


Rainbow Colors

Layout, Font, Palette, Rainbow

Purpose

Use Rainbow to insert a spectrum of colors into a block of cells on the color palette.

The first and last colors of the block determine the colors of the spectrum.

Steps

1	Choose Font from the Layout menu, then choose Palette.

2	If you want the spectrum to span a complete row of the color palette, drag from the starting color you want to the ending color you want.

or...  If you want the spectrum to be contained within a block of the color palette, mark Select Rectangle, then drag from the starting color you want to the ending color you want.

3	Choose Rainbow.

4	Choose OK to replace the current palette.

or...  Choose Save As to save the palette with a new name.

See Also

Blend Colors

Color Model

Color Wheel

Copy/Paste Colors

Default Color Palette

Invert Colors

Save Color Palette


Merge Feature Bar Options

Tools, Merge, Data or Form, OK, OK, OK, Close, Options

Purpose

When working with merge files, you can choose from the following Merge Feature Bar Options:

Option	Lets You

Sort (data only)	Sort data records.

Print (data text only)	Print a data text file.

Display Codes	Display merge codes as text.

Display as Markers	Display merge codes as markers.

Hide Codes	Display text without merge codes.

Remove Merge Bar	Remove the merge bar and change merge file to normal document file.

See Also

Create Data File

Merge Data File Feature Bar

Print

Sort


  Underline

Layout, Font, Underline

Purpose

Use Underline to underline text.

Steps

To underline text as you type,

1	Choose Font from the Layout menu, then choose Underline from the Appearance group box.

You can also click [image] on the Power Bar.

2	Type the text you want underlined.

3	Choose Font from the Layout menu, then choose Underline from the Appearance group box again to turn off Underline.

To underline existing text,

1	Select the text you want underlined.

2	Choose Font from the Layout menu, then choose Underline from the Appearance group box.

You can also click [image] on the Power Bar.

See Also

Font


Specify Conditions for Merge

Tools, Merge, Merge, Select Records, Specify Conditions

Purpose

Use Specify Conditions to limit the records in the data file that you want to merge.

Steps

1	Choose Merge from the Tools menu, then choose Merge.

or...  Choose Merge from the Merge Feature Bar, then choose Merge.

2	Specify file locations.

3	Choose Select Records, then select Specify Conditions.

4	To specify a range,  select Record Number Range, then specify the beginning and ending record.

5	To specify conditions, select a field from each Field drop-down list.

6	Type the selection criteria in the Condition text boxes.

Criteria	Example

Single Value	Utah

List of Values	Utah;Hawaii;California

Range of Values	Ohio-Utah

Excluded Values	!Utah (not Utah)

Zero or More Wildcard	U-* (from U to the end of the alphabet)

One Character Wildcard	J??n (4-letter words beginning with J, ending with n, any letters between)

7	For an example of selection criteria, choose Example.

8	For more examples, choose More, then choose Close twice.

9	Choose OK twice to perform the merge.

See Also

Perform Merge

Merge


Mark Records (Merge)

Tools, Merge, Merge, Select Records, Mark Records

Purpose

Use Mark Records to limit the records in the data file that you want to merge.

Steps

1	Choose Merge from the Tools menu, then choose Merge.

or...  Choose Merge from the Merge Feature Bar, then choose Merge.

2	Specify file locations.

3	Choose Select Records, then select Mark Records.

4	Specify the beginning and ending records you want to display in Display Records From and To.

5	Select the field where you want the display to start in the First Field to Display drop-down list.

6	Choose Update Record List to reflect your display choices.

7	Select the records you want to mark.

or...  Choose Mark all Records.

8	Choose OK twice to perform the merge.

See Also

Perform Merge

Merge


Drag and Drop Text

Purpose

Use Drag and Drop Text to move or copy selected text using your mouse.

Steps

1	Select the text you want to move or copy.

2	Place the mouse pointer anywhere on the selected text, then drag to move the insertion point where you want to move or copy the text.

3	To move the text to the insertion point location, release the mouse button.

or...  To copy the text at the insertion point location, press Ctrl while you release the mouse button.

See Also

Cut, Copy, Paste

Select


Compare Document

File, Compare Document

Purpose

Use Compare Document to contrast the current document with a different version of the document.  WordPerfect adds markings to the current document to indicate text that has been added, deleted, moved, or changed.

Steps

1	Make sure you have opened the newest version of the document you want to compare.

2	Choose Compare Document from the File menu, then choose Add Markings.

3	Select Word, Phrase, Sentence, or Paragraph to indicate how you want to compare the documents.

4	If you want to compare the opened document with the old version of the document on disk, choose OK.

or...  If you want to compare the opened document with a document that has a different filename, type the path and filename of that document in the text box or select it using the list button, then choose OK.

WordPerfect applies Strikeout to any deleted information and Redline to any added information.

See Also

Redline Method

Remove Markings


Object

Edit, Object

Purpose

Use Object from the Edit menu to perform an action on an OLE object.

You can also double-click most objects with the left mouse button to switch to the server application where you can edit the object.  If you double-click on a sound or movie object, a sound or movie clip will play.

Steps

1	Select the object, then choose Edit (application name) Object from the Edit menu.

You can also select the object, click the right mouse button, then choose Edit (application name) Object.

2	Make your changes in the source file application.

3	Choose Exit & Return to Document from the File menu.

or... Choose Update from the File menu if you do not want to exit the server application.

This option may be worded differently in various server applications.  See the documentation for your server application.

4	Choose Yes to save the file and update the copy in your document.

or...  Choose No to discard the changes you made and return to the WordPerfect document window.

See Also

Paste Special


  Button Bar (View)

View, Button Bar

Purpose

Use this feature to display or hide the Button Bar on the document screen.

Steps

To display (or hide) the Button Bar,

1	Choose Button Bar from the View menu.

You can also click [image] on the Power Bar.


Ruler Bar (View)

View, Ruler Bar

Purpose

Use the Ruler Bar with your mouse to work with Margins, Paragraph Format, Tabs, and Columns.

Steps

1	Choose Ruler Bar from the View menu to display or hide the Ruler Bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on the Ruler Bar, then choose Tab Set, Paragraph Format, Margins, Columns, Tables, Hide Ruler Bar, or Preferences.

2	Choose from the following topics for more information about the options on the Ruler Bar:

Columns

Margins

Paragraph Format

Tab Set


Status Bar (View)

View, Status Bar

Purpose

Use the View menu to display or hide the Status Bar.

Steps

1	Choose Status Bar from the View menu.

If there is a check mark by the Status Bar option, the Status Bar will display.

See Also

Status Bar Options

Status Bar Preferences

View Modes


Graphics (View)

View, Graphics

Purpose

Use this feature to display or hide graphics in the document window.

Steps

1	Choose Graphics from the View menu.


Other (Insert)

 	Insert, Other

Purpose

Choose Other from the Insert menu to insert bar codes, counters, and path and filenames into your document.

For more information, choose from the following topics:

Filename

Path and Filename

Counter

Bar Code


Spreadsheet/Database

Insert, Spreadsheet/Database

Purpose

Use the Spreadsheet/Database option to import and link information from a spreadsheet file or a database file into a WordPerfect document.

Importing a spreadsheet or database copies information from the spreadsheet or database file one time only.  Linking spreadsheet or database information lets you update the information in your WordPerfect document to keep it current with any changes.

For more information, choose from the following topics:

Import Data or Create/Edit Data Link

Link Options

Update

See Also

Define Selection Conditions


RGB (def)
RGB

RGB (red, green, blue) uses the primary colors of light to define colors.  When each color is at its maximum intensity, the color defined is white.


Data Fill

Table, Data Fill

Purpose

Use Data Fill to continue a pattern of incrementing values across a row or down a column.

You can use Roman numerals, days of the week, months, or quarters, even if only one cell is used to establish the pattern.  To repeat incrementing numbers, however, at least two cells with values are required to establish a pattern.

Steps

1	Select the cells that contain the incrementing pattern of values you want to repeat.

2	Extend the selection to include the cells in which you want to continue the pattern.

3	Choose Data Fill from the Table menu.

You can also choose Data Fill from the Table Formula Feature Bar.

See Also

Table Functions

Table Formula Feature Bar


Sum in Table Formula

Table, Sum

Purpose

Use Sum to quickly calculate the sum of the values in cells above or to the left of the insertion point position.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in the table cell following the group of cells whose total you want to calculate.

or... Select a range of cells to calculate sums for each column and row in the selection.

2	Choose Sum from the Table menu.

You can also click Sum from the Table Formula Feature Bar.

The calculated sum overwrites any values, formulas, or text that existed in the cell.

See Also

Table Functions


Cell Formula Entry

Table, Cell Formula Entry

Purpose

Use Cell Formula Entry to type formulas into table cells or floating cells.

Formulas you type are calculated when you move the insertion point out of the cell that contains the formula.

Steps

1	Select Cell Formula Entry from the Table menu.

2	Type a formula directly into a cell or floating cell.

3	Move the insertion point out of the cell.

If the formula is valid, it is calculated.

4	To turn off Cell Formula Entry, choose Cell Formula Entry from the Table menu again.

See Also

Number Type (Table)


Go to Data

Tools, Merge, Form, None, OK, Go to Data, Create

Purpose

Use Go to Data to switch to the associated data file or create a new data file.

Steps

1	From a form file, choose Go to Data from the Merge Feature Bar.

If no data file is associated, the Associate dialog box appears.

2	Choose Select, select the file from the appropriate directory, then choose OK.

or...  Choose Create, type a filename, select Records Stored in a Table (if you want), then choose OK.

3	Type the name of the first field, then press Enter.

4	Repeat step 3 for each field, then choose OK.

5	Fill in the Quick Data Entry by typing information in each field, then pressing Enter.

6	Choose Close when you have finished entering data.

7	Choose Yes to save the data file.

8	Choose Go to Form to return to the associated form file.

See Also

Associate (Merge)

Create Data File

Go to Form

Merge Data File Feature Bar

Merge Form File Feature Bar


Go to Form

Tools, Merge, Data, OK, Close, Go to Form, Create

Purpose

Use Go to Form to switch to the associated form file or create a new form file.

Steps

1	From a data file, choose Go to Form from the Data File Feature Bar.

If no form file is associated, the Associate dialog box displays.

2	Choose Select, specify file locations, then choose OK.

or...  Choose Create, then insert fields and merge codes from the Merge Form File Feature Bar.

3	Choose Go to Data to return to the associated data file.

See Also

Associate (Merge)

Create Form File

Go to Data

Merge Data File Feature Bar

Merge Form File Feature Bar


Windowing

Purpose

The area on the screen where you type your documents is called a document window.  You can open, move, size, and arrange as many as nine document windows (depending on available memory).

Steps

To open a document window,

1	Choose New from the File menu to open an empty window.

or...  Choose Open from the File menu to open a document window as you open a file.

To close a document window,

1	Double-click the Control menu in the upper left corner of a document window.

or...  Choose Close from the File menu.

To switch between open document windows,

1	Click on a displayed window to make it active.

or...  Choose the document you want from the Window menu.

or...  Use the following keystrokes:

To Move To	Use This Keystroke

Previous document	Ctrl+Shft+F6

Next document	Ctrl+F6

Previous window	Alt+Shft+F6

Next window	Alt+F6

Previous pane	Shft+F6

Next pane	F6

See Also

Arranging Windows

Sizing Windows


Clear

Purpose

Use Clear to discard the contents of the active document window without saving the document.

If you want to be prompted to save changes, you should use Close.

Steps

1	Press Ctrl+Shift+F4.

See Also

Close and Exit


Hidden Text

View, Hidden Text

Purpose

Use Hidden Text to include questions, notes, or comments in your document.  You can then display, print, or hide the text.

You can choose Hidden Text from the View menu to display or hide the hidden text you have created in your document.  The hidden text appears in Reveal Codes when the codes are shown in detail.

Steps

To create hidden text,

1	Place the insertion point where you want to create the hidden text.

2	Choose Hidden Text from the View menu.

3	Choose Font from the Layout menu, choose Hidden from the Appearance Group, then choose OK.

4	Type the text you want to hide, then press the right arrow key to turn off the Hidden feature.

To create hidden text from existing text,

1	Select the text you want to hide.

2	Choose Font from the Layout menu, choose Hidden, then choose OK.

To convert hidden text to document text,

1	Make sure that the hidden text in your document is displayed.

2	Choose Reveal Codes from the View menu.

3	Drag the hidden text code out of the Reveal Codes window.

If you delete a Hide code when the hidden text is not displayed in the document window, you will delete the text.  To restore the deleted code, which includes the hidden text, choose Undo from the Edit menu.

See Also

Comments

Reveal Codes

Undo


Delete (Text)

Purpose

Use Delete to remove text, graphics, and codes from a document.

Steps

To delete text and graphics,

1	Select the text and graphics you want to delete.

2	Press Delete or Backspace.

or...  Type new text.

To delete codes,

1	Choose Reveal Codes from the View menu.

2	Place the insertion point to the immediate left or right of the code you want to delete.

3	Press Delete to delete the code to the right of the insertion point.

or...  Press Backspace to delete the code to the left of the insertion point.

You can also delete a code by dragging it out of the Reveal Codes area with the mouse.

See Also

Cut, Copy, Paste

Find and Replace

Reveal Codes

Undelete

Undo


Abbreviations

Insert, Abbreviations

Purpose

Use Abbreviations to quickly insert information you often include in your documents.  You can expand an abbreviation at any time.

Steps

To create an abbreviation,

1	Select the information for which you want to create an abbreviation.

2	Choose Abbreviations from the Insert menu, then choose Create.

3	Type a short abbreviation for the information, choose OK, then choose Close.

Abbreviations are case-sensitive.  For example, if you create an abbreviation in lowercase letters, such as "jsg," you can create another abbreviation for the same document or template using those letters in uppercase, such as "JSG."

To insert an abbreviation,

1	Place the insertion point where you want to insert the information represented by the abbreviation.

2	Type the abbreviation.

Since the abbreviation is saved with the current template, you can expand it during any WordPerfect session.

To expand an abbreviation,

1	Select the abbreviation or place the insertion point anywhere on it.

2	Choose Abbreviations from the Insert menu, then choose Expand.

See Also

Template


Customizable Interface (def)
Customizable Interface

Put the features you use most on your work screen.  With customizable features such as the Power Bar, Menu Bar, Status Bar, and Button Bar, you can bring the tools you need out into the open.


Add Printer

File, Select Printer, Add Printer (WordPerfect)

File, Print, Select, Add Printer (WordPerfect)

Purpose

Use Add Printer to add a printer to the list of available printers.

If you want to print using a Windows printer driver, WordPerfect provides access to the necessary Windows dialog boxes from within WordPerfect.  For information about adding a printer in Windows, refer to the Microsoft Windows User's Guide or use the online Help system available on each of the Windows dialog boxes.

Steps

1	Choose Select Printer from the File menu.

2	Choose Add Printer, then choose WordPerfect.

3	Select Printer Files (*.prs), select the printer you want to add, then choose OK.

or...  If the printer you want to add is not listed in the .PRS printer files, select Additional Printers (*.all), select the printer you want to add, then choose OK.

4	If the Create Printer dialog box appears, confirm the printer driver filename, or specify a new filename, then choose OK.

5	Highlight the printer you want for your current printer, then choose Select.

If the printer you want to use is not displayed in the .PRS or .ALL list, you may need to install additional .ALL files using the installation program.

See Also

Printer Information

Printer Setup

 Print: Add Printer, Reference


HLS (def)
HLS

HLS (hue, lightness, saturation) defines colors in the context of a monitor.  Hue adjusts the color (0=red, 120=green, 240=blue, 360=red), lightness adjusts the amount of white and gray, and saturation adjusts the amount of color.


Advance

Layout, Typesetting, Advance

Purpose

Use Advance to place text at an absolute position on a page or at a position relative to the current insertion point position.

Steps

To advance to a position or line,

1	Choose Typesetting from the Layout menu, then choose Advance.

2	Select From Left Edge of Page or From Top of Page, then specify a distance.

3	To place the advanced text below, rather than above the position measured from the top of the page, deselect Text above Position.

4	Choose OK.

To advance left, right, up, or down from the insertion point,

1	Choose Typesetting from the Layout menu, then choose Advance.

2	Select Left from Insertion Point, Right from Insertion Point, Up from Insertion Point, or Down from Insertion Point, then specify a position in the Horizontal or Vertical Distance text box.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Baseline Placement for Typesetting

Manual Kerning


Assign Macro to Menu

Tools, Macro, Play, Menu

Purpose

Use Assign Macro to Menu to assign as many as nine of the macros you use most to the Macro menu for easy access.  Anytime you want to play one of these macros, you can simply choose it from the Macro menu.

Steps

1	Choose Macro from the Tools menu, then choose Play.

2	Choose Menu from the Play Macro dialog box.

3	Choose Insert to open the Select Macro dialog box.

4	Type the name of the macro in the Name text box, then choose Select.

or...  Click the list button, highlight the macro you want, then choose OK.

or...  Choose Location to select a different type of macro to insert.

5	Choose OK to return to your document.

See Also

Macros

Macro Feature Bar

Macro Location

Record/Play/Edit a Macro


ExpressDocs Templates (def)
ExpressDocs Templates

Now you can skip formatting altogether because WPWin comes with 75 predesigned ExpressDocs document templates.  Simply select the layout you want and plug in the text.

How to Use It


Bookmark

Insert, Bookmark

Purpose

Use Bookmark to mark a location in a document so that you can return to that location quickly.

Steps

To set a QuickMark,

1	Place the insertion point where you want the QuickMark.

2	Choose Bookmark from the Insert menu, then choose Set QuickMark.

To find a QuickMark,

1	Choose Bookmark from the Insert menu, then choose Find QuickMark.

To find a bookmark,

1	Choose Bookmark from the Insert menu.

2	Select the name of the bookmark that you want to find.

3	Choose Go To to move the insertion point to that bookmark.

or...  Choose Go To & Select to move the insertion point to that bookmark and select the text.

To move a bookmark,

1	Move the insertion point to the place where you want to move the bookmark.

2	Choose Bookmark from the Insert menu.

3	Select the name of the bookmark that you want to move.

4	Choose Move.

See Also

Create or Rename Bookmark


Customize Border

Purpose

Use Customize Border to create or edit borders surrounding document text.

For more information, choose from the following topics:

Customize Paragraph Border

Customize Page Border

Customize Column Border

See Also

Border


Border

Layout, Paragraph or Page or Column, Border/Fill

Purpose

Use Border to add a border style around a paragraph, a page, or columns.

Steps

To create a paragraph border,

1	Place the insertion point anywhere in the paragraph where you want the border to first appear.  The border will surround the paragraph and all subsequent paragraphs in the document.

or... Select any amount of text in the paragraph(s) you want to surround with a border.

2	Choose Paragraph from the Layout menu, then choose Border/Fill.

3	Select a border style from either the Border Style pop-up palette or the drop-down list.

If you want only horizontal separator lines between paragraphs, select Column Between.

4	Select a shade, pattern, or gradient fill style from either the Fill Style pop-up palette or the drop-down list.

If you select a pattern fill style or a gradient fill style, you can select a foreground color and a background color.

5	Select a foreground color from the Foreground pop-up palette.

6	Select a background color from the Background pop-up palette.

7	Choose OK.

To create a page border,

1	Place the insertion point anywhere on the page where you want the border to first appear.  The border will surround the page and all subsequent pages in the document.

or... Select any amount of text on the page(s) you want to surround with a border.

2	Choose Page from the Layout menu, then choose Border/Fill.

3	Select a border style from either the Border Style pop-up palette or the drop-down list.

4	Select a shade, pattern, or gradient fill style from either the Fill Style pop-up palette or the drop-down list.

If you select a pattern fill style or a gradient fill style, you can select a foreground color and a background color.

5	Select a foreground color from the Foreground pop-up palette.

6	Select a background color from the Background pop-up palette.

7	Choose OK.

To create a column border,

1	Place the insertion point anywhere in a column.

The border will surround all the columns in your document.

2	Choose Columns from the Layout menu, then choose Border/Fill.

3	Select Column Between from the Border Style drop-down list if you want a vertical separator line only between columns.

or... Select Column All from the Border Style drop-down list if you want a column border on the outside edge of the column text and a vertical separator line between columns.

or... Select <None> from the Border Style drop-down list.

4	Select a shade, pattern, or gradient fill style from either the Fill Style pop-up palette or the drop-down list.

If you select a pattern fill style or a gradient fill style, you can select a foreground color and a background color.

5	Select a foreground color from the Foreground pop-up palette.

6	Select a background color from the Background pop-up palette.

7	Choose OK.

See Also

Customizing Paragraph Border

Customizing Page Border

Customizing Column Border


Box Caption

Graphics, Edit Box, Caption, Edit

Purpose

Use Box Caption to add caption text to any graphics box in your document.

Steps

1	While in Page view, select the graphics box you want.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Caption.

or... Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Caption from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

3	Choose Edit from the Box Caption dialog box.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then select Caption.

4	If you do not want a number in the caption, press Backspace to delete the number style.

5	Type the caption text you want.

6	Choose Close from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

See Also

Caption Numbering and Styles

Caption Position

Caption Width

Rotate Caption


Box Content

Graphics, Edit Box, Content

Purpose

Use Box Content to specify the contents of a graphics box, an image, an image on disk, text, equation, or an image that already exists in the document.

Use the Image on Disk option from the Content pop-up list if the file size of your image is large and you do not want to increase the file size of the document.

Use the Document Image option from the Content pop-up list to select from a list of existing images in your document.

You can also use Box Content to change the horizontal and vertical position of the contents inside the graphics box or to rotate text.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box whose contents you want to change.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Content.

or... Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Content from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box with a caption, then select Content.

3	Choose a box content type from the Content pop-up list.

If you choose a Content option that is different from the current graphics box contents, choose Yes to delete the current box contents.

4	If you select Image or Image on Disk from the Content pop-up list, specify the path and filename of the image file.

or... Click the list button, then select an image file.

If you want the image height and width of a graphics box to remain proportional when resized, select Preserve Image Width/Height Ratio.

5	If you select Image or Image on Disk from the Content pop-up list, choose Edit to enter WP Draw and edit the image, or choose OK to return to your document.  To exit WP Draw, choose Close and Return to Document from the File menu.

or... If you select Text from the Content pop-up list, choose Edit, then type the text you want, create a table, define columns, or retrieve an existing document file.  Choose Close from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

or... If you select Equation from the Content pop-up list, choose Edit to enter the Equation Editor,then create your equation.  Choose Close from the File menu.

See Also

Content Position Inside a Graphics Box

Rotate Text


CMYK

CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow, black) is modeled after the colors that printers use for color separation.  When all colors are at their maximum level, the color produced is black.  An absence of colors produces white.


Edit Box

Graphics, Edit Box

Purpose

Use this feature to locate numbered graphics boxes for editing.

You must have more than one graphics box in your document to use this feature.

Steps

1	Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu.

2	Select Document Box Number, then specify the graphics box number in the text box to the right.

or... Select a counter style in the Counters list box, then specify a number in the Counter Number text box.

3	Choose OK.


Box Position

Graphics, Edit Box, Position

Purpose

Use Box Position to change the anchor type of a graphics box or to move the box to a new position on the page.

You can anchor a graphics box to a page, a paragraph, or a single character.

Graphics Box Style	Default Anchor Type

Figure	Paragraph

Text	Paragraph

Equation	Paragraph

Table	Paragraph

User	Paragraph

Button	Character

Watermark	Page

Inline Equation	Character

For more information, choose from the following topics:

Put Box in Current Paragraph

Put Box on Current Page

Treat Box as Character


Box Size

Graphics, Edit Box, Size

Purpose

Use Box Size to change the width and height of a graphics box.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Size.

or... Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Size from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then select Size.

3	Select Set from the Width options, then specify a width measurement.

or... Select Full to have the graphics box automatically fill the width of the page from the left margin to the right margin or fill the width of a column.

or... Select Size to Content to automatically adjust the width of the box, based on the width of the box contents.

4	Select Set from the Height options, then specify a height measurement.

or... Select Full to have the graphics box automatically fill the height of the page from the top margin to the bottom margin.

or... Select Size to Content to automatically adjust the height of the box, based on the height of the box contents.

Note that when you select Full for the height of the box, the box placement is automatically changed to a page-anchored box.

5	Choose OK, then choose Close on the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box Feature Bar and return to your document.


Box Style

Graphics, Graphics Styles, Box, Create or Edit

Purpose

Use Box Style to create new graphics box styles or edit existing graphics box styles.

Steps

1	Choose Graphics Styles from the Graphics menu, then select Box from the Style Type group box.

2	Select a box style from the styles list box, then choose Edit.

or...  Choose Create, then type the name of the new box style in the Style Name text box.

See Also

Create or Edit Box Style

Style List


Create or Edit Box Style

Graphics, Graphics Styles, Create or Edit

Purpose

Use Create or Edit Box Style to create a predefined box style based on a custom graphics box style or a style of your own.

Steps

1	Choose Graphics Styles from the Graphics menu.

2	Select Box from the Style Type group box.

3	Highlight a predefined box style, then choose Edit.

or... Choose Create, then type a name for the new box style in the Style Name text box.

4	Choose the box options you want to modify.

5	Choose OK until you return to the Create Box Style dialog box or the Edit Box Style dialog box.

6	Choose OK, then highlight the new or edited box style.

7	Choose Close, then choose OK.

See Also

Box Caption

Box Content

Box Position

Box Size

Text Border Fill Style

Text Box Initial Style

Wrap Text


Box Style Name

Graphics, Graphics Styles

Graphics, Custom Line, Line Styles, Options, Copy or Retrieve or Save As

Purpose

Use Box Style Name when you are copying, retrieving, or saving line styles, fill styles, border styles, or graphics box styles.

Steps

1	Choose Graphics Styles from the Graphics menu, then select a style type from the Style Type group box.

2	If you want to copy a graphics style from the default or supplemental template, choose Setup from the Options drop-down list, select an option, then choose OK.

You must specify your default and supplemental templates in File Preferences before you can access them.

3	Select a style from the Styles list box, then choose Copy or Retrieve or Save As from the Options drop-down list.

4	Specify a style name in the New Style Name text box or the Filename text box.

or... Specify the path (if necessary) and filename in the Filename text box.

5	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

File Preferences

Graphics Styles

Template


Bullets & Numbers

Insert, Bullets & Numbers

Purpose

Use Bullets & Numbers to insert bullets or numbers into your document.  The numbers you insert increment automatically.  You can choose from several bullet and number styles or create your own.

Steps

To insert bullets or numbers before typing text,

1	Choose Bullets & Numbers from the Insert menu.

2	Select a bullet or number style.

3	If you choose a number style, you can select Starting Value, then specify a value you want to use to begin numbering (1 is the default value).

4	If you want to insert a new bullet or number every time you press Enter, select New Bullet or Number on ENTER.

5	Choose OK.

To apply bullets or numbers to existing text,

1	Select the paragraphs to which you want to apply bullets or numbers.

2	Choose Bullets & Numbers from the Insert menu.

3	Select a bullet or number style.

4	Choose OK.

To edit a bullet or number style,

1	Choose Bullets & Numbers from the Insert menu.

2	Select a bullet or number style.

3	Choose Edit.

4	Follow the instructions in Styles Editor.

See Also

Counter Numbering

Outline Feature Bar

Page Numbering


Abbreviation/Button Bar/Keyboard/Menu Bar Location
Abbreviations/Button Bar/Keyboard/Menu Bar Location

File, Preferences, Button Bar or Keyboard or Menu Bar, Create, Template

Insert, Abbreviations, Create, Template

Purpose

Use Location to specify where you want to store a new Button Bar, keyboard, menu bar, or abbreviation.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the Button Bar icon, the Keyboard icon, or the Menu Bar icon.

or... Select text in the document, then choose Abbreviations from the Insert menu.

2	Choose Create, then type a name in the text box.

3	Choose Template, select a storage location from the Storage group box, then choose OK and Close.

See Also

Abbreviations

Create Button Bar

Template


Button Bar/Keyboard/Menu Bar Preferences

File, Preferences, Button Bar or Keyboard or Menu Bar

Purpose

Use Preferences to create, edit, copy, and delete Button Bars, keyboards, and menu bars.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu.

2	Double-click the Button Bar icon, the Keyboard icon, or the Menu Bar icon.

See Also

Button Bar Editor

Keyboard Editor

Menu Bar Editor


Button Bar Options

File, Preferences, Button Bar, Options

Purpose

Use Button Bar Options to change the font face, font size, appearance, location, and number of rows or columns of buttons you want displayed.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the Button Bar icon.

2	Choose Options.

3	Select the font you want to appear on the buttons from the Font Face list box.

4	Select the font size you want to appear on the buttons from the Font Size list box.

5	Select an option in the Appearance group box to specify how the buttons on the Button Bar will appear.

6	Select an option from the Location group box to position the Button Bar on your screen.

7	Specify how many rows or columns of the Button Bar you want to display on the screen by typing a number in the Maximum number of Rows/Columns to Show text box.

8	Choose OK and Close until you return to your document.

See Also

Button Bar Bitmap Editor

Button Bar Customize

Button Bar Editor

Create Button Bar


Calculate

Table, Calculate

Purpose

Use Calculate to calculate the formulas only in the current table or in the tables and floating cells throughout the entire document.

Steps

To calculate the current table,

1	Place the insertion point in a table.

2	Choose Calculate from the Table menu, then choose Calc Table.

To calculate the entire document,

1	Choose Calculate from the Table menu, then choose Calc Document.

You can also choose Calculate from the Table Formula Feature Bar.

To set Automatic Calculation Mode,

1	Choose Calculate from the Table menu.

2	Select Calculate Table to automatically calculate the current table.

or... Select Calculate Document to automatically calculate the entire document.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Table Formula Feature Bar


View Error

Table, Formula Bar, View Error

Purpose

Use View Error to display a brief explanation of the ?? and ERR error symbols that may appear in your table as you calculate formulas.

Steps

1	Choose Formula Bar from the Table menu.

2	Choose View Error.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Table Formula Feature Bar


Center Page(s)

Layout, Page, Center

Purpose

Use Center Page to center text between the top and bottom margins.

Steps

To turn Center Page on or off,

1	If you are turning centering on or off for a single page, place the insertion point on that page.

or...  If you are turning centering on or off for several pages, place the insertion point on the page where you want centering to begin or end.

2	Choose Page from the Layout menu, then choose Center.

3	If you want to turn centering on for the current page only, select Current Page.

or...  If you want to turn centering on for the current page and all pages that follow, select Current and Subsequent Pages.

or...  If you want to turn centering off, select No Centering.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Center Line


Compatibility (def)
Compatibility

You can move to WPWin and bring your existing WordPerfect documents and macros with you--there's no need to spend time or money recreating valuable work.  You'll also save on training costs because we've retained our familiar WordPerfect look.  You even have your choice of keyboard layouts, including WordPerfect for DOS.


Hide Bars Information

View, Hide Bars

Purpose

Use Hide Bars to remove the Button Bar, Power Bar, Ruler Bar, menu bar, scroll bar, and Status Bar from your screen.

This gives you the maximum amount of screen space.

Steps

To remove the bars from the screen,

1	Choose Hide Bars from the View menu.

2	Choose OK.

To restore the bars to the screen,

1	Press Cancel (the Escape key).

or...  Press Alt+V, then select Hide Bars from the View menu.

See Also

Button Bar (View)

Power Bar (View)

Ruler Bar (View)

Status Bar (View)


  Columns

Layout, Columns, Define

Purpose

Use Columns to divide text vertically on a page.  You can choose from four types of columns.

Option	Lets You

Newspaper	Flow text down a column to the bottom of a page or column break, then start it again at the top of the next column to the right, as with a newspaper article.

Balanced Newspaper	Adjust newspaper columns so that columns are of equal length.

Parallel	Group columns across the page in rows, or start subsequent rows below the longest column of the previous row (useful for scripts, charts, or lists like this one).

Parallel with Block Protect	Keep all rows of the columns together across page breaks.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want columns to start.

2	Choose Columns from the Layout menu, then choose Define.

To quickly choose a number of columns, click and hold [image] on the Power Bar, then choose a number of columns.

3	Specify a number of columns in the Columns text box.

4	Select Newspaper, Balanced Newspaper, Parallel, or Parallel w/Block Protect.

5	Choose OK.

6	Type the information you want in the columns.

7	Choose Columns from the Layout menu, then choose Off.

See Also

Column Spacing, Column Widths

Create Table


Comment

Insert, Comment, Create or Edit

Purpose

Use Comment to add comments to your text.  Comments can be included in document text including footnotes, endnotes, and outlines.

Comments are not printed as part of the document.

Steps

To create a comment,

1	Select the text you want to place into a comment.

or... Place the insertion point where you want the comment to appear.

2	Choose Comment from the Insert menu, choose Create, then type the comment text.

If you want to include initials, a name, date, or time, choose Initials, Name, Date, or Time from the Comment Feature Bar.

Your initials and your name are available only if you have previously specified them in Environment Preferences.

3	If you want to see existing comments in your text, choose Next or Previous.

4	Choose Close from the Comment Feature Bar to return to your document.

To edit a comment,

1	Place the insertion point near the comment you want to edit.

2	Choose Comment from the Insert menu, then choose Edit.

If you are using Page view, you can quickly access the comment by double-clicking its icon.

3	Edit the comment.

4	Choose Close from the Feature Bar.

See Also

Converting and Hiding Comments

Environment Preferences

Hidden Text


Condense/Save Subdocuments

File, Master Document, Condense Master

Purpose

Use the Condense Master option when you want to remove the subdocuments from the master document.

You can also use this option to save the subdocuments whether or not you condense the master document.

Steps

1	Choose Master Document from the File menu, then choose Condense Master.

2	Select the subdocuments that you want to condense.

or...  Choose Mark, then choose Condense All.

3	Select the subdocuments that you want to save.

or...  Choose Mark, then choose Save All.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Expand Master

Subdocument

Master Document


Convert File Format

File, Open

Insert, File

Purpose

When you are opening or inserting a file that is not in WordPerfect format, use Convert File Format to verify the format you are converting from.

Steps

1	Choose Open from the File menu, or choose File from the Insert menu.

2	Specify the file you want to open or insert, then choose OK.

3	If the format in the text box is the format you are converting from, choose OK.

or...  If the format in the box is not the format you are converting from, choose the correct format from the drop-down list, then choose OK.

See Also

Directory Dialog Box (Open)


Convert Table

Table, Create, Tabular Column or Parallel Column

Purpose

Use Convert Table to convert tabular text or parallel columns into a table.

Steps

1	Select the tabular or parallel columns you want to convert into a table.

2	Choose Create from the Table menu.

3	Choose Tabular Column or Parallel Column, then choose OK.

Tables converted from tabular text may contain extra rows or cells.  Use the Join or Delete options to remove the extra rows or cells.

See Also

Delete (Table)

Join Cell/Table


Copy Abbreviation/Button Bar/Keyboard/Menu Bar

File, Preferences, Button Bar or Keyboard or Menu Bar, Copy

Insert, Abbreviations, Copy

Purpose

Use this feature to copy abbreviations, Button Bars, keyboards, or Menu Bars to a template of your choice.

Steps

1	Use one of the routes above ( [image]) to display the Copy dialog box, then specify the template you want to copy from.

2	Select the item(s) you want to copy.

3	Select the template that you want to copy to.

4	Choose Copy, then choose Close until you return to your document.

See Also

Overwrite/New Name

Template


Copy Formula (Table)

Table, Copy Formula

Purpose

Use Copy Formula to copy a formula to a cell you specify.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in the cell that contains the formula you want to copy.

2	Choose Copy Formula from the Table menu.

You can also choose Copy Formula from the Table Formula Feature Bar.

3	Specify the cell to which you want to copy the formula in the To Cell text box.

or...  Select Down or Right, then specify the number of times to copy the formula down or to the right.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Cell Formula Entry

Table Functions


Copy/Create Printer

File, Select Printer, Copy

File, Select Printer, Add Printer (WordPerfect), OK

Purpose

Use Copy or Create Printer to confirm a printer driver filename or to specify a new filename.

Steps

1	Using one of the routes above ( [image]), display the Copy Printer or Create Printer dialog box.

2	Choose OK to confirm the printer driver filename.

or...  Specify a new filename in the Printer Filename text box, then choose OK.

See Also

Print

Print Preferences


Include Subdocument

File, Master Document, Subdocument

Purpose

Use Include Subdocument when you want to create links to subdocuments from the master document.

Steps

1	Open the master document file, then place the insertion point where you want to insert a subdocument link.

2	Choose Master Document from the File menu, then choose Subdocument.

You can also press the right mouse button in the left margin, then choose Subdocument.

3	Specify the filename of the document you want to create a link for, then choose Include.

You can type the filename in the Filename text box or double-click the filename in the Filename list box.

4	Repeat this procedure for each subdocument you want to link.

See Also

Condense Master

Expand Master

Master Document


Counter Numbering

Insert, Other, Counter

Purpose

Use Counter Numbering to count or number anything in your document.

Steps

To create or edit a counter,

1	Choose Other from the Insert menu, then choose Counter.

2	Choose Create or Edit.

To display a counter,

1	Place the insertion point where you want to display a counter number.

2	Choose Other from the Insert menu, then choose Counter.

3	Select a counter or counter level from the Counter list.

4	Select Display in Document.

To increase or decrease the value of a counter,

1	Place the insertion point where you want to increase (or decrease) the counter number.

2	Choose Other from the Insert menu, then choose Counter.

3	Select a counter or counter level from the Counter list.

4	Select Increase.

or...  Select Decrease.

To increase (or decrease) and display counters in one step,

1	Place the insertion point where you want to increase (or decrease) and display a counter number.

2	Choose Other from the Insert menu, then choose Counter.

3	Select a counter or counter level from the Counter list.

4	Choose Increase and Display.

or...  Choose Decrease and Display.

See Also

Create or Edit Counter Definition

Set Value/Number Method (Counter)


Create or Rename Bookmark

Insert, Bookmark, Create

Purpose

Use Create or Rename Bookmark to create or rename bookmarks.

Steps

To create a bookmark,

1	Place the insertion point where you want the bookmark.

or...  Select the text you want for the bookmark.

2	Choose Bookmark from the Insert menu.

3	Choose Create.

4	Choose OK.

or...  Type a name for the bookmark, then choose OK.

Bookmarks are case sensitive.  For example, "USA" and "usa" are different bookmarks.

To rename a bookmark,

1	Choose Bookmark from the Insert menu.

2	Select the name of the bookmark that you want to rename.

3	Choose Rename.

4	Type the new name, then choose OK.

See Also

Bookmark


Create Button Bar/Keyboard/Menu Bar

File, Preferences, Button Bar or Keyboard or Menu Bar, Create

Purpose

Use Create Button Bar/Keyboard/Menu Bar to create new Button Bars, keyboards, or menu bars.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the Button Bar icon, the Keyboard icon, or the Menu Bar icon.

2	Choose Create, type a name in the text box, then choose OK.

See Also

Button Bar Editor

Button Bar Bitmap Editor

Button Bar Customize

Button Bar/Keyboard/Menu Bar Preferences

Keyboard Editor

Menu Bar Editor

Menus Customize


Create or Edit Counter Definition

Insert, Other, Counter, Create or Edit

Purpose

Use Create or Edit Counter Definition to create or edit a counter definition.

Steps

1	Choose Other from the Insert menu, then choose Counter.

2	Choose Create.

or...  Select a counter or counter level from the Counter list, then choose Edit.

3	Specify a name for the counter in the Counter Name text box.

4	To use more than one numbering level, specify the number of levels you want.

5	To change the numbering method for a counter with only one numbering level, select a method from the Single Level Method pop-up list (numbers, letters, or Roman numerals).

or...  To change the numbering method for a numbering level, select a method from the appropriate Numbering Method pop-up list.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Counter Numbering

Set Value/Number Method (Counter)


Create Data File

Tools, Merge, Data, Create Data File

Tools, Merge, Form, OK, None, OK, Go to Data, Create, Create Data File

Purpose

Use Create Data File to create a data file to merge with a form file.  The data file contains records that can be formatted as a data text file or arranged in a data table.

Steps

1	Choose Merge from the Tools menu.

2	To create a data text file, choose Data.

or... To create a data table, select Place Records in a Table, then choose Data.

3	If you have text in the active window, choose OK to use the current window for the data file.

or...  Select New Document Window, then choose OK.

4	Type the name of a field, then press Enter.

or...  Choose OK to use field numbers instead of names.

5	Repeat step 4 for each field, then choose OK.

6	Type the data for each record in the Quick Data Entry text boxes, pressing Enter between each field and record.

7	Choose Close when you have finished entering the records you want.

8	Choose Yes to save the data file, specify a filename, then choose OK.

See Also

Create Form File

Go to Data

Merge Data File Feature Bar

Perform Merge

Quick Data Entry


  Rotate (Image)

Graphics, Edit Box, Tools, Rotate

Purpose

Use this feature to rotate an image around a point inside a graphics box.

Steps

To rotate an image,

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or...  Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

3	Click [image].

4	Drag one of the corner rotation handles in the direction you want to rotate the image.

To specify the degree of rotation,

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or...  Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

3	Click [image], then select Rotate Image.

4	Specify the degree of rotation you want in the Amount text box, then choose OK.

See Also

Invert (Image)

Mirror (Image)

Move (Image)

Reset All (Image)

WP Draw

Zoom (Image)


Create Form File

Tools, Merge, Form, OK, Create Form File

Tools, Merge, Data, OK, OK, Close, Go to Form, Create, Create Form File

Purpose

Use Create Form File to create a form file that can be made up of text, graphics, and merge codes, which direct the pattern of the merged output.

A form file is merged with a data source (usually a data text file or data table).

Steps

1	Choose Merge from the Tools menu, then choose Form.

2	If you are prompted, choose OK to use the current window for the form file.

or...  Select New Document Window, then choose OK.

3	Specify a filename to associate a data file, then choose OK.

or...  Select None, then choose OK.

4	If you want formatting and paper size to apply to all merged documents, choose Document from the Layout menu, then choose Initial Codes Style.  Enter formatting and paper size options, then choose OK.

5	Type text and retrieve graphics into your form file.

6	To reference a field from a data file, choose Insert Field from the Merge Feature Bar.

7	Select the field name you want, then choose Insert.

or...  If no data file is associated, choose OK, type the field name or number you want, then choose Insert.

You can also choose Data File to associate a data file at this time.

8	Select another field, then choose Insert.

9	Repeat step 8 as often as you need, then choose Close.

10	Choose other options from the Merge Form File Feature Bar, then save or merge the file.

See Also

Create Data File

Go to Form

Merge Form File Feature Bar

Perform Merge


Create or Edit Hypertext Link

Tools, Hypertext, Create

Purpose

Use Create or Edit Hypertext Link to create a link that will let you move from one location in a current document to another place within that document, to another document, or to a macro.

Steps

To create a hypertext link,

1	Select the words or symbols in your document that you want to use as hypertext.

2	Choose Hypertext from the Tools menu, then choose Create from the Feature Bar.

3	Choose one of the following options and type the name of the bookmark or macro to which you would like to create a link.

You can also click the list buttons for Go to Bookmark, Go to Other Document, or Run Macro to get a list of existing bookmarks, documents, or macros.

Option	What It Does

Go to Bookmark	Inserts a link that will jump to an existing bookmark within the current document.

Go to Other Document	Inserts a link that will jump to an existing bookmark in another document.

Run Macro	Inserts a link that will run the macro you specify.

4	Select Text or Button to specify how you want hypertext to appear in your document.

If you select Text, you can specify the style of highlighted text you prefer.  If you select Button, you can place text or characters inside the button by editing the graphic.

To edit a hypertext link,

1	Place the insertion point on the button or to the right of the underlined hypertext link you want to edit.

2	Choose Hypertext from the Tools menu, then choose Edit.

3	Make any changes, then choose Close.

To delete a hypertext link,

1	Place the insertion point on the button or anywhere within the underlined hypertext link you want to delete, choose Hypertext from the Tools menu, then choose Delete.

See Also

Bookmarks

Hypertext Feature Bar

Macros


Create or Edit List Definition

Tools, List, Define, Create or Edit

Purpose

Use this feature to create or edit a list definition.

Steps

To create a list definition,

1	Choose List from the Tools menu.

2	Choose Define from the List Feature Bar.

3	Choose Create, then type a name in the List text box.

4	Select a position for the page numbers in the list.

5	To use volume numbers, chapter numbers, and secondary page numbers in your list, choose Page Numbering.

6	Choose User-Defined Page Number format, then insert the options you want.

7	Choose OK.

To edit a list definition,

1	Choose List from the Tools menu.

2	Choose Define from the List Feature Bar.

3	Select the list you want to define, then choose Edit.

4	Select a position for the page numbers in the list.

5	To use volume numbers, chapter numbers, and secondary page numbers in your list, choose Page Numbering.

6	Choose User-Defined Page Number format, then insert the options you want.

7	Choose OK.

To change the current style,

1	Choose Change.

To create a list of captions for figure, table, text, equation, or user-defined boxes,

1	Choose List from the Tools menu, then choose Define from the List Feature Bar.

2	Choose Create.

3	Type a name for the caption list.

4	Edit the list definition.

5	Select the type of graphics box caption you want from the Auto Reference Box Captions drop-down list.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Define List or Table of Authorities

List Feature Bar

List or Table of Authorities Style


Create Merge File

Tools, Merge, Data or Form

Purpose

Use the Create Merge File dialog box when you are creating a data or form file from a window already containing information.

You can choose to use the active window or open a new one.  If you choose the active window, the current information becomes part of the data or form file.

Steps

1	Open a window, then type information.

2	Choose Merge from the Tools menu, then choose Data or Form.

3	Select Use File in Active Window.

or...  Select New Document Window.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Create Data File

Create Form File


Create Name (Table)

Table, Names, Create

Purpose

Use Create Name to name cells, ranges, columns, and rows using text that you type manually or text from the current cell.

Steps

To name table components manually,

1	Place the insertion point in the cell, column, row, or table you want to name.

or... If you want to name a range, select a range of cells.

2	Choose Names from the Table menu.

You can also choose Names from the Table Formula Feature Bar.

3	Choose Create.

4	Select Cell/Range, Column, or Row, then type a name in the Enter Name Manually text box.

5	Choose OK, then choose Close.

To name table components using text in the current cell,

1	Place the insertion point in the cell that contains the text you want to use to name the column, the row, the cell to the right, or the cell below.

or... If you want to name several adjacent columns, rows, or cells simultaneously, select the cells containing the text that you want to use as the name.

2	Choose Names from the Table menu.

You can also choose Names from the Table Formula Feature Bar.

3	Choose Create.

4	Select Use Text from Current Cell to Name.

5	Select Column, Row, Cell Right, or Cell Down.

6	Choose OK.

7	Look at the list of names in the Table Names in Current Document dialog box to confirm them.

8	Choose Close.

See Also

Edit Name/Reference (Table)

Table Names in Current Document


Quick Create (Style)

Layout, Styles, Quick Create

Purpose

Use Quick Create to create a paragraph style containing all the formatting codes and font attributes in an existing paragraph or to create a character style containing all the font attributes (such as Bold and 12pt) on an existing character.

Steps

1	Format the text on which you want to base your style.  For example, format one heading the way you want all your headings to look.

2	With the insertion point on the text you have formatted, choose Styles from the Layout menu, then choose Quick Create.

3	Type a name for the style.  If you want, type a description for the style.

4	Select Paragraph if you want the style to affect the paragraph containing the insertion point or the selected text (useful for headings).

or...  Select Character if you want the style to affect selected text or text you are about to type.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Style List

Styles Editor

Template


  Create Table

Table, Create

Purpose

Use Create Table to create a floating cell or specify the number of columns and rows you want in your table.

Steps

1	Choose Create from the Table menu then specify the number of columns and rows you want.

or... Select Floating Cell to create a floating cell.

2	Choose OK.

You can also click and drag [image] from the Power Bar to select the number of rows and columns you want to create in a table.

See Also

Delete (Table)

Delete Table

Format

Insert Columns/Rows Into Table

Join Cell/Table

Number Type (Table)

Split Cell

Split Table

Table Cut/Copy

Table Formula Feature Bar

Table Lines/Fill

Table Names in Current Document


Create or Edit Table of Authorities

Tools, Table of Authorities, Define, Create or Edit

Purpose

Use Create Table of Authorities to create or edit a table of authorities section definition.

Steps

1	Choose Table of Authorities from the Tools menu.

2	Choose Define from the Table of Authorities Feature Bar.

3	Choose Create, then type a name in the Name text box.

or...  Select the section you want to define, then choose Edit.

4	Select a position for the page numbers in the table.

5	To use volume numbers, chapter numbers, and secondary page numbers in your table, choose Page Numbering.

6	Choose User-Defined Page Number format, then insert the options you want.

7	Choose OK.

If you want to change the current style, choose Change.

See Also

List or Table of Authorities Style


Custom Box

Graphics, Custom Box

Purpose

Use Custom Box to define your own graphics box style, then save it with your current document or for use in future documents.

Steps

To create a graphics box style,

1	Choose Custom Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Styles.

2	Choose Create, then type a name for the box style in the Style Name text box.

3	Select options to create the graphics box style.

4	Choose OK until you return to the Create Box Style dialog box, then choose OK to return to the Box Styles dialog box.

5	Choose Close.

To use a graphics box style,

1	Make sure the new box style is highlighted.

2	Choose Select, then choose OK.

To save the style in the current document, the default template, or the supplemental template,

1	Choose Custom Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Styles.

2	Choose Setup from the Options drop-down list, select an option under List Styles From, then choose OK.

See Also

Border

Box Caption

Box Content

Box Position

Box Size

Text Box Initial Style

Wrap Text


Custom Date Format

Insert, Date, Date Format, Custom

Purpose

Use Custom Date Format to customize the format of all subsequent dates in the current document.

Steps

1	Choose Date from the Insert menu, then choose Date Format.

2	Select the format you want to edit, then choose Custom.

3	Select and insert codes from the Date Codes and Time Codes list boxes to create a new date and time format.

4	Type any punctuation, spaces, and text you want to include with the date in the Edit Date Format text box.  You can also delete punctuation, spaces, text, and codes.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Date

Date Format


Customize Date Type (Table)

Table, Number Type, Date/Time, Custom

Purpose

Use Customize Date Type to change the format of the date and time that is used when you select Date/Time on the Number Type dialog box.

Steps

1	With your insertion point in a table, choose Number Type from the Table menu.

2	Select Date/Time.

3	Choose Custom.

4	Select a date/time format from the Date/Time Types drop-down list.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Number Type


Customize Number Type (Table)

Table, Number Type, Custom

Purpose

Use Customize Number Type to change the format of number types.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in the table you want to change, then choose Number Type from the Table menu.

2	Choose Custom, then change an option:

Option	Lets You

Negative Numbers	Format negative numbers with a minus sign (-), parentheses, or the CR/DR symbol.

Use Currency Symbol	Turn on the currency symbol for any number type except Date/Time and Text.

Align Currency Symbol	Align the currency symbol at the left edge of the cell if Use Currency Symbol is selected.

Symbol	Select an international currency symbol.

Digits after Decimal	Change the number of digits after the decimal point.

Round for Calculation	Determine whether the rounded value of a cell is returned when referenced for calculation.

Use Commas	Allow commas in the numbers you type in cells (does not affect Scientific, Date, and Text number types).

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Number Type


Custom Line Edit

Graphics, Edit Line, Line Styles, Edit, Custom

Purpose

Use Custom Line Edit to edit a horizontal or vertical line.

Steps

1	Select a graphics line.

2	Choose Edit Line from the Graphics menu.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics line, then select Edit Horizontal Line or Edit Vertical Line.

3	Choose Line Styles.

4	Highlight a line style you want to edit, then choose Edit.

5	Choose Custom, then choose the length and spacing options you want.

You can also add and delete dashes by choosing Add or Del.

6	Choose OK twice, highlight the edited line style, choose Select, then choose OK.

See Also

Create Horizontal or Vertical Lines

Custom Line Styles


Define Color Printing Palette

Layout, Font, Palette

Purpose

Use Define Color Printing Palette to create and select colors for use in your documents.

To print the colors you specify for your document, you must use a printer that supports color printing.

For more information, choose from the following options:

Blend Colors

Color Model

Color Wheel

Copy/Paste Colors

Default Color Palette

Invert Colors

Rainbow Colors

See Also

Font

Open Color Palette

Save Color Palette


Define Index

Tools, Index, Define

Purpose

Use Define Index to define where and how you want the index to appear.

Steps

1	Choose Index from the Tools menu.

2	Choose Define from the Index Feature Bar.

3	Select a position for the page numbers in the index entries.

4	To use volume numbers, chapter numbers, and secondary page numbers in your index, choose Page Numbering.

5	If you want to print each page number out (for example, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8) rather than combined (for example, 4-8), deselect Use Dash to Show Consecutive Pages.

If you are using a concordance file, type the filename or click the list button, then select a file.

6	Choose OK.

To change the current style, choose Change.

See Also

Generate


Index or Table of Contents Styles

Tools, Index, Define, Change

Tools, Table of Contents, Define, Styles

Purpose

Use Index or Table of Contents Styles to change the style used for index and table of contents entries.

Steps

To replace the style with an existing style,

1	Using one of the routes ( [image]) above, display the Index or Table of Contents Styles dialog box.

2	Select the level style you want to change.

3	Select a style from the Styles list.

4	Choose OK.

To create a style,

1	Using one of the routes ( [image]) above, display the Index or Table of Contents Styles dialog box.

2	Choose Create, then create a style.

3	Choose OK.

To edit a style,

1	Using one of the routes ( [image]) above, display the Index or Table of Contents Styles dialog box.

2	Choose Edit, then edit the style.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Define Index

Define Table of Contents

Styles Editor


Page Number Format

Layout, Page, Numbering

Tools, Index or Table of Contents, Define, Page Numbering

Tools, List or Table of Authorities, Define, Create or Edit, Page Numbering

Purpose

Use Page Number Format to customize the way the page numbers appear.

Steps

1	Using one of the routes ( [image]) above, display the Page Number Format dialog box.

2	Select User-Defined Page Number Format.

3	Choose Insert, then choose the types of numbers you want to include in the page number format for your index.

4	Type any text and punctuation that you want to include with the numbers.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Page Numbering


Define Selection Conditions

Insert, Spreadsheet/Database, Import, Query

Insert, Spreadsheet/Database, Create or Edit Link, Query

Purpose

Use Define Selection Conditions if you are importing a database and you want to import or link specific information.  For example, you could find all the records of people with the last name of Jones who live in the state of Arizona.

Steps

1	Choose Spreadsheet/Database from the Insert menu.

2	Choose Import to import query information from the database one time only.

or... Choose Create Link to create a link that will enable you to update the linked database information after changes are made.

3	Choose the kind of database you want to import or link from the Data Type drop-down list.

4	In the Filename text box, type the filename of the database file you want to import or link.

You can also click the file icon to select a file, then choose OK.

5	Choose Query, then select the conditions for each of the fields you want to import or link into your document.

You can choose Example from the Define Selection Conditions dialog box to see more information on how conditions should be specified.  Choose Close when you have finished viewing the example.

6	Choose OK until you return to the document window.

See Also

Spreadsheet/Database


Define Table of Contents

Tools, Table of Contents, Define

Purpose

Use Define Table of Contents to define where and how you want the table of contents to appear.

Steps

1	Choose Table of Contents from the Tools menu, then choose Define from the Table of Contents Feature Bar.

2	Specify the Number of Levels (1-5) you want in the table of contents.

3	Select a position for the page numbers for each level of the table of contents.

If you want to use volume numbers, chapter numbers, and secondary page numbers in your table of contents, choose Page Numbering.

If your table of contents has more than one level and you want the last level wrapped flush left instead of indented, select Display Last Level in Wrapped Format.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Index or Table of Contents Styles

Table of Contents Feature Bar


Define List or Table of Authorities

Tools, List or Table of Authorities, Define

Purpose

Use Define List or Table of Authorities to choose a definition and location for a list or table of authorities section.

Steps

To insert a definition into your document,

1	Choose List or Table of Authorities from the Tools menu, then choose Define.

2	Select a definition, then choose Insert.

To create a definition,

1	Choose List or Table of Authorities from the Tools menu, then choose Define.

2	Choose one of the following options:

Create (List)

Create (Table of Authorities)

To edit a definition,

1	Choose List or Table of Authorities from the Tools menu, then choose Define.

2	Select a definition, then choose one of the following options:

Edit (List)

Edit (Table of Authorities)

To retrieve a definition,

1	Choose List or Table of Authorities from the Tools menu, then choose Define.

2	Choose Retrieve.

See Also

Create or Edit List Definition

Create or Edit Table of Authorities

Retrieve List Definitions


Delay Codes Feature Bar

Layout, Page, Delay Codes, Number of Pages to Delay, OK

Purpose

Use Delay Codes to start features and insert codes that will take effect a specified number of pages after the current page.

Delay codes are inserted at the top of your document (or at a previous hard page break).

Steps

To insert a delay code,

1	Place the insertion point on the page in your document where you want to delay codes.

2	Choose Page from the Layout menu, then choose Delay Codes.

3	Specify the number of pages you want to delay codes, then choose OK.

For example, if you are on page 3 and you specify 2, changes will begin on page 5.

4	Choose font and formatting options from the menus.

or...  Choose options from the Delay Codes Feature Bar.

5	When you have finished entering codes, choose Close from the Delay Codes Feature Bar.

To edit a delay code,

1	Choose Reveal Codes from the View menu.

2	Double-click the delay code you want to edit.

3	Make the changes you want, then choose Close from the Delay Codes Feature Bar.

See Also

Suppress


Delete (Table)

Table, Delete

Purpose

Use Delete to delete the structure or content of a specific row or column of a table.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in the row or column you want to delete or in the cell that contains the contents you want to delete.

or... Select the rows or columns in the table you want to delete, or select the cells that contain the contents you want to delete.

2	Choose Delete from the Table menu.

If you have selected cells, rows, or columns, you can also press Delete or Backspace, or click the right mouse button, then choose Delete.

3	If you selected rows or columns in step 1, select Columns or Rows to delete the column or row structure and contents, or select Cell Contents to delete only the contents of the selection.

or... Select Columns or Rows and specify the number of columns or rows you want to delete, or select Cell Contents to delete the contents of the current cell.

If you mistakenly delete a table component or content, use Undo to restore it.

See Also

Undo


Delete Printer

File, Select Printer, Delete

File, Print, Select, Delete

Purpose

Use Delete Printer to remove a printer from the list of available printers.

Steps

To delete a WordPerfect-driven printer,

1	Choose Select Printer from the File menu.

2	Choose Delete, then choose OK.

The .PRS file (where the definition is saved) remains in your printer files directory and can be added again, unless you select Delete the associated .PRS.

To delete a Windows-driven printer,

1	Choose Select Printer from the File menu.

2	Choose Delete, then highlight the printer you want to delete in the Printers dialog box.

3	Choose Remove, then choose Yes.

See Also

Add Printer

Printer Information


Code Page (Environment Preferences)

File, Preferences, Environment, Code Page

Purpose

Use Code Page to define which ASCII or ANSI character set is used in a document.  Different ASCII or ANSI character sets are used for different languages.  When you save a document, you can change the code page, and thus the character set, for the document.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the Environment icon.

2	Choose Code Pages.

3	Select a DOS, Windows, Input File, or Output File code page.

4	Choose OK.


Display Preferences

File, Preferences, Display

Purpose

Use Display Preferences to set options that affect your display until you change the options again.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the Display icon.

2	Choose from the following options:

Document (Display Preferences)

View/Zoom (Display Preferences)

Ruler Bar (Display Preferences)

Show (Display Preferences)

Reveal Codes (Display Preferences)

Merge (Display Preferences)


Document Summary Configuration

File, Document Summary, Configure

Purpose

Use Document Summary Configuration to customize the fields in your document summary.

Steps

1	Choose Document Summary from the File menu.

2	Choose Configure.

3	Select fields from the Available Fields list to include them in the Selected Fields list.

or...  Deselect fields to remove them from the list.

4	Drag the fields to arrange the Selected Fields as desired.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Document Summary

Document Summary Options

Document Summary Preferences


Document Character Map

Layout, Document, Character Mapping

Purpose

Use the Character Map feature to reduce document size when typing in non-Roman languages (such as Greek, Cyrillic, or Hebrew).  When you select a language in the Document Character Map dialog box, you select it for the current document only.

If you want to select a character map for all new documents, you must purchase an additional Language Module containing the desired language files then add the character map to your template.

Steps

1	Choose Document from the Layout menu, then choose Character Mapping.

Character maps are listed only for the non-Roman language modules you have purchased.

2	Select the character map for the language you are currently using, then choose Apply.

See Also

Language

Template


Date Format

Insert, Date, Date Format

Purpose

Use Date Format to choose from several predefined date formats.

Steps

1	Choose Date from the Insert menu, then choose Date Format.

2	Select a format, then choose OK.

You can also choose Custom to edit the selected format.

See Also

Custom Date Format

Date


Document on Disk

File, Print, Document on Disk

Purpose

Use Document on Disk to print a document stored on a hard disk, floppy disk, or network drive without opening it in the document window.

Steps

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

2	Select Document on Disk, then choose Print.

3	Type the filename of the document you want to print in the Filename text box or click the list button, then select a file using the drive, directory, and file lists.

4	Specify the pages, secondary pages, chapters, and volumes to print.

5	Choose Print.

See Also

Multiple Pages

Page Numbering

Printer Setup

Select Printer


Document Summary

File, Document Summary

Purpose

Use Document Summary to create a general overview of a document.

Steps

1	Choose Document Summary from the File menu.

2	Choose Options, then choose Extract Information From Document to fill in some of the summary fields.

3	Select summary fields as necessary, then type or edit the information in them.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Document Summary Configuration

Document Summary Options

Document Summary Preferences


Document Summary Preferences

File, Preferences, Summary

Purpose

Use Document Summary Preferences to automate certain summary tasks.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Summary.

2	Choose from the following options:

Option	Lets You

Default Subject Text	Specify the text WordPerfect uses to identify a document subject.

Default Descriptive Type	Specify the default Descriptive Type for document summaries.

Use Descriptive Names	Enter a detailed name that is longer than the document's filename.

Create Summary on Save/Exit	Display the Document Summary dialog box when you save or exit a document.

3	Choose OK and Close until you return to your document.

See Also

Document Summary

Document Summary Configuration

Document Summary Options


  Image Settings - Edit All

Graphics, Edit Box, Tools, Image Settings

Purpose

Use this feature to access image editing features on the Image Tools palette.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or... Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then select Image Tools.

3	Click [image] to enter the Image Settings dialog box.

4	Select the options you want and enter values where applicable.

5	Choose OK, then choose Close on the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box Feature Bar and return to your document.


DDE Links

Edit, Links, Update Now or Change Link or Cancel Link

Purpose

Use this feature to update, cancel, or change a link.  If you want to manually update your links, you can also set Link Options so that your links are not updated automatically each time you open your file.

Steps

To update a link,

1	Choose Links from the Edit menu.

2	Select the link you want to update manually.

3	Choose Update Now.

4	Choose OK to return to your document.

To change a link,

1	Choose Links from the Edit menu.

2	Select the link for which you want to change the name, application server, filename, or item.

3	Choose Change Link, then change the information for any of the

options listed in the table below.

Option	Lets You

Link Name	Give the link a new name.

Application	Change the source of the link's data.

Topic/Filename	Change the name of the file topic.

Item	Specify which cell or range you want to change if you are working with a database or spreadsheet.

4	Choose OK to confirm the changes and return to the Links dialog box, then choose OK to return to your document.

To cancel a link,

1	Choose Links from the Edit menu.

2	Select the linked information you want to remove from the document.

3	Choose Cancel Link, then choose OK.

See Also

Links

Object

OLE Links

Paste Special


Edit Field Names

Tools, Merge, Data, OK, OK, Field Names

Tools, Merge, Data, OK, OK, Close, Quick Entry, Field Names

Purpose

Use Edit Field Names to change field names after you have created a data file.

Steps

1	Create or retrieve a data file.

2	Choose Quick Entry from the Merge Data Feature Bar.

3	Choose Field Names.

4	Choose from the following options:

Option	Lets You

Add	Type a new field name, then add it below the current selection.

Add Before	Type a new field name, then add it before the current selection.

Replace	Type a new field name to replace the current selection.

Delete	Delete the current selection.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Create a Data File

Go to Data

Merge Data Feature Bar

Quick Data Entry


Edit Footnote or Endnote

Insert, Footnote or Endnote, Edit

Purpose

Use Edit Footnote or Endnote to edit a footnote or endnote.

Steps

1	Choose Footnote or Endnote from the Insert menu, then choose Edit.

2	Type the number of the note you want to edit, then choose OK.

If you are using Page view, you can also click on the text of the note to edit it.

3	Edit the text of the note.

You can also paste information you have cut or copied, or you can insert a file into the note.

If you delete a number, you can restore it by using the Note Number button.

4	Choose Close.

See Also

Cut, Copy, Paste

Edit Numbering Style

Endnote Placement

Endnote Options

Footnote Options

Footnote/Endnote Feature Bar

Footnote or Endnote Number

Line Separator

Numbering Method

Position of Footnote

Spacing Between Notes

Styles Editor


Edit Graphics Menu

Graphics, Graphics Styles, Menu

Purpose

Use this feature to add additional graphics box styles to the Graphics menu.

Steps

1	Choose Graphics Styles from the Graphics menu, then select Menu.

2	Select the box styles you want to add to the Graphics menu, then deselect the box styles you want to remove.

3	Choose OK and Close.


Create or Edit Label File

Layout, Labels, Change, Create or Edit

Purpose

Use this feature to create a new label file or edit an existing one.

Steps

1	Choose Labels from the Layout menu, then choose Change from the Select Label File group box.

2	Choose Create.

or...  Highlight the filename of the label file you want to edit, then choose Edit.

3	Specify the filename for the label file.

WordPerfect adds a .LAB file extension.

4	Specify a description, then choose OK.

5	If you want to select the new label file, make sure it is highlighted, then choose Select.

See Also

Create or Edit Labels

Label File

Labels


Create or Edit Labels

Layout, Labels, Create or Edit

Purpose

Use Create or Edit Labels to create a new label definition or edit an existing one.

When you create a label definition, it is saved to the label file you choose.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point on the page where you want labels to begin.

2	Choose Labels from the Layout menu.

3	To edit an existing definition, highlight the definition, then choose Edit.

or...  To create a new label definition, choose Create, then type a new label description.

4	Choose from the following options:

Option	Lets You

Label Sheet Size; Change	Select an available paper size or create another.

Label Size	Specify the width and height of individual labels.

Labels Per Page	Specify how many labels are arranged in columns and rows.

Top Left Label	Specify the location of the top left label (measured from paper edge to label edge).

Distance Between Labels	Specify the horizontal distance between label columns and the vertical distance between label rows.

Label Margins	Limit the printable area of each label by setting label margins.

Label Type	Specify laser or tractor feed labels or both.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Create or Edit Paper Size

Label File

Labels

Paper Size

Print Labels

Subdivide Page


Edit Name/Reference (Table)

Table, Names, Edit

Purpose

Use Edit Name/Reference to edit the name of a table, floating cell, or table component, to use names for different types of table components, and to change the reference of a name.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in a table.

2	Choose Names from the Table menu.

You can also click Names from the Table Formula Feature Bar.

3	Highlight the name of the table, floating cell, or table component you want to edit.

4	Choose Edit.

5	Type a new name in the Name text box.

If you want to use a name for a different type of table structure, select a new type from the Type pop-up button.

If you want to change the reference of a name, specify a new one in the Reference text box (for example, a cell address, a new address for a range of cells, or a new row or column number).

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Table Names in Current Document

Create Name (Table)


Edit Outline Definition

Tools, Outline, Options, Define Outline, Create or Edit

Purpose

Use Edit Outline Definition to create or edit an outline style.

Steps

1	Choose Outline from the Tools menu.

2	Choose Define Outline from the Options drop-down list on the Outline Feature Bar.

3	Choose Create.

or...  Select the outline style you want to change, then choose Edit.

4	If necessary, type a name for the outline style.  If you want, type a description for the outline style.

5	Choose from the following options:

Option	Lets You

Associated Styles	Choose a different style for the level.

Custom Number	Change the number or bullet for a level.

Quick Numbers	Base the new numbering format on a predefined format.

Options	Specify whether you want to use both numbers and styles, numbers or bullets only (without level styles that format text), or the level styles that format text only (without numbers or bullets) in your outline style.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Define Outline

Outline Feature Bar

Style List


Create or Edit Paper Size or Create Envelope Definition

Layout, Page, Paper Size, Create or Edit

Layout, Labels,  Create or Edit, Change, Create

Layout, Envelope, Create New Definition

Purpose

Use this feature to create or edit a paper definition for the current document or future use.

The definition is saved with your printer's .PRS file if you are using a WordPerfect printer driver or with your .BIF file if you are using a Windows printer driver.

Steps

1	Using one of the above routes ( [image]), display a Create dialog box.

2	If you are creating a new paper size, type a name.

3	Select a paper type from the Paper Type drop-down list.

4	Select a paper size from the Paper Size drop-down list.

or...  Select [ALL OTHERS] (for WordPerfect printer drivers) or select User Defined Size (for Windows drivers), then specify paper size measurements.

5	Choose from the following options:

Option	Lets You

Location	Specify the paper feed location of your printer.

Prompt to Load Paper	Prompt you to load paper in your printer (for WordPerfect printer drivers only).

Rotated Font	Rotate the information sideways on the page.

Wide Form	Specify a wide form orientation.

Text Adjustments	Adjust text on the page when it does not print in the specified margins.

6	Choose OK to save the paper definition.

7	To select the new paper size, highlight it, then choose Select.

or...  To exit without selecting a paper size, choose Close.

See Also

Delete Paper Definition

Paper Size


Edit Paper Size [ALL OTHERS]

Layout, Page, Paper Size, [ALL OTHERS], Edit

Purpose

Use Edit to edit the [ALL OTHERS] paper definition.

Changes to the [ALL OTHERS] definition remain in WordPerfect until you edit the current definition.

Steps

1	Choose Page from the Layout menu, then choose Paper Size.

2	Highlight the [ALL OTHERS] definition, then choose Edit.

3	Choose from the following options:

Option	Lets You

Maximum Width	Specify the maximum width of paper your printer can accept.

Location	Specify the paper feed location of your printer.

Prompt to Load Paper	Receive a prompt to load paper in your printer.

Text Adjustments	Adjust text on the page when it doesn't print in the specified margins.

4	Choose Select to select the definition.

or...  Choose Close.

See Also

ALL OTHERS


Power Bar Font/Size Lists

File, Preferences, Power Bar, Fonts

Purpose

Use Power Bar Font/Size Lists to add TrueType font styles to the Font item on the Power Bar.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the Power Bar icon.

You can also place the mouse pointer anywhere on the Power Bar, click the right mouse button, then select Preferences.

2	Choose Fonts.

3	Select the font styles and point sizes you want from the Edit Power Bar Font/Size Lists dialog box.

or... Select an option from the Select drop-down list.

4	Choose OK.


Edit Printer/Document Font Mapping

Layout, Font, Font Map

Purpose

Use Edit Printer/Document Font Mapping to edit the fonts that will be used for automatic font changes (AFCs), for display on your monitor, and for printing a document when the specified font is not available.

For more information, choose from the following topics:

Automatic Font Changes

Display (Font Mapping)

Document (Font Mapping)

See Also

Document/Printer Initial Font

Font


Table of Authorities Full Form Feature Bar

Tools, Table of Authorities, Create Full Form or Edit Full Form, OK

Purpose

Use the Table of Authorities Full Form Feature Bar to edit the full form of an authority.

Steps

1	Choose Table of Authorities from the Tools menu, then choose Create or Edit Full Form.

2	Choose from the following options:

Option	Lets You

Short Form	Specify a short form name.

Section	Specify a section name.

Close	Close the Feature Bar.

3	Edit the full form text so that it appears exactly as you want it in your table of authorities, then choose Close from the Full Form Feature Bar.

See Also

Create Full Form

Edit Full Form


Endnote Options

Insert, Endnote, Options

Purpose

 Use Endnote Options to change endnote formatting options.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point before the endnotes you want to change.

2	Choose Endnote from the Insert menu, then choose Options.

3	Use any of the following options:

Numbering Method

Edit Numbering Style

Spacing Between Notes

Continuous Notes

See Also

Edit Footnote or Endnote

Endnote Placement

Footnote/Endnote Feature Bar

Footnote or Endnote Number


Endnote Placement (in Document)

Insert, Endnote, Placement

Purpose

Use Endnote Placement to specify different endnote locations within your document.  The default is to place them at the end of the document.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want the endnotes to be placed.

2	Choose Endnote from the Insert menu, then choose Placement.

3	If you want subsequent endnotes to start over at number 1, choose Insert Endnotes at Insertion Point and Restart Numbering.

4	Choose OK.

WordPerfect inserts a hard page to separate the endnotes from the next page of text.

See Also

Continued Notes

Edit Footnote or Endnote

Edit Numbering Style

Endnote Options

Footnote or Endnote Number

Footnote/Endnote Feature Bar

Numbering Method

Spacing Between Notes


Envelope

Layout, Envelope

Tools, Merge, Merge, Envelopes

Purpose

Use Envelope to create an envelope using the mailing address from your current document or using the return and mailing addresses you specify.

To create an envelope, you must have a printer selected and an available envelope paper definition for that printer.

To create multiple envelopes with the same return address but different mailing addresses, see Merge.

Steps

1	If you want, open the document (such as a letter) for the current envelope.

2	Using one of the routes above ( [image]), display the Envelope dialog box.

3	Use the current return address or select one from the drop-down list.

or... Make sure <New Address> is selected in the drop-down list, then type a new return address.

4	Choose from the following options:

Option	Lets You

Add	Add the new address to the list.

Delete	Delete the selected address from the list.

Font	Change the address font.

Print Return Address	Print the selected address on the envelope.

5	Use the displayed mailing address or specify a different one.

or...  If you are merging envelopes, choose Field, specify fields for the address, then choose OK.

6	If you want, select a different envelope definition from the Envelope Definitions drop-down list.

or... Choose Create New Definition, specify options, then choose OK.

7	To change address positions or include the USPS POSTNET bar code, choose Options, select the options you want, then choose OK.

8	Choose Print Envelope to print the envelope.

or... Choose Append to Doc to insert it at the end of your current document.

See Also

Create or Edit Paper Size

Envelope Options

Merge

POSTNET Bar Code

Printer Setup


Envelope Options

Layout, Envelope, Options

Tools, Merge, Merge, Envelopes, Options

Purpose

Use Envelope Options to change address positions and include a POSTNET bar code on the envelope you are creating.

Steps

1	Using one of the routes above ( [image]), display the Envelope Options dialog box.

2	Specify a horizontal and vertical setting for the Return Address Position.

3	Specify a horizontal and vertical setting for the Mailing Address Position.

4	If you want the POSTNET bar code option to display on the Envelope dialog box, select Include USPS POSTNET bar code.

If this option is selected when you open the Envelope dialog box, the bar code is created from the retrieved mailing address.

5	Choose OK.

6	Type the 5-digit ZIP Code, the ZIP + 4, or the 11-digit Delivery Point bar code in the POSTNET bar code text box.

7	Finish creating the envelope, then choose Print Envelope or Append to Doc.

See Also

Envelope

POSTNET Bar code


Environment Preferences

File, Preferences, Environment

Purpose

Use Environment Preferences to set options that are in effect until you change them again.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the Environment icon.

2	Choose from the following options:

User Info for Comments and Summary (Environment Preferences)

Beep On (Environment Preferences)

Formatting (Environment Preferences)

Menu (Environment Preferences)

Save Workspace (Environment Preferences)

Save (Environment Preferences)

Code Page (Environment Preferences)


Equation Font

Graphics, Edit Box, Content, Edit, Font, Equation Font

Purpose

Use Equation Font to change the font of an equation.

Steps

1	Select an equation to edit.

2	Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, choose Content from the Graphics Box Feature Bar, then choose edit.

or... Double-click an equation to enter the Equation Editor.

3	Choose Equation Font from the Font menu.

4	Select the options you want.  When you are finished, choose OK to return to the Equation Editor.

5	Choose Close from the File menu.

See Also

Create and Edit Equations

Equation Palette


WordPerfect Bars

Purpose

WordPerfect Bars provide easy access to options related to a specific feature.

For more information, choose from the following topics:

Button Bar

Feature Bars

Power Bar

Ruler Bar

Status Bar


Example Select Records

Insert, Spreadsheet/Database, Import, Query, Example

Tools, Merge, Merge, Select Records, Example

Purpose

Use Example Select Records to enter information to select records.

Criteria	Example

Single Value	Utah

List of Values	Utah;Hawaii;California

Range of Values	Ohio-Utah

Excluded Values	!Utah (not Utah)

Zero or More Wildcard	U-* (from U to the end of the alphabet)

One Character Wildcard	J??n (4-letter words beginning with J, ending with n, any letters between)

See Also

Mark Records

Perform Merge

Specify Conditions

Spreadsheet/Database


Expand Master Document

File, Master Document, Expand Master

Purpose

Use Expand Master Document when you want to retrieve linked documents into the master document.

Steps

1	Choose Master Document from the File menu, then choose Expand Master.

2	Select the subdocuments you want to expand.

You can select all subdocuments listed by choosing Mark, then choosing Mark All.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Condense Master

Subdocument

Master Document


  Move (Image)

Graphics, Edit Box, Tools, Move

Purpose

Use this feature to move an image inside a graphics box.

Steps

To move an image inside a graphics box,

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or...  Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

3	Click [image].

4	Place the mouse pointer on the image so that the pointer changes to an open hand icon.

5	Drag the image to a new location inside the graphics box.

To move an image by specifying a horizontal and vertical position,

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or...  Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

3	Click [image], then select Move Image.

4	Specify a value in the Horizontal text box.

Positive values move the image to the right; negative values move the image to the left.

5	Specify a value in the Vertical text box.

Positive values move the image up; negative values move the image down.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Invert (Image)

Mirror (Image)

Reset All (Image)

Rotate (Image)

WP Draw

Zoom (Image)


File Preferences

File, Preferences, File

Purpose

Use File Preferences to specify where certain types of files are stored and to set backup options.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the File icon.

2	Choose View All to view a complete listing of pathnames and other settings for all File Preferences options, then choose Close.

3	Choose from the following options:

Documents/Backup (File Preferences)

Templates (File Preferences)

Spreadsheets (File Preferences)

Databases (File Preferences)

Printers/Labels (File Preferences)

Hyphenation (File Preferences)

Graphics (File Preferences)

Macros (File Preferences)

View File Location Preferences (File Preferences)


Edit Fill Style

Graphics, Graphics Styles, Fill

Purpose

Use Edit Fill Style to create a custom fill style for use within a graphics box border or a document text border.  You can also edit predefined fill styles.

Steps

1	Choose Graphics Styles from the Graphics menu.

2	Select Fill from the Style Type group box.

3	Select a predefined line style to edit, then choose Edit.

or... Choose Create, then type a name for the new fill style in the Style Name text box.

4	Select the Pattern radio button, then choose a pattern from the Pattern pop-up palette.  Choose a color from the Foreground Color pop-up palette and the Background Color pop-up palette.

or... Select Gradient, then choose a Foreground Color, a Background Color, a Gradient pattern (linear, circular, or rectangular), and any gradient options you want.

Choose from the following gradient options:

Option	Lets You

Vertical Offset	Specify the vertical center of a circular or rectangular gradient or the top of a linear gradient.

Horizontal Offset	Specify the horizontal center of a circular or rectangular gradient or a rotated linear gradient.

Rotation Angle	Rotate a linear or rectangular gradient counterclockwise inside the border.

Steps	Specify how smoothly the foreground and background colors are blended.

Auto Steps	Automatically calculates the number of steps for a given gradient type.

5	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Border

Style List


Find and Replace Text

Edit, Replace

Purpose

Use Find and Replace to search for and replace words, phrases, or codes in your document.

Steps

1	Choose Replace from the Edit menu.

2	Type the text you want to find in the Find text box, click the Replace With text box, then type the replacement text.

If you want to delete the text you are searching for, leave the Replace With text box empty.

3	Select any other options you want to use.

4	Choose one of the following options:

Option	What It Does

Find	Finds the search text the first time it appears.

Replace	Replaces the search text the first time it appears, then continues to look for the search text if it is selected again.

Replace All	Simultaneously replaces the search text every time it appears.

See Also

Codes

Find Text

Find Text Action Options

Find and Replace Text Options

Find and Replace Text Direction

Specific Codes


Codes

Edit, Find, Match, Codes

Edit, Replace, Match, Codes

Purpose

Use Codes to find and replace any of the codes regardless of the value the code may contain.  For example, if you search for a font size code, any font size code will be found.

Steps

To find a code,

1	Choose Find from the Edit menu.

2	Choose Codes from the Match menu.

3	Select the code you want to find, choose Insert, then choose Close.

4	Choose Find Next to find the code the next time it appears after the insertion point.

or... Choose Find Prev to find the code if it appears before the insertion point.

5	Choose Close.

To find and replace a code,

1	Choose Replace from the Edit menu.

2	Choose Codes from the Match menu, select the code, choose Insert, then choose Close.

3	Click the Replace With text box, choose Codes from the Replace menu, select the replacement code, choose Insert, then choose Close.

4	Choose any other options you want to use.

5	Choose one of the following options:

Option	What It Does

Find	Finds the search text the first time it appears.

Replace	Replaces the search text the first time it appears, then continues to look for the search text if it is selected again.

Replace All	Simultaneously replaces the search text every time it appears.

6	Choose Close.

See Also

Find and Replace Text Direction

Find and Replace Text Options

Specific Codes


  Font

Layout, Font

Purpose

Use Font to change the basic typeface in which your document is printed.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point at the location where you want to change the font in your document.

2	Choose Font from the Layout menu.

You can also click [image] on the Power bar.

3	Select the Font Face, the Font Size, and the Font Style you want.

4	Select other Font options as desired.

5	Choose OK.

The font specifications you make will be in effect from the point where the codes were inserted, through the remainder of the current document, or until the font is changed.

See Also

Define Color Printing Palette

Document/Printer Initial Font

Edit Printer/Document Font Mapping

Equation Font

Select Fonts

Select Printer


Footnote or Endnote Number

Insert, Footnote or Endnote, New Number

Purpose

Use Footnote or Endnote Number to restart note numbering at any number.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want to start renumbering footnotes or endnotes.

2	Choose Footnote or Endnote from the Insert menu, then choose New Number.

3	Specify a new number.

or...  Select Increase or Decrease.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Edit Footnote or Endnote

Edit Numbering Style

Footnote/Endnote Feature Bar

Line Separator


Footnote Options

Insert, Footnote, Options

Purpose

Use Footnote Options to change footnote formatting options.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point before the footnotes you want to change.

2	Choose Footnote from the Insert menu, then choose Options.

3	Use any of the following options:

Numbering Method

Separator

Edit Numbering Style

Spacing Between Notes

Position

Continued Footnotes

See Also

Edit Footnote or Endnote

Footnote/Endnote Feature Bar

Footnote or Endnote Number


Force Page

Layout, Page, Force Page

Purpose

Use Force Page to make sure that a certain page in a document always has an odd or an even page number.

Steps

1	Move the insertion point to the page you where you want an odd or even page number.

2	Choose Page from the Layout menu, then choose Force Page.

3	Select Current Page Odd, Current Page Even, or New Page.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Page Numbering

Suppress


Table Formula Feature Bar

Table, Formula Bar

Purpose

Use the Table Formula Feature Bar to create and insert formulas into tables and floating cells.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in a table or floating cell.

2	Choose Formula Bar from the Table menu.

You can also click the right mouse, then choose Formula Bar.

3	Choose from the following options:

Sum in Table Formula

Table Functions

Table Names in Current Document

View Error

Calculate

Data Fill

Copy Formula (Table)

4	Choose Close.

See Also

Cell Formula Entry

Feature Bars


Integration (def)
Integration

WPWin makes it easy to access other file formats and programs.  With one click, you can launch other Windows applications and files from your Button Bar.  Also, WPWin acts as both an OLE client and an OLE server and supports DDE links.  Or you can simply import DOS and Windows database and spreadsheet formats (such as Lotus 1-2-3, Microsoft Excel, and Borland Quattro Pro).  In addition, WPWin will import and export all leading word processing file formats.


Generate

Tools, Generate

Tools, List or Index or CrossReference or Table of Contents or Table of Authorities, Generate

Purpose

Use Generate to update tables of contents, tables of authorities, lists, cross-references, indexes, and hypertext links in your document.

Steps

1	Choose Generate from the Tools menu.

Generate will also update any generated items (such as cross-references) that exist in subdocuments.

2	Choose OK.

See Also

Generate Options


Generate Options

Tools, Generate, Options

Purpose

Use Generate Options to save generation time while using subdocuments or to build hypertext links.

Steps

To save generation time,

1	Choose Generate from the Tools menu.

2	Choose Options, then deselect Save Subdocuments.

WordPerfect will not generate and save subdocuments.

To generate and save hypertext links,

1	Choose Generate from the Tools menu.

2	Choose Options, then select Build Hypertext Links.

See Also

Generate

Hypertext Feature Bar

Master Document


Drawing Tools (def)
Drawing Tools

Now you can easily add graphics to your program without a separate drawing program.  WPWin provides sophisticated, easy-to-use drawing tools (such as Bezier curves, shading, and text on a curve) that let you create and edit graphics with just a click of your mouse.


Getting Help (def)
Getting Help

If you'd like instructions on using WPWin, you have several options.  We've included in-depth tutorials to acquaint you with the new features.  In addition, online Help is just a click away and includes steps, alternatives, and other references.  Or, you can enlist the aid of one of our Coaches for step-by-step instructions on our newest and most popular features.  If you prefer, a Coach will perform the task for you.  All these options make learning convenient because there is no manual to consult or phone call to make.

How to Use It


Go To

Edit, Go To

Purpose

Use Go To to quickly move the insertion point to a specific location in your document.

Steps

1	Choose Go To from the Edit menu.

2	Select one of the following options, then choose OK.

Option	Lets You Move To

Position	The position you choose in the list.

Page Number	The top of the page you choose.

Bookmark	The Bookmark you choose from the drop-down list.

Table	The top of the table you choose from the drop-down list.

Cell/Range	The cell or range of cells in the table you choose.

See Also

Bookmark

Columns

Table


Create or Edit Graphic Line

Graphics, Custom Line, Horizontal or Vertical

Graphics, Edit Line, Horizontal or Vertical

Purpose

Use this feature to separate text or graphics in your document with horizontal or vertical graphics lines.

Steps

To create a graphics line,

1	Place the insertion point on the page where you want to add a graphics line.

2	Choose Custom Line from the Graphics menu, then select Horizontal or Vertical from the Line Type group box.

3	Choose from the list of line topics below:

Change Color

Change Thickness

Custom Line/Graphics Spacing

Line Style

Position/Length

To edit a graphics line,

1	Select a graphics line to edit.

2	Choose Edit Line from the Graphics menu.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics line, then select Edit Horizontal Line or Edit Vertical Line.

3	Choose from the list of line topics below:

Change Color

Change Thickness

Custom Line/Graphics Spacing

Line Style

Position/Length

See Also

Custom Line Styles


Graphics Styles

Graphics, Graphics Styles

Purpose

Use Graphics Styles to format graphics elements such as graphics boxes, lines, borders, and fills.

Steps

1	Choose Graphics Styles from the Graphics menu.

2	Select a style type from the Style Type group box.

3	Choose Create to create your own style.

or...  Select a predefined style from the Styles list box, then choose Edit.

See Also

Edit Fill Style

Edit Graphics Menu


Graphic Style Settings

Graphics, Graphics Styles, Options, Setup

Purpose

Use Graphics Style Settings to list graphics styles from the current document, the default template, or the supplemental template or to indicate where you want to save a graphics style you are creating or editing.

Steps

1	Choose Graphics Styles from the Graphics menu.

2	Choose Options, then choose Setup.

3	Select an option from the List Styles From group box, then choose OK.

See Also

Style List

Template


Header/Footer Feature Bar

Layout, Header/Footer, Create or Edit

Purpose

Use the Header/Footer Feature Bar to create and edit headers and footers in a document.

Steps

1	While in Page view, move the insertion point to a page where the header or footer you want to edit is in effect.

2	Choose Header/Footer from the Layout menu, select the header or footer you want, then choose Edit.

You can also click the right mouse button inside the header or footer, then select Feature Bar.

3	Choose from the following Header/Footer Feature Bar options:

Option	Lets You

Number	Automatically add a page, section, chapter, or volume number.

Line	Create and add a custom graphics line.

Placement	Specify the pages in your document where the header or footer will appear (odd pages, even pages, or every page).

Distance	Specify a distance between the document text and the header or footer.

Next	Move to the next Header A or B or the next Footer A or B in your document.

Previous	Move to the previous Header A or B or the previous Footer A or B in your document.

Close	Exit the header or footer, turn off the display of the Header/Footer Feature Bar, and return to your document text.

See Also

Feature Bars

Headers/Footers


Distance Between Text and Header/Footer

Layout, Header/Footer, Create or Edit, Distance

Purpose

Use this feature to adjust the distance between a header or footer and the document text.

Steps

1	While in Page view, move the insertion point to a page where the header or footer you want to edit is in effect.

2	Choose Header/Footer from the Layout menu, select the header or footer you want to edit, then choose Edit.

You can also click the right mouse button inside the header or footer, then select Feature Bar.

3	Choose Distance from the Header/Footer Feature Bar.

4	Specify a measurement in the Distance Between Text and Header (or Footer) text box, then choose OK.

5	Choose Close from the Header/Footer Feature Bar to exit the header or footer and return to your document.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the header or footer) to deactivate the Header/Footer Feature Bar and return to your document.

See Also

Header/Footer

Header/Footer Feature Bar

Placement (Header/Footer or Watermark)


Header/Footer

Layout, Header/Footer

Layout, Page, Delay Codes, OK, Header/Footer

Purpose

Use Header/Footer to print information, such as a chapter heading, a title, a date, a person's name, or a company name at the top or bottom of each page or on alternating pages in your document.

Headers and footers do not display in Draft Mode.  To view the header and footer in the document window, choose Page or Two Page from the View menu.

Steps

1	While in Page view, place the insertion point anywhere in the first paragraph on the page on which you want the header or footer to appear.

2	Choose Header/Footer from the Layout menu, then select the header or footer you want to create (A or B).

3	Choose Create, then type the header or footer text as you normally would using any of the available WordPerfect editing features.

4	Choose Placement from the Header/Footer Feature Bar, then select the page(s) where you want the header or footer to appear.

5	Choose Close from the Header/Footer Feature Bar to exit the header or footer and return to your document.

See Also

Distance Between Text and Header/Footer

Header/Footer Feature Bar

Placement (Header/Footer or Watermark)


  Select (Image)

Graphics, Edit Box, Tools, Select

Purpose

Use this feature to move and size a graphics box.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or...  Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

3	To move the graphics box, place the pointer anywhere inside the box, then drag it to a new location on the page.

4	To resize the graphics box, drag one of the sizing handles to enlarge or reduce the size of the graphics box.

See Also

Move (Image)

Reset All (Image)

WP Draw


Import Data or Create/Edit Data Link

Insert, Spreadsheet/Database, Import

Insert, Spreadsheet/Database, Create Link or Edit Link

Purpose

Use Import Data or Create/Edit Data Link to copy information from a spreadsheet file or a database file into a WordPerfect document.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want to import the spreadsheet.

2	Choose Spreadsheet/Database from the Insert menu.

3	Choose Import to import the spreadsheet or database one time only.

or... Choose Create Link to create a link.

4	Select Spreadsheet or any of the database formats you want to use from the Data Type pop-up list.

5	Select Table, Text, or Merge Data File from the Import As or Link As pop-up list.

6	In the Filename text box, type the filename of the spreadsheet file you want to import or link, then choose OK.

If you want to import or link a specific part of the spreadsheet, you can indicate a range of cells in the Range text box.  You can identify the range either by its cell address or by its name.

If you want to import or link specific fields of a database, you can indicate which field or fields you want to import by deselecting any of the fields you do not want to import.

7	If you are importing or linking an entire spreadsheet, choose OK until you return to the document window.

or... If you are importing or linking a specific range from a spreadsheet, press Enter, select the range from the Named Ranges list box or type the range in, then choose OK.

8	If you are importing or linking an entire database, choose OK until you return to the document window.

or... If you are importing or linking specific fields from a database, press Tab, deselect the fields you do not want to import or link, then choose OK.

If you are using DataPerfect, you will need to select the panel you want, then deselect any of the fields you do not want to use.

To edit a link,

1	Place the insertion point between the two link icons.

2	Choose Spreadsheet/Database from the Insert menu, then choose Edit Link.

3	Make editing changes, then choose OK.

See Also

Link Options

Spreadsheet/Database


  Zoom (Image)

Graphics, Edit Box, Tools, Zoom

Purpose

Use this feature to enlarge or reduce the image inside a graphics box or to display a specified area of the image.

Steps

To scale the entire image,

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or...  Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

3	Click [image], then select [image].

4	Drag the scroll box to scale the image.

To scale a specified area of an image,

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or...  Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

3	Click [image], then select [image].

4	Place the mouse pointer on the image so that it changes to a magnifying glass.

5	Drag the magnifying glass pointer to define a specific area of the image that you want to enlarge.

To specify the scale height and width for an image,

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or...  Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

3	Click [image], then select Scale Image.

4	Specify a scale width in the Scale X text box and scale height in the Scale Y text box.  If you specify a scale height that is not equal to the scale width, the image will be distorted.

or...  To specify the height and width at the same time, specify a value in the Both X & Y text box.

5	Choose OK.

To reset the image to the actual size,

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or...  Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

3	Click [image], then select [image].

See Also

Black and White Threshold (Image)

Brightness (Image)

Contrast (Image)

Fill Attributes (Image)

Image Settings

Invert (Image)

Mirror (Image)

Move (Image)

Reset All (Image)

Rotate (Image)

WP Draw


Import Preferences

File, Preferences, Import

Purpose

Use Import Preferences to specify how graphics files, ASCII delimited text files, WP 4.2, DCA, and DisplayWrite documents are imported into WordPerfect.

Steps

To specify delimiters and characters,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the Import icon.

2	Type the delimiters and characters you want to use in the text boxes.

You can also choose options from the pop-up lists on the right of the text boxes to use tabs, line feeds (soft returns), form feeds (hard page breaks), and carriage returns (hard returns).

Option	Lets You
Field	Separate one field from the next.
Record	Separate one record from the next.
Encapsulated	Enclose each field of data.
Strip	Identify unnecessary characters you want stripped from the data file when you import it.
3	Choose OK.

To use Windows Metafile options,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the Import icon.

2	Select an option under Windows Metafile Options, then choose OK.

Format	Characteristics	Restrictions	When to Use
.WMF	Retains the original format and attributes. The picture will display the same in WordPerfect as on the Clipboard or in another Windows application.	Does not display in WordPerfect on other platforms.	You will not be transferring the document to WordPerfect for DOS.
.WPG	Converts the graphic to a .WPG file.	Some details of the drawing may be lost.	You want to retrieve the document into WordPerfect for DOS (or another platform).
Both	Creates one .WPG file which contains both .WMF and .WPG formats.	Uses more disk space.	You want to use the graphic or document in WordPerfect for DOS.
To use the Options drop-down list,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the Import icon.

2	Choose an option from the Options drop-down list, make any changes, then choose OK, Save, or Close until you return to your document.

Option	Lets  You
Code Pages	Change the code page.
WP 4.2/DCA/DisplayWrite Document	Specify settings for converting WordPerfect 4.2, DCA, and DisplayWrite documents when you import them.
WP 4.2 Fonts	Specify the fonts you used for WordPerfect 4.2 documents you want to import.  You can use Edit to change the font assigned to each number (1-8).
DCA/DisplayWrite Fonts	Specify the fonts you used for DCA and DisplayWrite documents you want to import.  You can use Edit to change the font assigned to each number (26, 27, and so on).

See Also

Convert File Format

Merge

Spreadsheet/Database


Insert Columns/Rows Into Table

Table, Insert

Purpose

Use Insert Columns/Rows to insert the number of columns or rows that you specify.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point inside the table where you want to insert the columns or rows.

2	Choose Insert from the Table menu.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Insert.

3	Select Columns or Rows, then specify the number of columns or rows you want to insert.

4	Select Before or After to place the new column(s) or row(s) before or after the current insertion point position.

5	Choose OK.

New columns or rows will contain the same formatting as the column or row where the insertion point is located.

See Also

Join Cell/Table

Split Cell

Split Table


Insert Merge Codes

Tools, Merge, Merge Feature Bar, Merge Codes

Purpose

Use Insert Merge Codes to add merge codes to a merge data file or a merge form file.

Steps

1	Choose Merge from the Tools menu, then create or retrieve a merge data or merge form file.

2	Place the insertion point in the file where you want to insert the merge code.

3	Choose Merge Codes from the Merge Feature Bar.

4	Select a merge code, then choose Insert.

5	If prompted, enter parameters, then choose OK.

6	Reposition the insertion point in your document, select another merge code, enter parameters (if needed), then choose Insert.

7	Repeat step 6 as often as you need, then choose Close.

8	Finish creating the form or data file, then save or merge the file.

See Also

Create Data File

Create Form File

Insert Merge Code Parameters


Insert Object Into Document

Insert, Object

Purpose

Use Insert Object to perform OLE functions.  With OLE, you can embed objects created in different Windows server applications into one document.

Steps

To embed an object from another application into WordPerfect,

1	Choose Object from the Insert menu.

2	Select the Object Type (server application) you want to use, then choose OK to open that application.

3	Create an object such as a document, image, or sound clip, or insert an existing file.  See your server application documentation for more information.

4	Choose Exit & Return to Document from the File menu of the server application.  (This option may be worded differently in various server applications.)

or...Choose Update from the File menu if you do not want to shut down the server application.

5	Choose Yes to update the object and insert it into your document.

or...  Choose No to discard your changes and return to the WordPerfect document window.

See Also

DDE Links

OLE Links

Paste Special


Change Outline Level

Tools, Outline, Options, Change Level

Purpose

Use Change Outline Level to change the level of the current outline item.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want to change the level.

2	Choose Change Level from the Options drop-down list on the Outline Feature Bar.

3	Specify the number of the Outline Level you want, then choose Insert.

See Also

Define Outline

Edit Outline Definition

Outline Feature Bar


Insert or Edit Sound Clip

Insert, Sound, Insert or Edit Desc

Purpose

Use Insert or Edit Sound Clip to insert a sound clip into your document or to edit the description of a sound clip.

Steps

To insert a sound clip,

1	Choose Sound from the Insert menu, then choose Insert.

2	If you want, type a name or brief description of the sound file in the Name text box.

3	Type the filename of the sound file you want to add to your document.

or...  Click the list button, then select a file.

4	Select a storage location for the sound file.

When you choose Link to File on Disk, the sound file is not stored as part of the document, which does not increase the document size.

When you choose Store in Document, the sound file is stored as part of the document, which increases the document size.

5	Choose OK.

To edit a sound clip description,

1	Choose Sound from the Insert menu.

2	Select the sound clip you want, then choose Edit Desc.

3	Edit the description in the Name text box.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Sound Clips

Sound Transcribe Feature Bar


Keep Text Together

Layout, Page, Keep Text Together

Purpose

Use Widow/Orphan, Block Protect, and Conditional End of Page to keep text together on one page.

Steps

To use Widow/Orphan,

1	Place the insertion point where you want widow/orphan protection to begin.

2	Choose Page from the Layout menu, choose Keep Text Together, then choose the Widow/Orphan option.

3	Choose OK.

Widow/Orphan protection will be effective until the end of the document.

To use Block Protect,

1	Select the text you want to protect.

2	Choose Page from the Layout menu, choose Keep Text Together, then select the Block Protect option.

3	Choose OK.

To use Conditional End of Page,

1	Move the insertion point to the beginning of the text you want to keep together.

2	Choose Page from the Layout menu, then choose Keep Text Together.

3	Choose the Conditional End of Page option, then specify the number of lines you want to keep together.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Force Page


Label File

Layout, Labels, Change

Purpose

Use Change to select or delete label files.

A label file containing preset label definitions comes with WordPerfect.

Steps

1	Choose Labels from the Layout menu, then choose Change from the Select Label File group box.

2	Highlight the label file you want, then choose Select.

or...  Highlight a label file, choose Delete, choose Yes, then choose Cancel.

See Also

Create or Edit Label File

Create or Edit Labels

Labels


Labels

Layout, Labels

Purpose

Use Labels to create mailing labels, file folder labels, and diskette labels.  You can type the labels individually or use merge to create labels from a list of addresses or data.

When you create labels, WordPerfect creates several logical pages on one physical page.  Format settings placed at the top of the physical page affect each subsequent label.  If you want to print several logical pages on one physical page without creating labels, see Subdivide Page.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point on the page where you want labels to begin.

2	Choose Labels from the Layout menu.

3	Select the type of labels you want to display: Laser, Tractor Fed, or Both.

4	In the Labels list, highlight the label definition you want, then choose Select.

5	Use the following keystrokes when typing labels:

Keystroke	Lets You

Ctrl+Enter	End the text you are typing on the current label, then move to the next label.

Enter	End a line of text within a label.

Alt+PgDn or Alt+PgUp	Move to the next or previous label.

Ctrl+g 	Move to a specific label number.

See Also

Create or Edit Label File

Create or Edit Labels

Label File

Print Labels

Subdivide Page

View Modes


Language

Tools, Language

Purpose

Use Language when you want to use the formatting conventions of another language with features such as Date, Sort, Footnote, and Tables (no language module is needed).

If you purchase an additional language module, you can also use the Language feature with Speller, Thesaurus, Grammatik, and Hyphenation.  If you purchase a WordPerfect package in another language, you can change languages for dialog boxes, menus, file lists, and prompts.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want to specify the formatting conventions for another language.

or...  Select the text you want to specify conventions for.

2	Choose Language from the Tools menu.

3	Select a language or begin typing the name of the language to search for it.

or...  To select a language you may have that is not on the list, select Other from the list, then type the two-letter language code in the Other text box.

4	If you want to disable the Speller or Grammatik for this section of the document, select Disable Writing Tools.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Character Mapping


Find and Replace Text Options

Edit, Find, Options

Edit, Replace, Options

Purpose

Use the Options menu in the Find and Find and Replace dialog boxes to specify how you want WordPerfect to search your document.

Steps

1	Choose Find from the Edit menu, then choose Options.

or... Choose Replace from the Edit menu, then choose Options.

2	Choose from the following options:

Option	Lets You

Begin Find at Top of Document	Begin searching for a word, phrase, or code at the beginning of a document.

Wrap at Beg./End of Document	Search forward from the insertion point to the end of the document, then search from the beginning of the document to the insertion point; or search backward to the top of the document, then continue from the end of the document to the insertion point.

Limit Find Within Selection	Search from the beginning to the end of selected text.

Include Headers, Footers, etc.	Search for words, phrases, or codes in the document in Find window and all other substructures.

Limit Number of Changes	Limit the number of matches that will be found when you use replace.

See Also

Find Text

Find and Replace Text


Line Height

Layout, Line, Height

Purpose

Use Line Height to adjust the line height in your document regardless of the font.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want the new line height setting to begin.

or...  Select the text for which you want to change the line height.

2	Choose Line from the Layout menu, then choose Height.

3	Select Fixed, then specify a new line height measurement.

4	Choose OK.

Choose Auto to set the line height automatically according to the font being used.

See Also

Line Height (Leading) Adjustment


Hyphenation

Layout, Line, Hyphenation

Purpose

Use Line Hyphenation to divide words that extend beyond the right margin, instead of wrapping them to the next line.

1	Place the insertion point in the paragraph where you want to begin hyphenation.

2	Choose Line from the Layout menu, then choose Hyphenation.

3	Select Hyphenation On.

4	If you want to change the width of the hyphenation zone, specify new percentages in the Percent Left and Percent Right text boxes.

Increase the percentages to hyphenate fewer words in your document; decrease the percentages to hyphenate more words.

5	Choose OK.

If Hyphenation was turned on before you changed the hyphenation zone, WordPerfect may prompt you to re-hyphenate some words in the current document.

See Also

Hyphenation (File Preferences)

Position Hyphen


Line Numbering

Layout, Line, Numbering

Purpose

Use Line Numbering to number the lines in a document and print each line number at a specified position on the page.

Steps

To number lines in a document,

1	Place the insertion point where you want line numbering to begin.

2	Choose Line from the Layout menu, then choose Numbering.

3	Select Turn Line Numbering On.

4	Select and change any of the following options:

Option	Lets You

Numbering Method	Specify whether line numbers will print as numbers, letters, or Roman numerals.

Starting Line Number	Specify the number that is assigned to the first line.

First Printing Line Number	Specify the first line number to print.

Numbering Interval	Specify the interval between printed line numbers.

From Left Edge of Page	Specify the distance from the left edge of the page (or from the center of the space between columns) to the line number.

Left of Margin	Specify the distance from the left margin to the line number.

Restart Numbering on	Specify whether line numbers will

Each Page	begin again with the starting line number at the top of each page.

Count Blank Lines	Specify whether blank lines are counted.

5	Choose OK.

To number lines in newspaper columns,

1	Place the insertion point in the column where you want line numbering to begin.

2	Choose Line from the Layout menu, then choose Numbering.

3	Select Turn Line Numbering On.

4	Select Number all Newspaper Columns.

5	Make sure Left of Margin is selected, then specify the distance between the line numbers and the left edge of the text in each column.

Specify a distance less than the space between the columns or the line numbers may overlap the text in the columns.

6	Select and change any other options as needed (see preceding table).

7	Choose OK.

See Also

Binding Options

Page Numbering


Line Separator

Insert, Footnote, Options, Separator

Purpose

Use Line Separator to change the two-inch long separator line that WordPerfect prints to separate text from footnotes.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point on the page where you want your changes to take effect.

2	Choose Footnote from the Insert menu, then choose Options.

3	Choose Separator.

4	Choose from any of the following options:

Option	Lets You

Space Above Line	Specify the amount of space between the line and the text above it.

Space Below Line	Specify the amount of space between the line and the footnote text below it.

Line Position	Place the line at the left or right margin, between margins, centered between margins, or at a position you specify.

Length of Line	Specify the length of the footnote separator line.

Line Style	Specify the line style you want.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Edit Footnote or Endnote

Footnote Options

Footnote/Endnote Feature Bar

Footnote or Endnote Number

Position of Footnotes


  Line Spacing (Text)

Layout, Line, Spacing

Purpose

Use Line Spacing to change the amount of space between lines of text in your document.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point anywhere in the paragraph where you want the spacing change to begin.

or...  Select any amount of text in the paragraphs you want to change.

2	Choose Line from the Layout menu, then choose Spacing.

You can also click [image] on the Power Bar.

3	Specify the setting you want in the Spacing text box.

In single-spaced text, the distance from baseline to baseline is one line height.  When you specify a new number in the Line Spacing dialog box, the current line height is multiplied by that number.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Line Height

Typesetting


Line Style

Graphics, Edit Box, Border/Fill, Customize Style, Line Style

Purpose

Use Line Style to change the left, right, top, or bottom border lines of a graphics box or a border surrounding document text.

You can also use Line Style to change a horizontal or vertical graphics line in a document.

Steps

To change the line style of a graphics box border,

1	Select a graphics box with the border line you want to change.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Border/Fill.

or... Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Border/Fill from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then select Border/Fill.

3	Choose Customize Style.

4	Select a line style for the left, right, top, or bottom lines from either the Line Style pop-up palette or the Line Style drop-down list.

5	Choose OK twice.

6	Choose Close from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box Feature Bar and return to your document.

To change the line style of a paragraph, page, or column border,

1	Place the pointer anywhere inside a paragraph, page, or column border, then click once.

2	Choose Paragraph, Page, or Columns from the Layout menu, then choose Border/Fill.

3	Choose Customize Style.

4	Select a line style for the left, right, top, or bottom lines from either the Line Style pop-up palette or the Line Style drop-down list.

5	Choose OK twice.

To change the line style of a graphics line,

1	Select a graphics line to edit.

2	Choose Edit Line from the Graphics menu.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics line, then choose Edit Horizontal Line or Edit Vertical Line.

3	Select a line style for the graphics line from either the Line Style pop-up palette or the Line Style drop-down list.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Change Color

Corners (Customize Border)

Create or Edit Graphic Line

Drop Shadow (Customize Border)

Select Sides to Modify (Customize Border)

Space (Customize Border)


Custom Box/Line Styles

Graphics, Custom Line, Line Styles

Graphics, Custom Box, Styles

Purpose

Use this feature to create or edit a custom box or line style.

Steps

To create a custom box style,

1	Choose Custom Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Styles.

2	Choose Create, then type a name for the box style in the Style Name text box.

3	Select options to create the graphics box style.

4	Choose OK until you return to the Create Box Style dialog box, then choose OK to return to the Box Styles dialog box.

5	Choose Close.

To create a custom line style,

1	Place the insertion point on the page where you want to add a graphics line.

2	Choose Custom Line from the Graphics menu, then choose Line Styles.

3	Highlight a predefined line style, then choose Edit.

or... Choose Create, then type a name for the new line style in the Style Name text box.

4	Select a line component to edit by clicking the appropriate arrow button below the preview box.

You can also choose Add or Del below the preview box to add or delete line components.

5	Choose the line options you want from the Line Options group box.

6	Choose OK, highlight the new or edited line style, choose Select, then choose OK.

See Also

Custom Line Edit


Link Options

Insert, Spreadsheet/Database, Options

Purpose

Use Link Options if you want to have WordPerfect automatically update all spreadsheet and database links in the current document each time you open the document.  You can also choose to display or hide link icons.

Steps

To use update on retrieve,

1	Choose Spreadsheet/Database from the Insert menu,

choose Options, then choose Update on Retrieve.

2	Choose OK.

To display or hide link icons,

1	Choose Spreadsheet/Database from the Insert menu, then choose Options.

2	Select (or deselect) Show Link Icons, then choose OK.

See Also

Update


OLE Links

Edit, Links

Purpose

Use Links to cancel, update, or change a link that has been created using OLE.

Steps

To update a link,

1	Choose Links from the Edit menu, then select the object you want to change from the Links list box.

2	Select Automatic to have the links updated automatically.

or... Select Manual if you want to update the links manually.

To cancel a link,

1	Choose Links from the Edit menu.

2	Select the link you want to cancel from the Links list box, choose Cancel Link, then choose OK.

To change an OLE link,

1	Choose Links from the Edit menu, select the object you want to change from the Links list box, then choose Change Link.

2	Select the filename you want to link to, then choose OK.

See Also

DDE Links

Paste Special


Tables (def)
Tables

Creating a table in WPWin is as easy as clicking a button.  With just your mouse, you can make a table, adjust the column widths, change the line and border style, and add a fill pattern--all within a matter of seconds.  Even data you've already formatted can be effortlessly converted into a table.  In addition, our tables double as spreadsheets so you can produce expense reports, monthly loan payment calculations, and more.

How to Use It


  Invert (Image)

Graphics, Edit Box, Tools, Invert

Purpose

Use this feature to change the colors in an image to their complementary colors.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or...  Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

3	Click [image] to invert the colors in the image.

or...  Click [image], select Color Attributes, select Invert Colors, then choose OK.

See Also

Black and White Threshold (Image)

Brightness (Image)

Contrast (Image)

Fill Attributes (Image)

Image Settings

Mirror (Image)

Move (Image)

Reset All (Image)

Rotate (Image)

WP Draw

Zoom (Image)


Macro Feature Bar

Tools, Macro, Macro Bar

Purpose

Use the options on the Macro Feature Bar to create, edit, save, and compile macros, use the Command Inserter, or use the Dialog Editor.

Steps

1	Choose Macro from the Tools menu, then choose Macro Bar.

See Also

Assign Macro to Menu

Macro Location

Macros

Record/Play/Edit a Macro


Macro Location

Tools, Macro, Play, Location

Purpose

Use Macro Location to specify where your macro files are located.

Steps

1	Choose Macro from the Tools Menu.

2	Choose Play, then choose Location.

3	Select an option from the Play From group box, then choose OK.

4	Specify where the macro is located, then choose Play.

See Also

Assign Macro to Menu

Macro Bar

Record/Play/Edit a Macro


Manual Kerning

Layout, Typesetting, Manual Kerning

Purpose

Use Manual Kerning to adjust the spacing between any two characters.  Manual Kerning affects only the characters on either side of the insertion point.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point between the two characters you want to kern.

2	Choose Typesetting from the Layout menu, then choose Manual Kerning.

3	To specify the units of measure, choose the appropriate unit from the pop-up list.

4	Specify an Amount to add to or subtract from the current space between the characters.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Advance

Automatic Kerning


Margins

Layout, Margins

Purpose

Use Margins to change document margins for a page or more.  (Use Paragraph Format when you want to change margins for a few paragraphs only.)

To change margins for all new documents, see Styles Editor.

You can also adjust where information prints on the page by changing the text adjustment in your paper definition.  See Create or Edit Paper Size.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in the paragraph or page where you want margin changes to take place.

or...  Select the text you want to change margins for.

2	Choose Margins from the Layout menu.

3	Specify new settings for Left, Right, Top, or Bottom margins.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Document Layout

Page Layout

Paragraph Format

Ruler Bar


Cross-Reference Feature Bar

Tools, Cross-Reference

Purpose

Use the Cross-Reference Feature Bar to mark cross-references in your document.

Steps

1	Choose Cross-Reference from the Tools menu.

2	Choose from the following options:

Option	Lets You

Reference	Choose a reference type.

Target	Specify a target name.

Mark Reference	Mark a reference.

Mark Target	Mark a target.

Close	Close the Feature Bar.

Generate	Generate the cross-references and other generated items.

See Also

Counters

Feature Bars

Generate


Index Feature Bar

Tools, Index

Purpose

Use the Index Feature Bar to mark text for an index.

Steps

1	Choose Index from the Tools menu.

2	Choose from the following options:

Option	Lets You

Heading	Specify an index heading.

Subheading	Specify an index subheading.

Mark	Mark text for an index entry.

Define	Define the index.

Close	Close the Feature Bar.

Generate	Generate the index and other generated items.

See Also

Define Index

Feature Bars

Generate


List Feature Bar

Tools, List

Purpose

Use the List Feature Bar to mark text for lists.

Steps

1	Choose List from the Tools menu.

2	Choose from the following options:

Option	Lets You

List	Specify a list name.

Mark	Mark text for the list.

Define	Define the list.

Close	Close the Feature Bar.

Generate	Generate the list and other generated items.

See Also

Define List or Table of Authorities

Feature Bars

Generate


Table of Authorities Feature Bar

Tools, Table of Authorities

Purpose

Use the Table of Authorities Feature Bar to mark text for a table of authorities.

Steps

1	Choose Table of Authorities from the Tools menu.

2	Choose from the following options:

Option	Lets You

Short Form	Specify a short form name.

Mark	Mark text for the citation.

Create Full Form	Create the full form of an authority.

Edit Full Form	Edit the full form of an authority.

Define	Define table of authorities sections.

Close	Close the Feature Bar.

Generate	Generate the table of authorities and other generated items.

See Also

Create Full Form

Create Table of Authorities

Define List or Table of Authorities

Edit Full Form

Feature Bars

Generate


Create (Table of Authorities) Full Form

Tools, Table of Authorities, Create Full Form

Purpose

Use this feature to associate a section name and a short form name with the full form of an authority.

Steps

1	Choose Table of Authorities from the Tools menu.

2	Choose Create Full Form from the Table of Authorities Feature Bar.

3	Type the name of the section where you want to include the authority in the Section Name text box, or select the appropriate section from the drop-down list.

4	If you want, edit the text in the Short Form text box.

Specify a unique short form name for every full form since the short form name is used to identify other occurrences of the same authority.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Edit Full Form

Table of Authorities Full Form Feature Bar


Table of Contents Feature Bar

Tools, Table of Contents

Purpose

Use the Table of Contents Feature Bar to mark text for a table of contents.

Steps

1	Choose Table of Contents from the Tools menu.

2	Choose from the following options:

Option	Lets You

Mark X	Mark text for a table of contents entry (where X is the level).

Define	Define the table of contents.

Close	Close the Feature Bar.

Generate	Generate the table of contents and other generated items.

See Also

Define Table of Contents

Feature Bars

Generate


Merge

Tools, Merge

Purpose

Use Merge to mass-produce letters, envelopes, mailing labels, contracts, phone lists, memos, or other documents by merging a form file and a data file.

For example, to write the same letter to a number of people without typing the original letter more than once, create two files: a form file (letter) and a data file (names and addresses of the people you want to send the letters to).  Then merge the two files to create a third file containing all the merged letters or to send the merged files directly to the printer.

Steps

1	Choose Merge from the Tools menu.

2	Choose from the following options:

Option	Lets You

Data	Create a data text or data table file.

Form	Create a form file.

Merge	Combine a data file and form file to create many copies of the same document, but with different data; or merge a form file with keyboard input.

See Also

Create Data File

Create Form File

Perform Merge


Add/Delete Field (Merge table)

Tools, Merge, Data (table), Column, Insert or Delete

Purpose

Use this feature to add or delete fields after you have created a merge data table.

Steps

1	Choose Merge from the Tools menu, choose Place Records in a Table, then choose Data.

2	If you have text in the active window, choose OK to use the current window for the data file.

or...  Select New Document Window, then choose OK.

3	Finish creating the data table.

4	Place the insertion point in the column where you want to add or delete a field.

5	Choose Column from the Merge Data File Feature Bar.

6	Choose Delete to delete the column at the insertion point, then choose OK.

or...  Choose Insert, then type a field name.  Select Before Current Field, After Current Field, or After Last Field, then choose OK.

7	Type the appropriate field entries in the new column, then save or merge the file.

See Also

Create Data File

Go to Data

Merge Data File Feature Bar

Quick Data Entry

Table


Add/Delete Record (Merge table)

Tools, Merge, Data (table), Row, Insert or Delete

Purpose

Use this feature to add or delete records after you have created a merge data table.

Steps

1	Choose Merge from the Tools menu, choose Place Records in a Table, then choose Data.

2	If you have text in the active window, choose OK to use the current window for the data file.

or...  Select New Document Window, then choose OK.

3	Finish creating the data table.

4	Place the insertion point in the row where you want to add or delete a record.

5	Choose Row from the Merge Data Table Feature Bar.

6	Choose Delete to delete the row at the insertion point, then choose OK.

or... Choose Insert, select Add Row Above Current Row, Add Row Below Current Row, or Add Row to End of Table, then choose OK.

7	Type the appropriate field entries in the new record row, then save or merge the file.

See Also

Create Data File

Go to Data

Merge Data File Feature Bar

Quick Data Entry

Table


Associate (Merge)

Tools, Merge, Data, OK, Go to Form, Associate

Tools, Merge, Form, OK, None, OK, Go to Data, Associate

Tools, Merge, Form, OK, None, OK, Insert Field, Data File, Specify a data file, OK, Close

Purpose

Use Associate in Merge to link a data file to a form file.

You can associate a data file as you create a form file, or you can create or change the association later.  To create the association as you create the form file, see Create Form File.

Steps

To associate files from an existing form file,

1	From a merge file, choose Go to Form or Go to Data from the Merge Feature Bar.

2	Choose Select, specify the data or form file you want to associate with the current file, then choose OK.

or...  If you chose Go to Data, choose Create, type a filename, select Records Stored in a Table (if you want), then choose OK.

or...  If you chose Go to Form, choose Create, then insert fields and merge codes from the Merge Form File Feature Bar.

To change an association,

1	From a form file, choose Insert Field, then choose Data File.

2	Specify a data file.

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Create Form File

Go to Data

Go to Form


Merge Form File Feature Bar

Tools, Merge, Form, None, OK

Tools, Merge, Data, OK, OK, Close, Go to Form

Purpose

When creating a form file, choose from the following options on the Merge Form File Feature Bar:

Option	Lets You

Insert Field	Insert field names from a data file.

Date	Insert a Date code so dates are inserted into merged documents.

Merge Codes	Insert merge codes.

Keyboard	Insert a Keyboard merge code, then create a prompt.

Merge	Perform the merge.

Go to Data	Open or create an associated data file.

Options	Choose to display or hide codes, display codes as markers, or remove the Merge Feature Bar.

See Also

Create Form File

Date

Go to Data

Merge Keyboard Feature Bar

Merge

Merge Codes

Options


Merge Keyboard Feature Bar

Tools, Merge, Merge, OK

Purpose

Use the Merge Keyboard Feature Bar while performing a keyboard merge.

Steps

1	Create a form or data file containing the KEYBOARD merge command.

2	Choose Merge from the Tools menu, then choose Merge.

3	When the merge pauses at the KEYBOARD command, choose from the following keyboard merge options:

Option	Lets You

Continue	Type your response, then continue the merge.

Skip to Next Record	Ignore the keyboard prompt for the current record, then move to the next record.

Quit	Quit the merge after the remaining text, but ignore all merge commands.

Stop	Stop the merge at the current position.

See Also

Create Data File

Create Form File

Perform Merge

Merge


Merge Data File Feature Bar

Tools, Merge, Data

Tools, Merge, Form, OK, Specify a data file, OK, Go to Data

Purpose

When creating a data file, choose from the following options on the Merge Data File Feature Bar:

Option	Lets You

Row (table only)	Insert or delete a row (record).

Column (table only)	Insert or delete a column (field).

End Field (text only)	Insert an ENDFIELD code.

End Record (text only)	Insert an ENDRECORD code.

Merge Codes	Insert merge codes.

Quick Entry	Edit data records.

Merge	Perform the merge.

Go to Form	Open or create associated form file.

Options	Choose to display or hide codes, display codes as markers, remove the Merge Feature Bar, or sort records.

See Also

Add Field (Column)

Add Record (Row)

Create Data File

Go to Form

Insert Merge Codes

Merge

Options

Quick Data Entry


Multiple Pages

File, Print, Multiple Pages

Purpose

Use Multiple Pages to print specific pages, secondary pages, chapters, or volumes.

Steps

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

2	Select Multiple Pages, then choose Print.

3	Specify the pages, secondary pages, chapters, and volumes to print.

You can specify the range of pages you want to print in the Pages text box as follows:

Type	To Print

3	Page 3

3,5,8	Pages 3, 5, and 8

3 8	Pages 3 and 8

3-	Page 3 through the end of the document

-3	The beginning of the document through page 3

3-8	Pages 3 through 8

1-3 8	Pages 1 through 3 and page 8

3,5,9-15	Pages 3, 5, and 9 through 15

You can also specify which secondary pages, chapters, and volumes to print using ranges as shown in the table above.

4	Choose Print.

See Also

Document on Disk

Page Numbering

Printer Setup

Select Printer


Table Names in Current Document

Table, Names

Purpose

Use Table Names in Current Document to name tables, floating cells, cells, ranges, columns, and rows, and to edit, delete, go to, and insert names.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in a table.

2	Choose Names from the Table menu.

You can also click Names from the Table Formula Feature Bar.

3	To create or edit a name, choose from the following options:

Create Name (Table)

Edit Name/Reference

4	To delete a name, highlight the name of the table component you want to delete, then choose Delete.

5	To go to a name, highlight the name of the table, floating cell, or table component you want to go to, then choose Goto.

6	To insert a name into the Formula Edit text box (available only when you choose Names from the Feature Bar), highlight a name, then choose Insert.

7	Choose Close.

See Also

Table Formula Feature Bar


Template

File, Template

Purpose

Use templates to set formatting and program options for documents you create.

Steps

1	Choose Template from the File menu.

2	Select the template you want to use.

or...  If you want to delete the selected template, choose Delete Template from the Options pop-up list, choose Yes, then choose OK.

or...  If you want to create a new template or edit the selected template, choose Create Template or Edit Template from the Options drop-down list.

See Also

Template Feature Bar


Numbering Value (Pages)

Layout, Page, Numbering, Value

Purpose

Use Numbering Value to change page numbers, secondary numbers, chapter numbers, and volume numbers.

Steps

To set a new number,

1	Choose Page from the Layout menu, then choose Numbering.

2	Choose Value.

3	Specify a New Page Number, New Secondary Number, New Chapter Number, or New Volume Number.

4	Choose OK.

To increase or decrease a number,

1	Choose Page from the Layout menu, then choose Numbering.

2	Choose Value.

3	Specify the interval by which to increase or decrease the page number, secondary number, chapter number, or volume number.

The values shown in the Increase/Decrease text boxes are intervals, not numbers.  If, for example, an existing chapter number with a value of 5 is increased by an interval of 2, then the chapter number would become 7.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Page Numbering

Page Numbering Options


Number Type (Table)

Table, Number Type

Purpose

Use Number Type to specify how numbers are used (as values or text), displayed, and printed in your table.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in the cell, column, table, or floating cell in which you want to change the number type.

2	Choose Number Type from the Table menu.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Number Type.

3	Choose Cell, Column, or Table.

4	If you want to apply the number type you have already defined for the current column to the current cell, be sure Use Column Type is selected.

5	Choose from the following options:

Option	Lets You

Accounting	Display numbers using the same format as the Currency option, but align the currency symbol with the edge of the column.

Commas	Display numbers using the same format as the Fixed option, but use commas for thousands separators and display negative numbers within parentheses.

Currency	Display numbers with as many as 15 decimal places, the currency symbol, thousands separator, and decimal align character.

Date/Time	Convert numbers into the current date and time format.

Fixed	Display numbers with as many as 15 decimals.

General	Display numbers without a thousands separator and no trailing zeros to the right of the decimal point.

Integer	Display numbers as counting numbers.  Numbers are rounded to eliminate decimals.

Percent	Display numbers as percent values (multiplied by 100) with the percent symbol and the number of decimal places you set.

Scientific	Display numbers in scientific (exponential) notation.

Text	Treat the contents of a cell as text, which cannot be used for calculations.

See Also

Customize Number Type (Table)


  Black and White Threshold (Image)

Graphics, Edit Box, Tools, B & W Threshold

Purpose

Use this feature to convert a color image to black and white and to select a black and white threshold.

Any grays that are darker than the threshold value are converted to black; any grays that are lighter than the threshold are converted to white.

Steps

To select the threshold for a black and white image,

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or...  Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

3	Click [image], select Black and White, then select a Threshold shade.

To specify a black and white threshold value,

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or...  Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

3	Click [image], then select B & W Attributes.

4	Make sure Black and White is selected, then specify a value in the Threshold text box.

5	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Brightness (Image)

Contrast (Image)

Fill Attributes (Image)

Image Settings

Invert (Image)

Mirror (Image)

Move (Image)

Reset All (Image)

Rotate (Image)

WP Draw

Zoom (Image)


Open Color Palette

Layout, Font, Palette, Open

Purpose

Use Open to access a previously created color palette.

Steps

1	Choose Font from the Layout menu, then choose Palette.

2	Choose Open.

3	Highlight the name of the color palette you want in the Palette list.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Blend Colors

Color Model

Color Wheel

Copy/Paste Colors

Default Color Palette

Invert Colors

Rainbow Colors

Save Color Palette


Other Codes

Layout, Line, Other Codes

Purpose

Use Other Codes when you want to insert hard tabs, hyphenation codes, and hard spaces or to end centering/alignment.

Steps

1	Choose Line from the Layout menu, then choose Other Codes.

2	Choose from the following options:

Option	Lets You
Hard Tab Codes	Insert a tab for use one time only; hard tabs remain even if you change tab settings.
Hard Tab Codes with Dot Leaders	Insert a tab with dot leaders for use one time only; hard tabs remain even if you change tab settings.
Hyphenation Codes	Insert hyphens, insert soft hyphens to ensure where a word is divided, or cancel hyphenation when you want to ensure that a word is not hyphenated.
Hard Space	Keep dates and names together on one line.
End Centering/Alignment	Discontinue centering from the insertion point position to the end of the line.
Thousands Separator	Change the character that displays in numbers over 1,000.
3	Choose Insert.

See Also

Hyphenation

Tab Set


Define Outline

Tools, Outline, Options, Define Outline

Purpose

Use this feature to create, edit, copy, delete, reset, retrieve, or save outline styles.

Steps

1	Choose Outline from the Tools menu.

2	Choose Define Outline from the Options drop-down list on the Outline Feature Bar.

3	If you want to edit a style from the supplemental template, choose Setup from the Options drop-down list, select Supplemental, then choose OK.

You must specify your supplemental template in File Preferences before you can access it.

4	If you are editing, copying, deleting, or resetting an outline style, select that style.

5	If you want to start another outline using the same style, select Start New Outline.

See Also

Change Outline Level

Edit Outline Definition

End Outline

File Preferences

Outline Feature Bar

Style List

Template


Outline Feature Bar

Tools, Outline

Purpose

Use Outline to organize text using numbers, bullets, or headings.

Steps

1	Choose Outline from the Tools menu.

2	Type the text for the first outline level.

3	To insert another first level item, press Enter, then type text.

You can change the level of the current item by pressing Tab or Shift+Tab, or by using the first two arrow buttons on the Outline Feature Bar.

4	Continue to add items, referring to the table below.

If you need to select an outline item, family, or body text paragraph, click the symbol at the beginning of the item, family, or paragraph.  Then, to insert another first level item, press Enter.  To insert a second level, press Enter, then press Tab.  To insert a previous level, press Enter, then press Shift+Tab.

Option	Lets You
,	Increase and decrease the level of the current outline item, selected items, or selected family.
,	Move the current outline item, selected items, or selected family up or down.
	Change the current outline item or selected items to body text, or change body text to an outline item.
,	Show and hide subordinate levels in the current outline family.
Show buttons	Specify the levels you want to show as you edit the outline.
Options	Define or edit outline styles, change paragraph levels, and set paragraph numbers.
Outline Definition drop-down list	Select an outline definition.
Close	Close the Outline Feature Bar.
The [image] button and the Show buttons are useful for temporarily "collapsing" your outline so you can edit or print only main outline items.

5	When you are finished with your outline, choose End Outline from the Options drop-down list, then choose Close.

See Also

Outline Options

Style List


Overstrike

Layout, Typesetting, Overstrike

Purpose

Use Overstrike to create new characters from your keyboard by combining existing characters.

You can create mathematical symbols, language symbols, and other character combinations not included in the WordPerfect character sets.

Steps

To create an overstrike character,

1	Place the insertion point where you want to insert the overstrike character.

2	Choose Typesetting from the Layout menu, then choose Overstrike.

3	To include a text attribute, click and hold the button next to the text box, then select the attribute you want.

4	Type the characters that you want printed as an overstrike, without spaces (the order is not important).

5	Choose OK.

To edit an overstrike character,

1	Choose Typesetting from the Layout menu, then choose Overstrike.

or...  If you are using Reveal Codes, you can also double-click on an overstrike code to open the Overstrike dialog box.

2	If necessary, choose Previous or Next until the overstrike character you want to edit is displayed.

3	Add or delete any text appearance attributes or characters in the text box, then choose OK or Close.

See Also

WordPerfect Characters


Charts (def)
Charts

With just a click of your mouse, you can show off your numbers as a pie, bar, scatter, hi-lo, or area chart.  Our charts help you easily decipher complex sales and costs figures; or you can use them to see the trends in the market or weather.  You can make a chart from scratch, from WPWin tables, or from an imported spreadsheet.

How to Use It


Page Numbering

Layout, Page, Numbering

Purpose

Use Page Numbering to select the type of page numbers you want and place them in specific locations on the printed page.

Steps

1	Choose Page from the Layout menu, then choose Numbering.

2	Select a location for the page numbers from the Position pop-up list.

3	Choose OK.

You can also choose the following options:

Font

Options

Value

See Also

Line Numbering

Page Numbering Options


Paper Size

Layout, Page, Paper Size

Purpose

Use Paper Size to select and create paper definitions.  WordPerfect uses a paper definition to format and print your document.

To select or create a paper definition for all new documents, see Styles Editor.

To select or create a paper definition that can be used with any WordPerfect printer driver or for the current document only, see ALL OTHERS.  WordPerfect uses the [ALL OTHERS] definition when the paper size defined in the document does not match a definition on the list.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point on the page where you want to change the paper definition.

2	Choose Page from the Layout menu, then choose Paper Size.

3	Highlight the paper definition you want, then choose Select.

See Also

Create or Edit Paper Size

Delete a Paper Definition


Paragraph Format

Layout, Paragraph, Format

Purpose

Use Paragraph Format to adjust margins for a few paragraphs only.  You can also change first line indent and paragraph spacing.

To change paragraph format options for all new documents, see Styles Editor.

Use Margins when you want to set margins for an entire page or more.

You can also adjust where information prints on the page by changing the text adjustment in your paper definition.  See Create or Edit Paper Size.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want paragraph changes to take place.

or...  Select the text you want to adjust.

2	Choose Paragraph from the Layout menu, then choose Format.

or...  Click the right mouse button on the Ruler, then choose Paragraph Format.

3	Specify new paragraph format settings according to the following table:

Option	Lets You

First Line Indent	Indent first line of paragraph a specified amount when you press Enter.

Spacing Between Paragraphs	Add spacing between paragraphs when you press Enter (line spacing times the specified amount).

Left Margin Adjustment	Adjust the left margin in addition to the current page margin.

Right Margin Adjustment	Adjust the right margin in addition to the current page margin.

Clear All	Remove adjustments and return to previous settings.

4	Choose OK.

You can also use the Ruler Bar to do the following:

Option	How You Do It

Adjust First Line Indent	Drag top left triangle (indent marker) on the margin line.

Adjust Paragraph Margins	Drag bottom left or right triangle (paragraph markers) on the margin line.

Return a setting while dragging	Drag pointer to the top of the document window.

Display Paragraph Format	Double-click on an indent or dialog box paragraph marker.

See Also

Document Layout

Page Layout

Ruler Bar


  Contrast (Image)

Graphics, Edit Box, Tools, Contrast

Purpose

Use this feature to adjust the appearance of the light and dark areas of a color image.

Steps

To adjust image contrast,

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or...  Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

3	Click [image], then select the contrast you want.

To specify a contrast value,

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or...  Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

3	Click [image], then select Color Attributes.

4	Specify a contrast value from either the Contrast pop-up palette or the Contrast text box.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Black and White Threshold (Image)

Brightness (Image)

Fill Attributes (Image)

Image Settings

Invert (Image)

Mirror (Image)

Move (Image)

Reset All (Image)

Rotate (Image)

WP Draw

Zoom (Image)


Paste Special

Edit, Paste Special

Purpose

Use this feature to select a data type for which you want to link an OLE object.  You can also use it to select a data type for a DDE link you create.

Steps

To select a data type for OLE,

1	Open the application and file you want to link to.

You can link objects from saved documents only.

2	Select the information you want to appear in the WordPerfect document, then copy it to the Clipboard.

See your server application documentation for more information.

3	Switch to WordPerfect, then choose Paste Special from the Edit menu.

4	Choose the object you want from the Data Type list box, then choose Paste Link.

To select a data type for a DDE Link,

1	Open the server application and file you want to link to (for example, open Lotus 123 for Windows and a worksheet file).

2	Select the information you want to appear in the WordPerfect document, then copy it to the Clipboard.

3	Switch to the WordPerfect document, then place the insertion point where you want to create the link.

4	Choose Paste Special from the Edit menu, choose a Data Type format, then choose Paste Link.

See Also

Insert Object into Document


Printer Setup

File, Select Printer, Setup

File, Print, Select, Setup

Purpose

Use Printer Setup to specify print settings for a WordPerfect-driven printer.

If you want to use a Windows printer driver, WordPerfect provides access to the Windows printer setup options from within WordPerfect.  For information about these printer setup options, refer to the Microsoft Windows User's Guide or use the online Help system.

Steps

1	Choose Select Printer from the File menu.

2	Highlight the name of the WordPerfect printer you want to set up, then choose Setup.

WordPerfect-driven printers are distinguished from Windows-driven printers by a WP symbol.

3	Edit the printer setup by selecting options and specifying the changes you want.

Option	Lets You
Filename	View the name of the printer driver (.PRS file) for the selected printer.
Name	Type in a description for a printer.
Path for Downloadable Fonts and Printer Commands	Specify the directory where downloadable soft fonts and printer commands are stored.
Cartridges/Fonts	Add supplemental font types to the list of available fonts for a printer.
Sheet Feeder	Select a sheet feeder.
Color	Specify whether your printer is configured for color (if the current printer supports color printing).
Port	Specify where your printer is connected to your computer.  If Port is set to File, specify the filename.
Prompt for Filename	Rename the output file for each document you print.
4	Choose OK.

5	Highlight the name of the printer you just modified, then choose Select to make it your current printer.

See Also

Printer Command

Select Fonts

Select Sheet Feeder


Perform Merge

Tools, Merge, Merge

Tools, Merge, Data, OK, OK, Close, Merge, Merge

Tools, Merge, Form, OK, None, OK, Merge, Merge

Purpose

Use Perform Merge to perform a merge after you have created a form file and data file.

Creating a data file is optional if you are using another data source such as the keyboard or a database.

Steps

1	Choose Merge from the Tools menu, then choose Merge.

or...  Choose Merge from the Merge Feature Bar, then choose Merge.

2	Select the Form File location:  Current Document, Clipboard, or Select File (from a directory).

3	Select the Data File location (if needed):  Clipboard, None (for a keyboard merge), or select the file.

4	Select the Output File location:  Current Document, New Document, Printer, or select a file.

5	Choose from the following options:

Option	Lets You

Select Records	Limit the merge to certain data records; you can specify conditions or mark records.

Envelope	Create envelopes; specify a return address; specify fields for mailing addresses.

Options	Control page breaks, copies, empty fields, and code display.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Associate (Merge)

Envelope

Options

Select Records


Perform Merge Options

Tools, Merge, Merge, Options

Purpose

Use Perform Merge Options to control page breaks, number of copies, empty fields, and code display.

Steps

1	Choose Merge from the Tools menu, then choose Merge.

or...  Choose Merge from the Merge Feature Bar, then choose Merge.

2	Specify file locations, then choose from the following options:

Option	Lets You
Separate Each Merged Document With a Page Break	Create or omit the page break between merged records.
Number of Copies for Each Record	Specify the number of copies for each record in the data file.
If Empty Field in Data File	Specify to leave a blank line or remove it when a field in the data file is empty.
Display Options	Show or hide codes in the output file, or show codes as markers.
3	Choose OK twice to merge.

See Also

Perform Merge


Placement (Header/Footer or Watermark)

Layout, Header/Footer, Edit, Placement

Layout, Watermark, Edit, Placement

Purpose

Use Placement to specify the pages in your document where the header, footer, or watermark appears.

Steps

1	While in Page view, move the insertion point to a page where the header, footer, or watermark you want to edit is in effect.

2	Choose Header/Footer from the Layout menu, select the header or footer you want, then choose Edit.

or... Choose Watermark from the Layout menu, select the watermark you want, then choose Edit.

3	Choose Placement from the Feature Bar, then select the pages where you want the header, footer, or watermark to appear.

4	Choose OK.

5	Choose Close from the Feature Bar.

See Also

Header/Footer Feature Bar

Header/Footer

Watermark

Watermark Feature Bar


Record/Play/Edit a Macro

Tools, Macros, Record or Play or Edit

Purpose

Use this feature to record, play, or edit a macro.

Steps

To record a macro,

1	Choose Macros from the Tools menu, then choose Record.

2	Enter a name in the Name text box, then choose Record.

3	From the keyboard, enter the commands you want recorded.

4	Choose Macros from the Tools menu, then choose Record.

To play a macro,

1	Choose Macros from the Tools menu, then choose Play.

2	Enter the full name of the macro you want to play.

3	Choose Play.

To edit a macro,

1	Choose Macros from the Tools menu, then choose Edit.

2	Enter the full name of the macro you want to edit, then choose Edit.

3	Add or delete macro commands.

4	Choose Save & Compile from the Macro Feature Bar, then choose Close.

See Also

Macros

Macro Location


Position Hyphen

Purpose

When WordPerfect prompts you to hyphenate a word, use Position Hyphen to indicate whether and how you want the word hyphenated.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want the word divided.

2	Choose one of the following options:

Option	Lets You

Insert Hyphen	Divide the word using a soft hyphen.

Insert Space	Divide the word using a space.

Hyphenation SRt	Divide the word using a hyphenation soft return instead of a hyphen.

Suspend Hyphenation	Turn off Hyphenation during spell-checking or during a scrolling command; turns on Hyphenation again when the command is completed.

Ignore Word	Wrap the entire word to the next line.

See Also

Hyphenation

Hyphenation (File Preferences)

Other Codes


POSTNET Bar Code

Layout, Envelope, Options, Include USPS POSTNET Bar Code

Insert, Other, Bar Code

Purpose

Use this feature to add a POSTNET bar code to the mailing address on your envelopes, letters, or labels.

Steps

To create a POSTNET bar code on an envelope,

1	Choose Envelope from the Layout menu.

2	Select an envelope size from the Forms drop-down list.

or... Choose Create New Form to create a new envelope size.

3	Type the return address and mailing address (including the ZIP Code, ZIP + 4 Code, or DPBC).

4	Choose Options, select Include USPS POSTNET bar code, then choose OK.

The ZIP Code, ZIP + 4 Code, or DPBC in the mailing address text box is automatically inserted into the POSTNET bar code text box.

5	Choose Print Envelope to print the envelope, then return to your document.

or... Choose Append to Doc to insert the address information, along with the bar code, at the end of your document.

To create a POSTNET bar code on a line of text,

1	Place the insertion point where you want the bar code to appear in your document.

2	Choose Other from the Insert menu, then choose Bar Code.

3	Type a ZIP Code, ZIP + 4 Code, or a DPBC in the Bar Code Digits text box.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Envelope


Power Bar Preferences

File, Preferences, Power Bar

Purpose

Use Power Bar Preferences to edit and customize the Power Bar with those items you use most in your word processing tasks.

Any changes you make to the Power Bar remain in effect until you edit the Power Bar again.

Steps

To display the Power Bar Preferences dialog box,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the Power Bar icon.

You can also place the mouse pointer anywhere on the Power Bar, click the right mouse button, then select Preferences.

2	Add, delete, or move items and separators by following the appropriate steps below.

To add an item,

1	Select a Power Bar item in the Items list box.

2	Add, delete, or move other items and separators.

or... Choose OK and Close.

To delete an item,

1	Deselect Power Bar items in the Items list box.

or... Place the mouse pointer on an item, then drag it off the Power Bar.

2	Add, delete, or move other items and separators.

or... Choose OK and Close.

To move an item,

1	Place the pointer on an item, then drag it to a new location on the Power Bar.

2	Add, delete, or move other items and separators.

or... Choose OK and Close.

To add a separator,

1	Drag a separator from the Separators box, then position it between two items on the Power Bar.

2	Add, delete, or move other separators and items.

or... Choose OK and Close.

To delete a separator,

1	Place the mouse pointer on a separator, then drag it off the Power Bar.

2	Add, delete, or move other separators and items.

or... Choose OK and Close.

To move a separator,

1	Place the mouse pointer on a separator, then drag it to a new location on the Power Bar.

2	Add, delete, or move other spaces and items.

or... Choose OK and Close.


Preferences

File, Preferences

Purpose

Use Preferences to set options that are in effect each time you start WordPerfect.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu.

2	Choose from the following options:

Display Preferences

Environment Preferences

File Preferences

Document Summary Preferences

Button Bar/Keyboard/Menu Bar Preferences

Power Bar Preferences

Status Bar Preferences

Writing Tools Preferences

Print Preferences

Import Preferences


  Print

File, Print

Purpose

Use Print to print the documents you create with WordPerfect.

Steps

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

You can also click [image] on the Power Bar.

2	Make sure the printer you want to use is listed in the Current Printer group box.

3	Specify the portion of the document you want to print:

Option	Lets You

Full Document	Print the entire document.

Current Page	Print the page where the insertion point is located.

Multiple Pages	Print specific pages, secondary pages, chapters, or volumes.

Selected Text	Print the selected text.

Document Summary	Print the document summary only.

Document on Disk	Print a document stored on a hard disk, floppy disk, or network drive without opening it in the document window.

4	Specify the number of copies, how copies are generated, print quality, print color, and whether graphics are printed.

5	Choose Print.

See Also

Add Printer

Document on Disk

Multiple Pages

Print Output Filename

Print Output Options

Printer Command

Printer Information

Printer Setup

Select Printer


Binding Options

Layout, Page, Binding

Purpose

Use Binding Options to create additional space for binding by shifting text away from the bound edge of the page.

Steps

1	Choose Page from the Layout menu, then choose Binding.

2	Select the edge from which the text will be shifted (Left, Right, Top, or Bottom).

3	Specify the amount of space that you want to shift the text in the Amount text box.

4	Select one of the Duplexing options (if the selected printer supports duplexing).

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Paper Size

Paragraph Format

Print


Printer Command

Layout, Typesetting, Printer Command

Purpose

Use Printer Command to insert commands that take advantage of the special functions of your printer.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want to insert the printer command.

2	Choose Typesetting from the Layout menu, then choose Printer Command.

3	In the Command text box, type the printer command you want to insert into your document.

or...  In the Printer Command Filename text box, type the name of the file containing the printer commands you want to insert (consult your printer manual for printer commands).

Type printer commands in the syntax they appear in your printer manual, then enclose them in a pair of angle brackets < >.

4	If you want to insert a code that pauses the printer at the current insertion point position, select Pause Printer.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Print

Printer Setup


  Brightness (Image)

Graphics, Edit Box, Tools, Brightness

Purpose

Use this feature to adjust the brightness (or saturation) of a color or black and white image in a graphics box.

Steps

To adjust image brightness,

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or...  Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

3	Click [image], then select the brightness you want.

To specify a brightness value,

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or...  Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

3	Click [image], then select Color Attributes.

4	Specify a brightness value from either the Brightness pop-up palette or the Brightness text box.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Black and White Threshold (Image)

Contrast (Image)

Fill Attributes (Image)

Image Settings

Invert (Image)

Mirror (Image)

Move (Image)

Reset All (Image)

Rotate (Image)

WP Draw

Zoom (Image)


Printer Information

File, Select Printer, Info

Purpose

Use Printer Information to display information about the WordPerfect-driven printer that is currently highlighted.  You can also view information about the sheet feeder, if your printer supports one.

Steps

To view information about a WordPerfect-driven printer,

1	Choose Select Printer from the File menu.

2	Choose Info.

To view information about a Windows-driven printer,

1	Choose Select Printer from the File menu, then choose Setup.

2	Choose About.

See Also

Print

Print Preferences

Select Sheet Feeder


Document/Printer Initial Font

File, Select Printer, Initial Font

Layout, Document, Initial Font

Purpose

Use Printer Initial Font to specify a font that will be used for all documents you create with the selected printer.  Use Document Initial Font to specify a font that will override the Printer Initial Font for a single document only.

Steps

To specify the font for the current printer,

1	Choose Select Printer from the File menu.

2	Select the printer you want to use, then choose Initial Font.

3	Select the Font Face, Size, and Style you want.

4	Choose OK.

The font specifications you make in the Printer Initial Font dialog box will be in effect for all documents you create, unless you insert font codes in a document using either the Font dialog box or the Document Initial Font dialog box.

To specify a font for a single document,

1	Choose Document from the Layout menu, then choose Initial Font.

2	Select the Font Face, Size, and Style you want.

3	Choose OK.

The font specifications you make in the Document Initial Font dialog box will be in effect for the current document only.

See Also

Edit Printer/Document Font Mapping

Font

Select Printer


Print Output Filename

File, Print, Select, Setup, OK, Close, Print

Purpose

Use Print Output Filename to rename the output file for each document you print.

Steps

1	Choose Print from the File menu, then choose Select.

2	Make sure you have a WordPerfect printer selected, then choose Setup.

3	Select File from the Port drop-down list.

4	Select Prompt for Filename.

5	Choose OK, then Close.

6	Choose Print.

7	Enter a filename, then choose OK.

You should give the output file a different name than the original document.  Otherwise, you may overwrite the original document.


Print Output Options

File, Print, Options

Purpose

Use Print Output Options to specify document formatting options and how you want multiple copies of your document to print.

Steps

1	Choose Print from the File menu.

2	Choose Options from the Print dialog box.

3	Select any of the following options:

Option	Lets You

Print Document Summary	Print a document summary with your document.

Booklet Printing	Automatically arrange and print the pages so that they print both front and back, as a booklet.

Print in Reverse Order	Print the pages in descending order (Back to Front) beginning with the last page.

Print Odd/Even Pages	Print only the odd-numbered pages, only the even-numbered pages, or both.

Output Bin Options	Specify how the copies will come out of the printer.

4	Choose OK, then choose Print.

See Also

Document Summary

Subdivide Page


Print Preferences

File, Preferences, Print

Purpose

Use Print Preferences to designate default print settings for your documents.

These print settings remain in effect each time you print until you change them.

Steps

To change the Size Attribute Ratio,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the Print icon.

2	Specify the percentage of normal-sized text you want for each Size Attribute.

3	Choose OK.

To specify the number of copies to print,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the Print icon.

2	Specify the number of copies you want to print.

3	Specify whether you want the multiple copies generated by WordPerfect or the printer.

4	Choose OK.

To change the Document Settings,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the Print icon.

2	Specify the print quality for text and graphics within your document.

3	Select Full Color to print in color.

or...  Select Black to print in black ink.

4	Select Do Not Print Graphics if you do not want to print graphics.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Font

Print


Quick Data Entry

Tools, Merge, Data, OK, OK

Purpose

Use Quick Data Entry to quickly enter or edit records in a data file or change field names.

Steps

1	Create or retrieve a data file.

2	Choose Quick Entry from the Merge Data Feature Bar.

3	Delete and type information in the available fields.

4	Use the following options as you create or edit fields and records:

Option	Lets You

Next Field	Move to the next field.

Previous Field	Move to the previous field.

New Record	Create a new record.

Delete Record	Delete the current record.

Find	Search for a record using Find.

Field Names	Edit or create field names.

First, Previous, Next, Last	Move between records.

5	Choose Close.

See Also

Create Data File

Edit Field Names

Find

Go to Data

Merge Data File Feature Bar


QuickFormat (Text)

Layout, QuickFormat

Purpose

Use QuickFormat to copy fonts, attributes, and paragraph styles from one area of text to another.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in the paragraph that has the format you want to copy.

2	Choose QuickFormat from the Layout menu to turn on the feature.

3	Specify whether you want to copy the fonts and attributes, the paragraph styles, or both.

4	With the special mouse pointer, drag over any text that you want to give the new format.

5	Choose QuickFormat from the Layout menu to turn off the feature.

See Also

Cut, Copy, Paste

Font

Paragraph Format


  Reset All (Image)

Graphics, Edit Box, Tools, Reset All

Purpose

Use this feature to restore an image to the settings specified in the graphics box style you are using.

When you reset the image, you remove any attributes, color adjustments, fills, or positioning options you assigned to it using the Image Tools palette.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or...  Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

3	Click [image].

See Also

Black and White Threshold (Image)

Brightness (Image)

Contrast (Image)

Fill Attributes (Image)

Image Settings

Invert (Image)

Mirror (Image)

Move (Image)

Rotate (Image)

WP Draw

Zoom (Image)


  Fill Attributes (Image)

Graphics, Edit Box, Tools, Fill Attributes

Purpose

Use this feature to make an image transparent so the background shows through the image or to convert the image to an outline with a white fill.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or...  Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

3	Click [image], then select a fill attribute.

or...  Click [image], select Fill Attributes, select the fill attribute you want, then choose OK.

See Also

Black and White Threshold (Image)

Brightness (Image)

Contrast (Image)

Image Settings

Invert (Image)

Mirror (Image)

Move (Image)

Reset All (Image)

Rotate (Image)

WP Draw

Zoom (Image)


Redline Method

Layout, Document, Redline Method

Purpose

Use Redline Method to change the printed appearance of Redline text.

Steps

1	Choose Document from the Layout menu, then choose Redline Method.

2	Choose any of the following options:

Option	Lets You
Printer Dependent	Use the redlining method specific to your printer (usually a shaded background).
Mark Left Margin/Mark Right Margin	Use a character (normally a vertical bar) to mark redlined text in the left margin or right margin.
Mark Alternating Margins	Mark redlined text in the left margin for even-numbered pages and in the right margin for odd-numbered pages.
3	If you choose Mark Left Margin, Mark Right Margin, or Mark Alternating Margins and you want to mark redline text with a character other than a vertical bar (|), type a new character in the Redline Character text box.

You can press Ctrl+w to open the WordPerfect Characters dialog box, then insert a special character.  See Characters if you need help using this dialog box.

4	If you want to use the selected method as the default redline method every time you use WordPerfect, choose Use as Default.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Compare Document

Font

WordPerfect Characters


Remove Markings (Compare Document)

File, Compare Document, Remove Markings

Purpose

Use Remove Markings to remove redline markings and strikeout text all at once.

Steps

1	Choose Compare Document from the File menu, then choose Remove Markings.

2	If you want to return the document to the way it was before you compared it, select Remove Redline Markings and Strikeout Text.

or...  If you want to keep the markings for added text but remove all other text and markings inserted by the comparison, select Remove Strikeout Text Only.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Compare Document


Repeat

Edit, Repeat

Purpose

Use Repeat to save time when you need to type a repetitive keystroke or choose the same command several times.

Steps

To repeat a task,

1	Place the insertion point where you want the repeated action to begin.

2	Choose Repeat from the Edit menu.

The number in the text box specifies how many times the keystroke, command, or macro is repeated.

3	In the Number of Times to Repeat Next Action text box, specify the number of times you want the action to be repeated, then choose OK.

or...  Choose OK to use the default number (8).

4	Choose a command or macro, or press the keystroke that you want to repeat.

To change the default repeat number,

1	Choose Repeat from the Edit menu.

2	Specify a new number, then choose Use as Default.

See Also

Delete

Macros

Select


Retrieve List Definitions

Tools, List or Table of Authorities, Define, Retrieve

Purpose

Use Retrieve List Definition to retrieve definitions for lists or table of authorities sections from a document on disk into the current document.

Steps

1	Choose List or Table of Authorities from the Tools menu.

2	Choose Define, then choose Retrieve.

3	Type the filename of a document that has definitions that you want, or click the list button, select a file, then choose OK.

4	Select the definitions you want, then choose OK.

See Also

Define List or Table of Authorities


Rotate Text

Graphics, Edit Box, Content, Rotate Text

Purpose

Use Rotate Text to turn text 90, 180, or 270 degrees inside a graphics box.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box containing text.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Content.

or... Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Content from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then select Content.

3	Select an angle of rotation from the Rotate Text group box, then choose OK.

4	Choose Close from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box Feature Bar and return to your document.

See Also

Create Text Box

Custom Box


Save Color Palette

Layout, Font, Palette, Save As

Purpose

Use Save Color Palette to name and save a color palette you create.

Steps

1	Choose Font from the Layout menu, then choose Palette.

2	Choose Save As.

3	Type a name for the palette in the Name text box.

4	Specify a filename in the Filename text box, then choose OK.

See Also

Blend Colors

Color Model

Color Wheel

Copy/Paste Colors

Default Color Palette

Invert Colors

Open Color Palette

Rainbow Colors


  Save (Selected Text)

File, Save or Save As

Purpose

Use Save to save selected text in a new document or replace the current document with the selected text.

Steps

1	Select the text you want to save, then choose Save or Save As from the File menu.

You can also click [image] on the Power Bar.

2	If you want to save only the selected text, choose Selected Text.

or...  If you want to save the entire document, choose Entire File.

3	Choose OK.

4	Type a filename for the file, then choose OK.

See Also

Directory Dialog Box (Save As)

QuickList


Find Text

Edit, Find

Purpose

Use Find to search for words, phrases, or codes in your document.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want the search to begin.

2	Choose Find from the Edit menu.

3	To find a word or phrase, type the text you want to find in the Find text box.

4	To find any code, choose Codes from the Match menu, select the code, choose Insert, then choose Close.

or... To find a specific code, choose Specific Codes from the Type menu, select the code, choose OK, then enter a specific value.

For more information, choose from the following topics:

Find Text Action Options

Find and Replace Text Options

Match Whole Word, Case, Font, or Code

5	Choose Find Next to find the word, phrase, or code the next time it appears after the insertion point.

or... Choose Find Prev to find the word, phrase, or code if it appears before the insertion point.

See Also

Codes

Find and Replace Text

Specific Codes


Match Whole Word, Case, Font, or Code

Edit, Find or Replace, Match, Whole Words or Case or Font or Codes

Purpose

Use Match to match whole words, case, font type and size, and codes.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want the search to begin.

2	Choose Find from the Edit menu.

3	Type the text you want to find in the Find text box.

4	Select Match, then choose from the following options:

Option	Lets You

Whole Word	Find whole words only.  For example, to find the word "low," choose this option.  Otherwise, words that have "low" in them, such as "allow" and "lower," will also be found.

Case	Specify an exact match for the word you want to find.  For example, when this option is selected, "FREE" will find only "FREE," not "free."

Font	Find text in a specific font type or size including attributes.  For example, you could find every instance of the word "hello" that is bolded 14 point text in a Courier font.

Codes	Find codes such as Bot Mar (Bottom Margin), Bold, Italics, and Calc Col (Calculate Column).

See Also

Find Text

Find and Replace Text


Select Counter

Graphics, Edit Box, Caption, Change

Purpose

Use Select Counter to change the counter style used for any graphics box style in your document.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box in your document.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Caption.

or... Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Caption from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then select Caption.

3	Choose Change from the Caption Numbering and Styles group box.

4	Select a counter style from the Counters list box, then choose Select.

5	Choose OK.

6	Choose Close on the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box Feature Bar and return to your document.

See Also

Counter Numbering


Select Fonts

File, Select Printer, Setup, Cartridges/Fonts

File, Print, Select, Setup, Cartridges/Fonts

Purpose

Use Select Fonts to add fonts to your list of available fonts.  You can supplement your printer's built-in fonts by purchasing cartridges, soft fonts, or print wheels, depending on the type of printer you are using.

This information explains how to use supplemental fonts with WordPerfect printer drivers.  For information about supplementing the fonts of Windows printer drivers, refer to the Windows documentation or use the online Help system available on each of the Windows dialog boxes.

Steps

1	Choose Select Printer from the File menu.

2	Highlight the WordPerfect printer you want to use, then choose Setup.

3	Choose Cartridges/Fonts.

4	Click the Font Source text box, then select the font source you want to use (Cartridge, Soft Font, or Print Wheel).

5	If you choose Soft Font as your font source, select the Font Group that contains the fonts you want.

6	Mark the fonts you want to make available with an asterisk (*) or with a plus sign (+).

If you have pre-loaded a supplemental font, mark it with an asterisk (*).  If you need to conserve the amount of space available (such as printer memory in the case of soft fonts), mark a soft font with a plus sign (+).

7	If you select Soft Fonts, confirm the path listed in the Current Soft Font Directory text box, or specify a new directory where you want the soft fonts stored.

8	Choose OK.

See Also

Font

Font Mapping


Select Printer

File, Select Printer

File, Print, Select

Purpose

Use Select Printer to specify the type of printer driver (supplied by either WordPerfect or Windows) and which specific printer you want to use.

Steps

1	Choose Select Printer from the File menu.

The Select Printer dialog box lists the printers you selected during the installation process, the printers you selected previously for Windows applications, and any printers you have added using Add Printer.

2	Highlight the printer you want to use, then choose Select.

 indicates that it is a WordPerfect-driven printer.   indicates that it is a Windows-driven printer.

If you update or customize a printer .ALL file using the Printer Definition Program, you will need to use the Update option to add the new information to the .PRS file.

See Also

Add Printer

Copy/Create Printer

Delete Printer

Document/Printer Initial Font

Printer Information

Printer Setup


Select Records

Tools, Merge, Merge, Select Records

Purpose

Use Select Records to limit the merge to certain records in the data file.

Steps

1	Choose Merge from the Tools menu, then choose Merge.

2	Specify file locations, then choose Select Records.

3	Select one of the following options:

Specify Conditions

Mark Records

See Also

Perform Merge

Merge


Select Sheet Feeder

File, Select Printer, Setup, Sheet Feeder

File, Print, Select, Setup, Sheet Feeder

Purpose

Use Select Sheet Feeder to manually pick a sheet feeder for the printer you are using.

This feature is available for WordPerfect printer drivers only.

Steps

1	Choose Select Printer from the File menu.

2	Choose Setup, then Sheet Feeder.

3	Highlight the sheet feeder you want, then choose OK.

For information about a particular sheet feeder, highlight the sheet feeder in the Select Sheet Feeder dialog box, then choose Info.

See Also

Printer Information


Set Paragraph Number

Tools, Outline, Options, Set Number

Purpose

Use Set Paragraph Number to start renumbering an outline at any level, with any number.

This is useful if you want to turn Outline on and off throughout the document.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want to start renumbering.

2	If the Outline Feature Bar is not displayed, choose Outline from the Tools menu.

3	Choose Set Number from the Options drop-down list.

4	Type the number you want to start with in the Paragraph Number text box, then choose OK.

You must type Arabic numerals separated by commas, spaces, or periods.  For example, if you want to start at V.B.3, type 5.2.3.

See Also

Define Outline

Edit Outline Definition

Change Outline Level

Outline Feature Bar


Set Value/Number Method (Counter)

Insert, Other, Counter, Value

Purpose

Use Set Value/Number Method to change the value or numbering method of a counter.

Steps

1	Choose Other from the Insert menu, then choose Counter.

2	Select a counter or counter level from the Counter list.

3	Select Value, then specify a new value.

4	To change the numbering method (numbers, letters, Roman numerals), select a method from the Number Method pop-up list.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Counter Numbering

Create or Edit Counter Definition


File Management (def)
File Management

WPWin offers a complete solution to document management.  With the File Open dialog box, you can retrieve, copy, move, rename, or view a document (including graphics) in one location.  You'll also find QuickList an especially helpful feature when you want to access directories with long path names.  And when you need to locate information fast, let QuickFinder do the searching.  QuickFinder will list the files containing the word or phrase you specified--you'll never again lose time hunting for a file.

How to Use It


Sort

Tools, Sort

Purpose

Use Sort to arrange text alphabetically or numerically or to extract specific information from a list.

Steps

1	Choose Sort from the Tools menu.

2	Specify the Input File and Output File of the sorted text.

If you are sorting a file on disk, type the filename or click the list button to select the input file.

3	Choose from the following options:

Sort By

Key Definitions

Select Records

4	Choose OK.


Sound Clips

Insert, Sound

Purpose

Use Sound Clips to add and play sound clips in your document.

Steps

To add a sound clip to your document

1	Choose Sound from the Insert menu.

2	Choose Insert.

3	Specify the sound clip you want, then choose OK.

To record a sound clip,

1	Choose Sound from the Insert menu.

2	Choose Record, which launches the Windows Sound Recorder.  Refer to Windows Help while using the Sound Recorder.

To display the Sound Clip Feature Bar,

1	Choose Sound from the Insert menu.

2	Choose Transcribe.

To play a sound clip,

1	Choose Sound from the Insert menu.

2	Select a sound clip from the Sound Clips in Document list.

3	Choose Play.

You can play, rewind, stop, or fast forward the sound clip.

You can also play a sound clip from the controls on the Sound Clip Feature Bar or by simply clicking the sound clip icon.

See Also

Insert or Edit Sound Clip

Sound Transcribe Feature Bar


Specific Codes

Edit, Find or Replace, Type, Specific Codes

Purpose

Use Specific Codes to find and replace specific codes in your document.

Steps

To find a specific code,

1	Choose Find from the Edit menu.

2	Choose Specific Codes from the Type menu, select the code, choose OK, then enter a specific value.

To find and replace a specific code,

1	Choose Replace from the Edit menu.

2	Choose Specific Codes from the Type menu, select the specific code, choose OK, then enter a specific value in the Find text box.

3	Click the Replace With text box, then enter a specific value.

4	Select any of the other options you want to use.

5	Choose one of the following options:

Option	What It Does

Find 	Finds the search text the first time it appears.

Replace	Replaces the search text the first time it appears, then continues to look for the search text if it is selected again.

Replace All	Automatically replaces the text every time it appears.

Replace with Nothing	Eliminates the code you have specified by replacing it with nothing.

See Also

Find and Replace Text Options

Find and Replace Text Direction

Codes


Split Cell

Table, Split, Cell

Purpose

Use Split Cell to divide the current cell or a selection of cells.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in the cell that you want to divide.

or... If you want to split several cells at the same time, select them.

2	Choose Split from the Table menu, then choose Cell.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Split Cell.

3	Choose Columns or Rows.

4	Specify the number of columns or rows into which you want to divide the cells, then choose OK.

See Also

Join Cell/Table

Split Table


Status Bar Options

File, Preferences, Status Bar, Options

Purpose

Use Status Bar Options to specify how you want the options to appear.  You can specify a font, a font size, and whether text is bolded.  You can also specify whether items appear evenly spaced, flat, inset, or raised.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the Status Bar icon.

2	Select any of the Status Bar Items you want to include on your Status Bar.

3	Choose Options, then select the text options you want to use.

4	Choose OK, then choose Close.

See Also

Status Bar Preferences


Status Bar Preferences

File, Preferences, Status Bar

Purpose

Use Status Bar Preferences to customize the information displayed on the Status Bar.  These options stay in place until you change them again.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the Status Bar icon.

2	Select any of the Status Bar Items you want to have appear on your Status Bar.

3	While the Status Bar Preferences dialog box is open, move items on the Status Bar by dragging them to a new position, then choose OK.

For more information, choose the following topic:

Status Bar Options

See Also

Display Preferences

View Modes


Style List

Layout, Styles

Tools, Index, Define, Change

Tools, List or Table of Authorities, Define, Create, Change

Tools, Table of Contents, Define, Styles

Purpose

Use Styles to easily format your documents and templates so they have a consistent, professional look.

Steps

1	If you are applying a paragraph style, place the insertion point anywhere in the paragraph you want the style to affect.

or...  If you are applying a character style, select the text you want to format using the style.

or...  If you are applying an open style, place the insertion point where you want the style to take effect.

2	Using one of the routes above ( [image]), display the dialog box that lists the styles you want to use.

3	Double-click the style you want to use.

You can also use one of the following options to create, edit, copy, delete, reset, retrieve, or save styles.

Create

Edit

Options

See Also

File Preferences

Quick Create (Style)

Setup (Styles)

Template


Retrieve/Save Styles

Layout, Styles, Options, Retrieve or Save As

Tools, Outline, Options, Define Outline, Options, Retrieve or Save As

Purpose

Use this feature to retrieve or save a styles file.

Styles files saved with the current document can be retrieved into other documents.

Steps

To retrieve a styles file,

1	Use one of the routes above ( [image]) to display the Retrieve Styles From or the Retrieve Outline Definition From dialog box.

2	Specify the filename of the styles file or outline definition containing the styles you want.

You can also choose it using the list button at the end of the Filename text box.

3	Specify which styles you want to retrieve by selecting an option under Style Type.

4	Choose OK.

To save a styles file,

1	Use one of the routes above ( [image]), then choose Save As from the Options drop-down list.

2	Specify a path (if necessary) and filename for the list of styles.

It is a good idea to save the file with a descriptive extension, such as .STY.

You can choose a directory for the file using the list button at the end of the Filename text box.

If you do not specify a directory, the styles are saved in one of the following directories:

Styles From	Are Saved In
Your document or the default template (specified in File Preferences)	The directory containing the default template
The supplementary template (specified in File Preferences)	The directory containing the supplementary template
If you have not specified a default or supplementary template, WordPerfect saves the styles where your Windows files are stored.

3	Specify which styles you want to save by selecting an option under Style Type.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Graphic Styles

Style List

Styles Editor

Template


Copy Styles

Layout, Styles, Options, Copy

Tools, Outline, Options, Define Outline, Options, Copy

Purpose

Use Copy Styles to copy a selected style from the current document or template to your default or supplemental template.

Steps

1	Using one of the routes above ( [image]), display the Styles Copy or Outline Define Copy dialog box.

2	Choose a Copy To option to indicate where you want to copy the style or definition, then choose OK.

See Also

File Preferences

Graphic Styles

Style List

Styles Editor

Template


Delete Styles

Layout, Styles, Options, Delete

Tools, Outline, Options, Define Outline, Options, Delete

Purpose

Use Delete Styles to delete a selected style from the entire document.

To remove a style from a section of text, drag the style out of Reveal Codes.

Steps

1	Using one of the routes above ( [image]), display the Delete Styles dialog box.

2	If you want to delete all occurrences of the style from the document, select Include Codes, then choose OK.

Note that you cannot delete a system style.

See Also

File Preferences

Reveal Codes

Style List

Styles Editor

Template


Styles Editor

Layout, Styles, Create or Edit

Tools, Outline, Options, Define Outline, Create or Edit, Create Style

Layout, Document, Initial Codes Style

Purpose

Use the Styles Editor to create or edit a style.

Steps

1	Using one of the routes above ( [image]), open the Styles Editor dialog box.

2	If necessary, type a name for the style in the Style Name text box.

You may want to avoid using names that are already used for other styles in other templates and documents.

3	Choose an option from the Type pop-up list:

Option	What It Does

Character	Affects selected text or text you are about to type.

Paragraph	Affects paragraph containing the insertion point or selected text.

Document	Affects all text from the insertion point to the end of the document.

If you want to specify what the Enter key does in a paragraph or character style you are creating, choose one of the following options:

To Do This	You Can
Function normally (insert a hard return without turning off the style)	Deselect the Enter Key Will Chain To option (available only for character styles)
Move the insertion point past the style and turn on the style again	Choose <Same Style> from the drop-down list; useful for bulleted lists and paragraphs with the first line indented.
Move the insertion point past the style	Choose <None> from the drop-down list; useful for headings and titles.
Move the insertion point past the style, then turn on another style	Choose the style you want to turn on from the drop-down list.
4	Insert codes and text in the Contents box.  You can choose items from the Styles Editor menu, press keystrokes, and even type text.

If you want the Contents box to display the codes you are inserting, make sure the Reveal Codes option is selected.

5	If you are creating a paragraph or character style and you want certain codes to take effect when the style ends, select Show Off Codes, then insert those codes below the comment.

6	Choose OK.

7	If you want to apply your new style to selected text or text you are about to type, double-click the style.  If not, choose Close.

See Also

Copy Styles

Delete Styles

File Preferences

Graphic Styles

Quick Create (Style)

Retrieve/Save Styles

Setup (Styles)

Style List

Template


Setup (Styles)

Layout, Styles, Options, Setup

Tools, Outline, Options, Define Outline, Options, Setup

Purpose

Use Setup to list a different set of styles or indicate where you want to save a style you are creating or editing.

Steps

1	Using one of the routes above ( [image]), display the Setup dialog box.

2	If you want to list the system styles or the styles in your default or supplemental template, select an option under Display Styles From.

or...  If you want to save a style you are creating or editing in your default or supplemental template, select an option under Default Location.

You must specify your default and supplemental templates in File Preferences before you can access them.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

File Preferences

Style List

Styles Editor

Template


Subdivide Page

Layout, Page, Subdivide Page

Purpose

Use Subdivide Page (instead of the Labels feature) to create items such as programs, booklets, cards, and tickets.

Subdivide Page lets you create several logical pages on one physical page.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point on the first page that you want to subdivide.

2	Choose Page from the Layout menu, then choose Subdivide Page.

3	Specify the number of columns and rows of logical pages.

4	Choose OK.

5	Use the following keystrokes as you type in logical pages:

Keystroke	Lets You

Ctrl+Enter	End the text you are typing on the current logical page and move to the next.

Enter	End a line of text within a logical page.

Alt+PgDn or Alt+PgUp	Move to the next or previous logical page.

Ctrl+G 	Move to a specific logical page.

See Also

Labels

Paper Size

Print as Booklet


Suppress

Layout, Page, Suppress

Purpose

Use Suppress to prevent a page number, header, footer, or watermark from appearing on the current page.  If you want to move codes down a specified number of pages before they take effect, use Delay Codes.

Steps

1	Move the insertion point to the page where you want to suppress a page number, header, footer, or watermark.

2	Choose Page from the Layout menu, then choose Suppress.

3	Select the items you want to suppress.

or...  Choose All to select all the items.

4	Instead of suppressing a page number, you can select Print Page Number at Bottom Center on Current Page.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Delay Codes

Header/Footers

Page Numbering

Watermark


Table Cut/Copy

Edit, Cut or Copy

Purpose

Use Table Cut/Copy to move or copy rows, columns, cells, or selections from one location in a table to another location in the same table, to a location in a different table, or to transfer text between tables and your document.

If you are cutting and pasting or copying between tables, table formatting (such as line and fill styles, number types, and text appearance) is also pasted or copied.

Steps

1	Select the cells, rows, columns, or table contents you want to cut and paste or copy.

2	Choose Cut from the Edit menu to move the selection.

or... Choose Copy from the Edit menu to copy the selection.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Cut or Copy.

3	Choose Selection to cut or copy a selection.

or... Select Row or Column to cut or copy the row(s) or column(s).

or... If you are copying one cell, select Cell, then select To Cell to copy to another cell or select Down or Right, then specify how many cells down or to the right you want to copy the cell.

4	Choose OK.

5	Move the insertion point to the place where you want to paste or copy the selection, row, column, or cell.

6	If you are moving or copying, choose Paste from the Edit menu.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Paste.

See Also

Copy Formula (Table)


Table Functions

Table, Formula Bar, Functions

Purpose

Use Table Functions on the Table Formula Feature Bar to select and insert functions into the Formula Edit text box.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in the cell where you want to insert a formula.

or...Place the insertion point in a floating cell.

2	If the Feature Bar is not already displayed, choose Formula Bar from the Table menu.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Formula Bar.

3	Choose Functions from the Feature Bar.

4	Select the function you want.

You can begin typing the first few letters of a function to quickly select it.

5	Double-click the function or choose Insert.

6	Replace the argument keywords with data, names, or cell or range addresses, or nest other functions within the function.  You can also include other formula functions outside of the function.

7	Click [image] to cancel the changes you have made to the function and turn off Formula Edit mode.

or... Click [image] to accept and insert the function into the table or floating cell and turn off Formula Edit mode.

See Also

Cell Formula Entry


Table Lines/Fill

Table, Lines/Fill

Purpose

Use Table Lines/Fill to select, create, and edit a table's lines, border, and fill styles.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point inside a table in which you want to change lines, fill, or border styles.

or... Select the cells that contain the lines you want to change.

2	Choose Lines/Fill from the Table menu.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Lines/Fill.

3	Choose from the following options:

Current Cell or Selection (Table)

Table

Table Line Settings

See Also

Select Cell


Edit (Table of Authorities) Full Form

Tools, Table of Authorities, Edit Full Form

Purpose

Use Edit (Table of Authorities) Full Form to edit the full form of an authority.

Steps

1	Choose Table of Authorities from the Tools menu.

2	Choose Edit Full Form from the Table of Authorities Feature Bar.

3	Select the section you want to define, then choose OK.

See Also

Table of Authorities Full Form Feature Bar


List or Table of Authorities Style

Tools, List or Table of Authorities, Define, Create or Edit, Change

Purpose

Use List or Table of Authorities Style to change the style used for list and table of authorities entries.

Steps

To replace the style with an existing style,

1	Choose List or Table of Authorities from the Tools menu, then choose Define.

2	Choose Create or Edit, then choose Change.

3	Highlight a style from the Styles list, then choose Select.

To create a style,

1	Choose List or Table of Authorities from the Tools menu, then choose Define.

2	Choose Create, then choose Change.

3	Choose Create, create the style, then choose OK.

To edit a style,

1	Choose List or Table of Authorities from the Tools menu, then choose Define.

2	Choose Edit, then choose Change.

3	Choose Edit, edit the style, then choose OK.

See Also

Define List or Table of Authorities

Styles Editor


Table Line Settings

Table, Lines/Fill, Table, Use as Default

Purpose

Use Table Line Settings to save the table line and border settings you have created for use in other tables in the current document or for tables you create during subsequent WordPerfect sessions.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in a table.

2	Choose Lines/Fill from the Table menu.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Lines/Fill.

3	Select Table.

4	Choose Use as Default.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Current Cell or Selection

Table

Table Lines/Fill


  Tab Set

Layout, Line, Tab Set

Purpose

Use Tab Set to change tab settings in your document.  Tab settings determine where the insertion point stops when you press Tab or Back Tab.

To use the Ruler Bar to set tabs, see Set Tabs on the Ruler.  To set hard tabs, see Other Codes.

Steps

1	Choose Line from the Layout menu, then choose Tab Set.

With the Ruler Bar on, you can also double-click [image] on the Power Bar.

2	To clear a tab setting, specify the setting in the Position text box, then choose Clear.

or...  To delete all tab settings, choose Clear All.

3	Choose how you want to measure tabs, from the Left Margin (Relative) or from the Left Edge of Paper (Absolute).

4	Select a tab type from the Type drop-down list:

Option	What It Does

Left, Dot Left	Tab remains left; text moves right.

Center, Dot Center	Text you type centers around the tab.

Right, Dot Right	Tab remains right; text moves left.

Decimal, Dot Decimal	Text inserts before and after a decimal tab character.

Dot tabs include dot leaders (a row of dots between the insertion point and the next tab setting).

5	Specify a tab setting in the Position text box, then choose Set.

or...  Specify the beginning tab in the Position text box, select Repeat Every, then specify the distance you want between tabs.

6	If you want to return to default tab settings, choose Default.

7	Choose OK.

See Also

Align Character

Decimal Tabs

Dot Leader Character


Delete Table

Purpose

Use Delete Table to delete the entire table (structure and contents), the contents only, or the structure only.

You can also use Delete Table to convert a table into a data text file, where the first row is converted to the first record or to a group of field names.

Steps

1	Select the entire table.

2	Press Delete or Backspace.

3	Select Entire Table, Table Contents, or Table Structure.

or... If you want the first row to be converted to a record, select Convert to Merge Data File.

or... If you want the first row to be converted to field names, select Convert to Merge Data File (first row becomes field names).

4	Choose OK.

If you delete table structure, you may need to insert new tab stops to align columns if you want to keep the text in tabular columns.

See Also

Delete (Table)

Merge


Format

Table, Format

Purpose

Use Format to customize the text in your table.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point in the cell, column, or row you want to format.

or... Select the cells, columns, or rows you want to format.

2	Choose Format from the Table menu.

You can also click the right mouse button, then choose Format.

3	Select Cell, Column, Row, or Table, then choose from the following options:

Format Cell

Format Column (Table)

Format Row

Format Table


Template Feature Bar

File, Template, Options, Create Template or Edit Template

Purpose

Use the Template Feature Bar to create or edit a template.

Steps

1	Choose Template from the File menu.

2	If you are creating a template, choose Create Template from the Options drop-down list.

or...  If you are editing a template, select that template, then choose Edit Template from the Options drop-down list.

3	If you are creating a template, type a name for it.  If you want to, type a description.  If you want to base your new template on an existing template, choose that template from the Name drop-down list under Template to Base On.  Choosing Objects shows you everything contained in the existing template.  Choose OK when you are ready to create your template.

4	Insert any information.  You can also use the buttons on the Template Feature Bar to add or copy objects to the template.

Option	Lets You

Create Object	Create styles, macros, abbreviations, Button Bars, keyboards, or menu bars for the template.

Copy/Remove Object	Copy and rename styles, abbreviations, Button Bars, keyboards, and menu bars from other templates; lets you copy and embed macros from disk.

Associate	Associate Button Bars, menu bars, or keyboards with various editing windows in the template (Equation Editor, Headers, and so on); also lets you specify macro triggers, which play a specified macro at a particular point in time as you use the template (Pre Open, Post Open, Pre Print, and so on).

Description	Read, edit, or create the description of the current template.

Initial Style	Specify an initial codes style for the template.

Exit Template	Save your changes to the template and return to the normal document window.

5	Choose Exit Template from the Feature Bar when you are finished, then choose Yes to save the template.

See Also

Abbreviations

Button Bar/Keyboard/Menu Bar Preferences

File Preferences

Macros

Styles

Template


    Mirror (Image)

Graphics, Edit Box, Tools, Flip Vertical or Flip Horizontal

Purpose

Use this feature to flip an image on its vertical axis or horizontal axis.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Tools.

or...  Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Tools from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

3	Click [image] to flip the image on its vertical axis.

or...  Click [image] to flip the image on its horizontal axis.

See Also

Black and White Threshold (Image)

Brightness (Image)

Contrast (Image)

Fill Attributes (Image)

Image Settings

Invert (Image)

Move (Image)

Reset All (Image)

Rotate (Image)

WP Draw

Zoom (Image)


Insert Merge Code Parameters

Merge Feature Bar, Merge Codes, Insert

Purpose

Use Insert Merge Code Parameters to enter the correct parameters and arguments as requested by the merge code.

Parameter	What You Enter

(expr)(subexpr)	Number, string, variable, commands, expression, or combination of these

(label)	Unique name

(var)	Unique variable name

(field)	Unique name or field number

(filename)	Filename; should include full path

(macroname)	Unique macro name; may include full path; no .WCM extension is needed

(title)	Title of dialog box

(prompt)(message)	Information you want to display on the screen

(comment)	Description of what the merge does; does not display on screen

See Also

Insert Merge Codes


Graphics and Borders (def)
Graphics and Borders

WPWin provides a variety of graphic images to add interest and appeal to your documents.  They're easy to access, and in-place editing allows you to customize them--all it takes is a few clicks from your mouse.  You can also make your ideas stand out by using borders and fill patterns.  Choose from a limitless combination of designs to make side bars or to highlight important quotes or entire paragraphs.

How to Use It


Text Box Initial Style

Graphics, Custom Box, Styles, Edit, Settings

Purpose

Use Text Box Initial Style to work with and use styles in a document, personal template, or shared template.

Steps

1	Choose Custom Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Styles.

2	Highlight the Text or Table or User or Button box style, then choose Edit.

3	Choose Settings, then choose Change.

4	Choose from the following options:

Styles List

Styles Editor

Template


Palette

Steps

1	Click the icon you want information about.

or...  Press Tab until the icon you want is selected, then press Enter.


Sound Transcribe Feature Bar

Insert, Sound, Transcribe

Purpose

Use the Sound Transcribe Feature Bar to control sound clip playback.

Steps

1	Choose Sound from the Insert menu.

2	Select the sound clip you want, then choose Transcribe.

You can play, replay, rewind, stop, or fast forward the sound clip.

See Also

Insert or Edit Sound Clips

Sound Clips


Undelete

Edit, Undelete

Purpose

Use Undelete to restore any or all of your last three deletions.

You should turn on Reveal Codes if you want to undelete codes.

Steps

1	Choose Undelete from the Edit menu.

2	Choose Restore to restore your last deletion.

or...  Choose Previous or Next to cycle through your last three deletions, then choose Restore when you see the one you want to undelete.

You can use Undelete to move text.  Simply delete the text you want to move, place the insertion point where you want the text, then undelete it.

See Also

Delete (Text)

Reveal Codes

Undo


Update

Insert, Spreadsheet/Database, Update

Purpose

Use Update to update a linked spreadsheet or database manually.

Steps

1	Choose Spreadsheet/Database from the Insert menu, then choose Update.

2	Choose Yes.

See Also

Link Options


View File Location Preferences

File, Preferences, File, View All

Purpose

Use View All to view the directories you have specified for all File Preferences categories.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the File icon.

2	Choose View All.

3	Choose Close to return to the File Preferences dialog box.

See Also

File Preferences


Watermark Feature Bar

Layout, Watermark, Edit

Purpose

Use the Watermark Feature Bar to access options used to create and edit watermarks.  You can also access many functions on the Menu Bar.

Steps

1	While in Page view, move the insertion point to a page where the watermark you want to edit is in effect.

2	Choose Watermark from the Layout menu, select the watermark you want, then choose Edit.

3	Choose from the following Watermark Feature Bar options:

Option	Lets You

Figure	Insert an image to use as a watermark.

File	Insert an existing file.

Placement	Specify the pages in your document where the watermark will appear (odd pages, even pages, or every page).

Next	Move quickly to the next Watermark A or Watermark B used in your document.

Previous	Move quickly to the previous Watermark A or Watermark B used in your document.

Close	Exit the watermark, turn off the display of the Watermark Feature Bar, then return to your document text.

See Also

Watermark


Watermark

Layout, Watermark

Purpose

Use Watermark to add graphics or text behind the printed document text.

Steps

1	In Page view, place the insertion point anywhere in the first paragraph on the page where you want the watermark to begin.

2	Choose Watermark from the Layout menu, then choose Watermark A or Watermark B.

3	Choose Create.

4	Choose Placement from the Watermark Feature Bar, then select the pages where you want the watermark to appear.

5	Choose Figure from the Watermark on the Feature Bar.

6	Specify the path and filename of the image or text file, then choose OK.

or...  Type in the text for the watermark, then choose OK.

7	Choose Close from the Watermark Feature Bar.

See Also

Watermark Feature Bar


Word/Letterspacing

Layout, Typesetting, Word Spacing or Letterspacing

Purpose

Use Word Spacing and Letterspacing to increase or decrease the space between words and letters in your document.

Steps

1	Choose Typesetting from the Layout menu, then choose Word/Letterspacing.

2	Select one of the following options:

Option	Lets You

Normal	Use settings chosen by the font manufacturer.

WordPerfect Optimal	Use settings chosen by WordPerfect Corporation.

Percent of Optimal	Set your own spacing and specify a spacing value and pitch setting.

You can set a spacing value of your own expressed as a percent of the optimal setting.  Numbers less than 100% reduce the amount of space between words and letters, while numbers greater than 100% increase the amount of space.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Automatic Kerning

Baseline Placement for Typesetting

Manual Kerning

Word Spacing Justification Limits


Wrap Text

Graphics, Edit Box, Wrap

Purpose

Use Wrap Text to specify how the document text will flow around a graphics box or follow the contour of an image within the box.

You must remove a border surrounding an image before text can follow the contour of an image.

Steps

1	Select a graphics box containing an image.

2	If the Graphics Box Feature Bar is already displayed, choose Wrap.

or... Choose Edit Box from the Graphics menu, then choose Wrap from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

You can also click the right mouse button on a graphics box, then select Wrap.

3	Select a Wrapping Type option.

You can use the Contour option to change the amount of white space around an image.

4	Select a Wrap Text Around option.

You can use the Largest Side option to make the document text flow on the side of the image that has the most white space.

5	Choose OK, then choose Close from the Graphics Box Feature Bar.

You can also click anywhere in the document window (outside the graphics box) to deactivate the Graphics Box Feature Bar and return to your document.

See Also

Box Position

Space (Customize Border)


Writing Tool Preferences

File, Preferences, Writing Tools

Purpose

Use Writing Tool Preferences to specify the tools (such as Speller, Thesaurus, and Grammatik) that you want to appear on the Tools menu.

Steps

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then choose Writing Tools.

2	Select those tools from the Available Tool Items list box you want to display on the Tools menu.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Grammatik

Speller

Thesaurus

Tools Menu


  Zoom

View, Zoom

Purpose

Use Zoom to specify the size of on-screen text and graphics.

You cannot use Zoom in Two Page view.

Steps

1	Choose Zoom from the View menu.

You can also click [image] on the Power Bar.

2	Specify the zoom percentage you want.

or... Select Margin Width, Page Width, Full Page, or Other.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

 Zoom Equation Display


Zoom Equation Display

Graphics, Equation, View, Zoom Display

Purpose

Use the Zoom Equation Display option to enlarge or reduce the display size of an equation in the display pane.

Steps

1	Choose Equation from the Graphics menu, then create an equation or use an existing equation.

2	Choose View, then choose Zoom Display.

3	Specify the zoom percentage you want.

or... Select Equation Height, Equation Width, Full Equation, or Other.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Zoom


Power Bar

Steps

1	Click the icon you want information about.

or...  Press Tab until the icon you want is selected, then press Enter.


Automatic Font Change

Layout, Font, Font Map, Automatic Font Change (AFC)

Purpose

An automatic font change (AFC) occurs when WordPerfect automatically chooses a font for an attribute or character map you select.

Use the default settings for AFCs or specify the font you want to use when you choose an attribute or a character map.

Steps

1	Choose Font from the Layout menu, then choose Font Map.

2	Select Automatic Font Change.

3	Select the attribute or character map you want to edit from the Automatic Font Change list box.

4	If you want, select Map Individual Style, then select the font face and the font style you want to use for the new automatic font change.

5	Choose OK.

If you want to use the Automatic Font Changes WordPerfect originally used, select Automatic Selection.

See Also

Display (Font Mapping)

Document (Font Mapping)


Display (Font Mapping)

Layout, Font, Font Map, Display

Purpose

Use Display (Font Mapping) to display a higher resolution font on screen, yet still print your documents in the font you originally selected.

Steps

1	Choose Font from the Layout menu, then choose Font Map.

2	Select Display in the Item to Map group box.

3	In the Display Font group box, select the font face and the font style you want to display on screen.

If your current font is a printer font, you can replace it with a graphics font (ATM, TrueType, etc.), which may result in a sharper display resolution.

4	Choose OK.

If you want to use the Display font selections WordPerfect originally used, select Automatic Selection.

See Also

Automatic Font Change

Document (Font Mapping)


Document (Font Mapping)

Layout, Font, Font Map, Document

Purpose

Use Document (Font Mapping) to change which font WordPerfect uses when the originally specified printer font is not available with the currently selected printer.

Steps

1	Open the document you plan to print with a different printer.

2	Choose Font from the Layout menu, then choose Font Map.

3	Select Document in the Item to Map group box.

4	In the Printer Font group box, select the font face and the font style you want to use when the originally selected Document Font is not available.

5	Choose OK.

If you want to use to the Document font selections WordPerfect originally used, select Automatic Selection.

See Also

Automatic Font Change

Display (Font Mapping)


Find Text Action Options

Edit, Find, Action, Select Match or Position Before or Position After or Extend Selection

Purpose

Use Find Text Action options to find and highlight a specified word or phrase or to specify the position of the insertion point when you use Find.

Steps

1	Choose Find from the Edit menu, then choose Action.

2	Choose any of the Action options:

Option	Lets You

Select Match	Find and select a specified word or phrase.

Position Before	Place the insertion point before the text you want to find.

Position After	Place the insertion point after the text you want to find.

Extend Selection	Select text from the insertion point to a word in the text you have specified.

See Also

Find Text


Find and Replace Text Direction

Edit, Replace, Direction

Purpose

Use the Direction options to specify which direction you want WordPerfect to search.

Steps

1	Choose Replace from the Edit menu, then choose Direction.

2	Choose one of the following options:

Option	Lets You

Forward	Search from the insertion point to the end of the document.

Backward	Search from the insertion point backward to the beginning of the document.

If you have first chosen Wrap at End of Document from the Options menu, the search will "wrap" from the insertion point to the end of the document, then from the beginning of the document back to the insertion point.

See Also

Find and Replace Text


Converting and Hiding Comments

Insert, Comment, Convert to Text

Purpose

Use Converting and Hiding Comments to convert an existing comment to text, to convert text to a comment, and to hide comments you create.

Steps

To convert a comment to text,

1	Place the insertion point after the comment you want to convert to text.

2	Choose Comment from the Insert menu, then choose Convert to Text.

To convert text to a comment,

1	Select the text you want to convert.

2	Choose Comment from the Insert menu, then choose Create.

To hide a comment,

1	Choose Preferences from the File menu, then double-click the Display icon.

2	Select Document, then deselect Comments.

3	Choose OK, then choose Close.

If you want comments to display, repeat step 1, then select Comments.

See Also

Comment

Display Preferences


TextArt

Graphics, TextArt

Purpose

Use TextArt to add an outline, a fill pattern, a shadow, or a shape to a text image.

Steps

1	Choose TextArt from the Graphics menu.

2	If you want help on a TextArt feature, choose Index from the TextArt Help menu.

or...  Choose TextArt to open TextArt Help.

If you receive the message "Cannot open Help file," you will need to copy to your WordPerfect directory the TEXTART.HLP file that came with your application.


title bar (def)
title bar

The horizontal bar across the top of each window that contains the name of the application currently open, the Control box, and the Maximize and Minimize buttons or the Minimize and Restore buttons.


New Features

WordPerfect for Windows gives you the freedom of individuality while offering you the power you expect from the world's best word processor.  Whether you're a new or an advanced WordPerfect user, you'll find WordPerfect 6.0 for Windows is quick and easy to use.  No other program is better suited to your style of working.

Customizable Interface

ExpressDocs Templates

Compatibility

Integration

Drawing Tools

Getting Help

Tables

Charts

File Management

Graphics and Borders


ALL OTHERS

Layout, Page, Paper Size, [ALL OTHERS], Select

Purpose

Use the [ALL OTHERS] paper definition only when you want to create a definition that can be used with any printer, or when you want to use a paper definition in the current document only.

WordPerfect printer drivers use the [ALL OTHERS] definition when the paper size defined in the document does not match a definition on the list.

Steps

1	Choose Page from the Layout menu, then choose Paper Size.

2	Highlight the [ALL OTHERS] paper definition at the bottom of the list, then choose Select.

The [ALL OTHERS] option is available only if you are using a WordPerfect printer driver.

3	Choose a paper type from the Paper Type drop-down list.

4	Specify a Paper Size.

You can also choose a paper orientation.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

 Edit Paper Size [ALL OTHERS]


Delete a Paper Definition

Layout, Page, Paper Size, Delete

Purpose

Use Delete a Paper Definition to delete a paper definition from the Paper Size dialog box.

Steps

1	Choose Page from the Layout menu, then choose Paper Size.

2	Select the paper definition that you want to delete, choose Delete, then choose Yes.

3	Choose Close.

See Also

Create or Edit Paper Size


logical page (def)
logical page

A defined area inside the physical page (the entire page).  You can have several logical pages on one physical page.


physical page (def)
physical page

The area on a piece of paper that is printable.  The physical page can be divided into several logical pages.


OLE (def)
OLE

Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) lets you link or embed an object from one application into a document in a different application.


link (def)
link

A link forms a connection between a server application and your document so that when you change information in the server application, it is automatically changed in your document.


embed (def)
embed

To insert information from a document in one server application to a document in another.  The embedded object can be edited from within the document without changing the original source document.


range (def)
range

A range is a selection of cells.  In a spreadsheet, a range is defined by an upper left cell and a lower right cell.  A colon or period is used to separate the two cell addresses.  For example, a range could be defined as A1:C5 or A1.C5.


field (def)
field

A field is a space set aside for a specific piece of information.  In a database each field usually has a name or heading.


link icons (def)
link icons

Link icons are inserted when a spreadsheet or database is imported.  An icon is placed where the link begins and ends.  The icons are never printed.


Tab Key

Purpose

Use the Tab key to indent a single line of text and to align columns of text.

Use Indent to indent all lines of a paragraph.  Use Tables to enter information in columns and rows.  Use Columns to vertically or horizontally divide text on a page.

Steps

1	Press Tab to move the insertion point to the next tab setting.

See Also

Back Tab

Columns

Create Table

Indent

Tab Set


  Font Size

Purpose

Use this feature to change the size of fonts in your document.

Steps

To change font size,

1	Choose Font from the Layout menu.

You can also click [image] on the Power Bar.

2	Click the font size you want to use in the Font Size list box.

3	Type the text you want.

To change the font size of existing text,

1	Select the text you want to change.

2	Choose Font from the Layout menu.

You can also click [image] on the Power Bar.

3	Click the font size you want to use in the Font Size list box.

See Also

Bold

Font

Italic

Underline


Decimal Tabs

Purpose

Use a Decimal Tab to align text on a specific character.  To set a decimal tab, see Tab Set.

Steps

1	Press the tab key to move to a previously assigned decimal tab setting.

2	Type the text you want on the left of the decimal tab.

3	Type the decimal tab character (usually a decimal).

4	Type the text you want on the right of the decimal tab.

See Also

Decimal/Align Character

Tab Key

Tab Set


Set Tabs on the Ruler Bar

View, Ruler Bar

Purpose

Use the Ruler Bar to quickly move, set, and delete tabs.

Steps

1	Choose Ruler Bar from the View menu.

2	To delete a tab setting, drag it off the Ruler Bar.

3	To move an existing tab, drag it to a new position.

or...  To move multiple tabs, press Shift, drag across the tabs to select them, release the Shift key, then drag the tabs to a new position.

4	To set a new tab, click on the Ruler Bar where you want a new tab.

5	To select a different type of tab or clear all tabs, choose [image] on the Power Bar, then choose a tab type or choose Clear All Tabs.

You can also click the right mouse button on a tab marker on the Ruler Bar, then choose a tab type or choose Clear All Tabs.

6	Choose Ruler Bar from the View menu to hide the Ruler Bar.

See Also

Ruler Bar (Display Preferences)

Tab Key

Tab Set


Dot Leader Character

Layout, Line, Tab Set, Dot Leader Character

Purpose

Use this feature to change the dot leader character from a dot to any character.

Steps

1	Choose Line from the Layout menu, then choose Tab Set.

You can also double-click [image] on the Power Bar.

2	Delete the dot (.) in the Dot Leader Character text box.

3	Type a new keyboard character.

or... Press Ctrl+w, specify a WordPerfect character, then choose Insert and Close.

4	Specify the number of spaces you want between characters, then choose OK.

See Also

Tab Key

Tab Set


Decimal/Align Character

Layout, Line, Tab Set, Align Character

Purpose

Use Decimal/Align Character to change the alignment character used for a decimal tab setting.  The default align character is a decimal point (.).

Steps

1	Choose Line from the Layout menu, then choose Tab Set.

You can also click [image] on the Power bar.

2	Delete the decimal point (.) in the Character text box.

3	Type a new keyboard character in the Character text box.

or... Press Ctrl+w, specify a WordPerfect character, then choose Insert and Close.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Tables

Tab Set

WordPerfect Characters


Draft view (def)
Draft view

Draft view imitates a WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) environment.  WordPerfect displays your document close to the way it will look when it is printed.  You can usually work faster in Draft view because features such as headers, footers, watermarks, and certain formatting features do not appear.


Page view (def)
Page view

Page view is a full WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) environment.  In addition to matching fonts and appearance features, information is formatted in the document window as it will look when it is printed (for example, document headers, footers, footnotes, watermarks, rotated text, and label arrangements are displayed).  Because information in Page view appears as it will when it is printed, information which does not print (such as a comment) is displayed as an icon.


Two Page view (def)
Two Page view

Two Page view is similar to Page view, except that two consecutive pages are displayed side by side in the document window.


Other Products

WordPerfect Corporation provides other popular products for the Windows environment:

WordPerfect Office

WordPerfect InForms

WordPerfect Presentations


  Bold

Layout, Font, Bold

Purpose

Use Bold to make text darker.

Steps

To bold text,

1	Choose Font from the Layout menu, then choose Bold from the Appearance group box.

You can also click [image] on the Power Bar.

2	Type the text you want bolded.

3	Choose Font from the Layout menu, then choose Bold from the Appearance group box again to turn off Bold.

To bold existing text,

1	Select the text you want bolded.

2	Choose Font from the Layout menu, then choose Bold from the Appearance group box.

You can also click [image] on the Power Bar.

See Also

Font


Hard Return

Purpose

Use a Hard Return to end the current line and move the insertion point to the beginning of the next line.

Steps

1	Press Enter.

See Also

Hyphenation

Page Break

Reveal Codes


Mail Enable

File, Mail

Purpose

Use Mail Enable to mail your current document, or selected text from your current document, while in WordPerfect for Windows.

Steps

To mail the current document,

1	Choose the Mail option from the File menu.

2	Set mail options according to your mail system.

3	Send the mail, then exit to the WordPerfect document window.

To mail selected text from your current document,

1	Select the text you want to send.

2	Choose Mail (where Mail is the name of your mail system) from the File menu.

The selected text is inserted into your mail systems Message Box.

3	Set mail options according to your mail system.

4	Send the mail, then exit to the WordPerfect document window.

See Also

Button Bar/Keyboard/Menu Bar Preferences


record (def)
record

A series of related fields of information in a data file.  Each record is separated by an ENDRECORD marker.


field (merge) (def)
field (merge)

The smallest unit of information in a data file record that can be referenced in a merge.  A field can be one character or many.


data text file (def)
data text file

A merge data file arranged in text format containing fields and records separated by merge codes.


data table file (def)
data table file

A merge data file arranged in table format.  Each column of the table contains a field.  Each row contains a record.


form file (def)
form file

A form file (known in previous versions of WordPerfect as a primary merge file) controls the merge output when merging with a data file, the keyboard, or ASCII delimited text files.


associated merge files (def)
associated merge files

An association between a form file and a data file.  An association means that the two files go together.  WordPerfect keeps track of associations so you do not have to.


Arranging Windows

Purpose

Use the document Control menu to arrange windows.

Steps

To move a document window with the mouse,

1	Drag the title bar to move the document window to a new location.

To move a document window with the keyboard,

1	Choose Move from the Control menu.

2	Use arrow keys to move the window, then press Enter to anchor it.

See Also

Cascade

Sizing Windows

Tile

Windowing


Sizing Windows

Purpose

Use the document Control menu to minimize, maximize, and size windows.

Steps

To minimize a document window,

1	Click the minimize arrow (down arrow) in the upper right corner of a restored document window.

or...  Choose Minimize from the document Control menu.

To maximize a document window,

1	To maximize a restored document, click the maximize arrow (up arrow) in the upper right corner of the document window.

or...  Double-click a document title bar.

2	To maximize a minimized document, click on a document icon to open the Control menu, then choose Maximize.

To size a document window with the mouse,

1	Drag the left, right, or bottom side of a restored document window to stretch or shrink the size.

or...  Drag the corner of the window to change the size in two directions at once.

To size a document window with the keyboard,

1	Choose Size from the document Control menu.

2	Use arrow keys to size the window, then press Enter to anchor it.

To restore a document window,

1	To restore a maximized document window, click the bottom Restore button in the upper right corner of a maximized document window.

or...  Choose Restore from the document Control menu to restore a document window to medium size.

2	To restore a minimized document, click on a document icon to open the Control menu, then choose Restore.

or...  Double-click the document icon to restore the document.

See Also

Arranging Windows

Windowing


Outline Options

Tools, Outline, Options

Purpose

Choose from the following topics for information on creating or editing outline styles:

Define Outline

End Outline

Change Outline Level

Set Paragraph Number

See Also

Edit Outline Definition

Style List


Overwrite/New Name

File, Preferences, Button Bar or Keyboard or Menu Bar, Copy, Copy

Insert, Abbreviations, Copy, Copy

Purpose

Use this feature to copy and give a new name to or to overwrite an existing Button Bar, keyboard, Menu Bar, or abbreviation.

Steps

1	Use one of the routes above ( [image]) to display the Overwrite/New Name dialog box.

2	Choose OK to overwrite the existing item.

or...  Type a new name in the Object text box, then choose OK.

See Also

Copy Abbreviation/Button Bar/Keyboard/Menu Bar


Counters

Tools, Cross-Reference, Reference, Counter

Purpose

Use this feature to select a counter to tie a cross-reference to.

Steps

1	Choose Cross-Reference from the Tools menu, then choose Counter from the Reference pop-up list.

2	Select the counter you want, then choose OK.

See Also

Counter Numbering

Create or Edit Counter Definition

Cross-Reference Feature Bar


Using Help

The following information explains basic features of a Help topic (this screen is a Help topic).

Pop-up definitions are dot-underlined, colored words and phrases that you click to see a "pop-up" window that displays information.  The pop-ups below explain the buttons on the top of this Help screen, and are examples of the pop-ups found in Help.  Click once to read them, then click again to close them.

   Contents   Search   Back   History   Print   Close

Jump terms are underlined, colored words and phrases that move you to another Help topic.  To read the topic about Context-sensitive Help, click this jump term:  context-sensitive Help, then click the Back button to return to this Help topic.

The light bulb is an icon containing a hint.  Click the light bulb to read the hint.

Text following a route icon shows the menus and buttons you choose to access a feature.

Text following an exclamation point is important information.

Text following a reference icon directs you to the printed documentation.

Many Help topics contain graphics you can click to display a pop-up definition.  However, when a graphic appears in front of the title, it is not a pop-up.


object linking and embedding (OLE) (def)
object linking and embedding (OLE)

The process of creating a document in one application (client application) that contains text or graphics created in another application (server application).  When a linked object is altered in the server application, it is automatically updated in the client application.  Embedded objects are not updated.


Close button (def)
Close button

A Help button you can use to close the Help window.


route (def)
 route

The path that indicates where a feature is found.  The hand icon points to the steps you take to access the feature.


jump term (def)
jump term

A graphic or underlined, colored word or phrase you can choose to go to a related Help topic.


Parts of a Dialog Box

Purpose

Use dialog boxes to select options.  Dialog boxes display options, warnings, or messages and provide ways for you to respond.

Steps

To learn more about the parts of a dialog box,

1	Move the pointer on the graphic above until the pointer becomes a hand [image].

2	Click the pointer to get information about a particular part of the dialog box.

3	Repeat steps 1 and 2 to learn about other parts of the dialog box.

See Also

Application Window


 Context-Sensitive Help

Purpose

Use Shift+F1 or F1 to get context-sensitive Help in a dialog box, menu, or window.  Shift+F1 requires a mouse and provides more specific help than F1.

Steps

To use Shift+F1,

1	Press Shift+F1 in a dialog box, menu, or window.

2	Click the item or control you want information about.

To use F1,

1	Press F1 while a menu item is highlighted or when a dialog box or window is open.

or... Choose the Help button in a dialog box.

See Also

Using Help


Select Directory

Purpose

The Select Directory list button appears as a folder icon next to text boxes where you need to specify a directory name.

Use the list button to open the Select Directory dialog box and select the directory you want.

Steps

1	Click the list button to open the Select Directory dialog box.

2	Select a drive from the Drives drop-down list to list the directories on that drive in the Directories list box, then double-click directory names to open directories and list their subdirectories until you locate and select the directory you want.

or... Select the directory you want from the QuickList list box.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Directories List

Drives

QuickList


Filename

Purpose

The Filename text box appears on directory dialog boxes that let you open, save, and manage files and directories.

Use Filename to specify the name of the file you want to open or save.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, select a drive from the Drives drop-down list to list the directories on that drive in the Directories list box, then double-click directory names to open directories and list their subdirectories until you locate and select the directory you want.

or... Select the directory path you want from the QuickList list box.

2	Specify the name of the file you want to open or save in the Filename text box.

or... Select a filename in the file list box.

3	Choose File Options, then choose the option you want.

or... Choose OK to complete an open or save action.

See Also

Directories List

Directory Dialog Box File Options

Drives

File List

QuickList


List Files of Type

Purpose

The List Files of Type drop-down list appears on directory dialog boxes that let you open and manage files and directories.

Use List Files of Type to choose the type of files you want to list in the file list box.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, choose the file type from the List Files of Type drop-down list.

See Also

Directories List

Drives

File List

Format

QuickList


Drives

Purpose

The Drives drop-down list appears on directory dialog boxes that let you open, save, and manage files and directories.

Use Drives to choose the drive that contains the directories and files you want to list.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, choose the drive you want from the Drives drop-down list.

See Also

Directories List

File List

QuickList


File List

Purpose

The file list box appears on directory dialog boxes that let you open, save, and manage files and directories.

Use the file list box to view a file list by selected drives, directories, and file types and to select the files you want to use.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box that lets you open a file, select the type of files you want to list from the List Files of Type drop-down list.

or... In a directory dialog box that lets you save a document as a file, select the format of the files you want to list from the Format drop-down list.

2	Select the drive location of the files you want to list from the Drives drop-down list.

3	Select the directory location of the files you want to list from the Directories list box.

or... Select a directory path from the QuickList list box.

4	Select the file(s) you want to use from the file list box.

5	Choose File Options, then select the option you want.

or... Choose OK to complete an open or save action.

See Also

Directories List

Directory Dialog Box File Options

Drives

File List Display

Format

List Files of Type

QuickList


QuickList

Purpose

QuickList appears on directory dialog boxes that let you open, save, and manage files.

A QuickList lets you access directories or files without entering the full path every time.

Use the QuickList options to change the default directory display in your directory dialog boxes and to edit your QuickList.

Steps

To change your default directory display,

1	Enter any directory dialog box, then choose QuickList.

2	Choose Show QuickList, Show Directories, or Show Both.

See Also

Add QuickList Item

Edit QuickList Item

Open/Save As Setup


Viewer

Purpose

View appears on directory dialog boxes that let you open, save, or manage files.

Use the Viewer to preview files without retrieving them into the document window.

Steps

1	Enter any directory dialog box, then select a file from the file list.

2	Choose View.

3	To use features supported by the Viewer, click the right mouse button inside the Viewer window, then select any available option.  (Not all of the following options appear at the same time on the QuickMenu.)

Hex

Viewer Setup

Document Summary

Word Wrap

Font

Find

Find Next

Find Previous

Remove Highlights

Copy to Clipboard

Document Text

See Also

Viewer Setup


Directory Dialog Box File Options

Purpose

The File Options pop-up list appears on directory dialog boxes that let you open, save, and manage files and directories.

Use the File Options pop-up list to choose options you want to perform on the selected file(s) or directory.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, select the file(s) you want from the file list box.

or... Select the directory you want from the Directories list box or the QuickList list box.

2	Choose File Options.

3	Select the option you want from the File Options pop-up list.

Choose from the following options for more information:

Copy

Move

Rename

Delete

Change Attributes

Print

Print List

Create Directory

Remove Directory

See Also

Directories List

Directory Dialog Box (Open)

Directory Dialog Box (Save As)

Drives

File List

List Files of Type

QuickList


Directories List

Purpose

The Directories list box appears on directory dialog boxes that let you open, save, and manage files and directories.

Use the Directories list box to view a list of directories in a selected drive and to select the directory you want to open or use.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, select a drive from the Drives drop-down list to list the directories on that drive in the Directories list box, then double-click directory names to open directories and list their subdirectories until you locate and select the directory you want.

 2	Double click a directory name to open that directory and display the directory filenames in the file list box.

or ... Click a directory name, then choose File Options.

3	Choose Create Directory from the File Options pop-up list to create a subdirectory within a selected directory.

or... Choose Remove Directory from the File Options pop-up list to remove the selected directory.

See Also

Create Directory

Directory Dialog Box File Options

Drives

QuickList

Remove Directory


Sort By

Open/Save As Setup, Sort By

Purpose

Setup appears on directory dialog boxes that let you open, save, and manage files.

Use Sort By to specify what element your files should be sorted by.

Steps

1	Enter any directory dialog box, then choose Setup.

2	Select an option from the Sort By pop-up list.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Create Speedup Files

File List Display

Open/Save As Setup

Sort Order


File List Display

Open/Save As Setup, File List Display

Purpose

Setup appears on directory dialog boxes that let you open, save, and manage files.

Use File List Display to specify which elements of a file's description will be displayed in the file list box.

Steps

1	Enter any directory dialog box, then choose Setup.

2	Select an option from the Show pop-up list.

3	Select Show Column Labels if you want to display headings for Custom Columns.

4	To change the default directory every time you move to a new directory, select Change Default Directory.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Create Speedup Files

Open/Save As Setup

Sort By

Sort Order


Create Speedup Files

Open/Save As Setup, Create Speedup Files

Purpose

Setup appears on directory dialog boxes that let you open, save, and manage files.

Use Create Speedup Files to make files display faster when you are displaying Document Summary information (descriptive name and type) in the file list.

Steps

1	Enter any directory dialog box, then choose Setup.

2	Select Custom Columns or Descriptive Name, Filename from the Show pop-up list.

3	Select Create Speedup Files.

4	Specify a directory to store the speedup files, if you want.

5	If the directory specified does not exist, choose Yes to create the directory.

See Also

File List Display

Open/Save As Setup

Sort By

Sort Order


 Hint

You can also click the right mouse button on the QuickList, then choose the option.


Format

Purpose

The Format drop-down list appears in directory dialog boxes that let you save documents as new or renamed files.

Use Format to choose the format of the file you want to save.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, select the drive where you want to save your file from the Drives drop-down list.

2	Select the directory where you want to save your file from the Directories list box or the QuickList list box.

3	Type the name of the file you want to save in the Filename text box.

or... In the file list box, select the file you want to replace with the saved file.

4	Choose the format you want from the Format drop-down list.

5	Choose OK to save the file in the selected format.

See Also

Directories List

Directory Dialog Box (Save As)

Drives

Filename

File List

QuickList


Search For

QuickFinder, Search For

Purpose

Use Search For to specify the word string or word pattern to search for.

Steps

1	From QuickFinder, type a word or phrase in the Search For text box.

2	Click the icon to the right of the Search For text box, then choose options to refine your search.

3	Fill in the File Pattern text box and Search In pop-up list for any additional search criteria.

4	Choose Find.

See Also

QuickFinder


QuickFinder

Purpose

Use QuickFinder to search for specific files by file pattern, words or phrases, summary fields (such as descriptive name, abstract, or typist), date range, or QuickFinder (full-text) index.

Steps

1	Choose QuickFinder, then perform any of the steps 2-6 to specify your search criteria.

2	Type a file pattern in the File Pattern text box.

3	Type a text string to search for in the Search For text box.

4	Choose an option from the Search In pop-up list.

5	Select WordPerfect Documents Only to limit the search to documents in WordPerfect 5.0/5.1/5.2/6.0 format.

6	Specify a From date and To date to specify files whose DOS revision date falls within a date range.

7	Choose Find to obtain a list of filenames that match your search criteria.  A Search Results List will display all matching filenames.

Choose from the following options for more information:

File Pattern

Options

Search For

Search In

See Also

QuickFinder Indexer

QuickFinder Preferences


Create Index

QuickFinder, Indexer, Create

Purpose

Use Create Index to create a QuickFinder Index.

Steps

1	From QuickFinder, choose Indexer.

2	Choose Create, type a name for the index, then choose OK.

3	Type the name of the directory or file you want to add in the Add Directory or File text box.

or... Choose Browse to display a list of files and directories, then select the directories you want to index.  To include all subdirectories under the directories you have added to the list, check the Include Subtree check box, then choose Add.

4	Choose Individual Index Options to set individual indexing preferences.

5	Choose Generate to create the index, choose OK, then choose Close to exit the QuickFinder Indexer.

6	From QuickFinder, enter search criteria in the Search For text box, then choose Find to search the newly created index.

Choose from the following options for more information:

Delete

Edit

See Also

Add Directory or File

Index Name

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer


Edit Index

QuickFinder, Indexer, Edit

Purpose

Use Edit Index to edit an existing QuickFinder index.

Steps

1	From QuickFinder, choose Indexer, then highlight the name of the index you want to edit.  If you have only one index, the name is highlighted.

2	Choose Edit.

3	Type the name of the directory or file you want to add in the Add Directory or File text box, then choose Add.  Choose Browse for a list of files and directories.

or... Select the directories you do not want to index, then choose Remove.

4	If you want to include all subdirectories under the directories you have added to the list, check the Include Subtree check box.

5	Choose Options to set individual indexing preferences.

6	Choose Generate to create the index.  From the Index Method dialog box, indicate if you want to regenerate the entire index or just update the index with new or modified files, then choose OK.

7	Choose Close to exit the QuickFinder File Indexer.

Choose from the following options for more information:

Create

Delete

See Also

Add Directory or File

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer


Delete Index

QuickFinder, Indexer, Options, Delete

Purpose

Use Delete Index to delete an existing QuickFinder index.

Steps

1	From QuickFinder, choose Indexer, then select the index you want to delete.

2	Choose Delete from the Options pop-up list, then choose Yes.

See Also

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer


Search Document Summary Fields

QuickFinder, Options, Summary Fields

Purpose

Use Summary Fields to display a list of all possible document summary fields you want to search.  Only WordPerfect 5.0/5.1/5.2/6.0 documents that contain document summary information will be found.

Steps

1	From QuickFinder, choose Options, then choose Summary Fields to expand the dialog box to show document summary fields.

2	Choose from the list of Document Summary Fields for your search, typing the search word or phrases in the text boxes.

3	Fill in additional search criteria in the other fields (for example, File Pattern, Search For).

4	Choose Find to perform the search.

  Refer to the reference manual for more information about the Search For options.

See Also

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Options


Clear

QuickFinder, Options, Clear

Purpose

Use Clear to remove all present QuickFinder search criteria, including all document summary fields scrolled off-screen (if the dialog has been expanded using the Summary Fields under Options).

Steps

1	From QuickFinder, choose Options, then choose Clear.

See Also

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Options

QuickFinder Summary Fields


Load Search Query

QuickFinder, Options, Load Search Query

Purpose

Use Load Search Query to reuse a saved QuickFinder search.

Steps

After you have saved a search query,

1	From QuickFinder, choose Options, then choose Load Search Query.

2	Select the search query you want to retrieve from the Search Query List, then choose Load.

See Also

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Options

Save Search Query


Save Search Query

QuickFinder, Options, Save Search Query

Purpose

Use Save Search Query to save a QuickFinder search.

Steps

1	From QuickFinder, define a search query using a file pattern or word pattern, along with any operators you want to use.  If you want, enter a date range and any document summary field information you want to search for.

2	Choose Options, then choose Save Search Query.

3	Type a name in the Search Name text box, then choose Save.

See Also

Load Search Query

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Options

QuickFinder Summary Fields


Delete Search Query

QuickFinder, Options, Delete Search Query

Purpose

 Use Delete Search Query to delete a saved search query.

Steps

1	From QuickFinder, choose Options, then choose Delete Search Query.

2	Select the search query you want to delete from the Search Query List, then choose Delete.  (If you accidentally delete a name from the Search Query list, choose Cancel to exit the dialog box without saving the changes.)

See Also

Load Search Query

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Options

Save Search Query


File Pattern

QuickFinder, File Pattern

Purpose

Use File Pattern to find files with filenames that contain characters or extensions in common.  You can specify multiple directories or file patterns in this field.  See the reference manual for an example.

Steps

1	From QuickFinder, type a file pattern in the File Pattern text box.  Use wildcards to help define the pattern.

2	If you want, type a word string in the Search For field, along with any operators you want to use.  Also you can enter a date range and any document summary field information you want to search for.  You may specify additional search criteria in any of the QuickFinder fields, such as Search For and Date Range.

3	Choose Find to perform the search.

See Also

QuickFinder


Search In

QuickFinder, Search In

Purpose

Use Search In to specify in which drives, directories, or indexes to search for files.

Steps

1	In QuickFinder, choose an option from the Search In pop-up list.

If you selected QuickFinder Index from the Search In pop-up list, select the index you want to search from the QuickFinder Index list box.  Additional information about how and when the index was generated is displayed below the list box.

If you select Disk, choose the disk you want to search from the Disk list box.

2	Fill in any other search criteria in the Search For, File Pattern, Date Range, or Document Summary fields, then choose Find.

See Also

QuickFinder


Application Window

Purpose

The application window is the area in which all your computer activities take place.

Steps

To learn more about the parts of an application window,

1	Move the pointer on the graphic above until the pointer becomes a hand [image].

2	Click the pointer to get information about a particular part of the application window.

3	Repeat steps 1 and 2 to learn about other parts of the application window.

See Also

Parts of a Dialog Box


button (def)
button

A graphic that represents an option or command.  Select the button to activate the option or to execute the command.


template (def)
template

A page layout, chart, or background format you can use as a model.


help prompt (def)
help prompt

A short explanation of the menu item or option you have selected.


folder icon (def)
 folder icon

A small file folder icon next to a text box.  The folder icon appears on dialog boxes and is used to access another dialog box to select files or change directories.  Sometimes called a list button.

How to Use It


fat bits (def)
fat bits

Small squares of color used to build bitmap images.  Also called pixels.


bitmap (def)
bitmap

A graphic formed by a series of dots (pixels).  Sometimes called a paint image or a raster image.


menu (def)
menu

A list of options displayed on screen from which you can select a particular function or command.


pathname (def)
pathname

The address of a file.  A full pathname includes the drive, the root directory, any subdirectory names, and the filename.


directory (def)
directory

An index of filenames and subdirectories.  A directory can be divided into subdirectories.  A root directory is the main directory of a disk.  All other directories branch from the root.


directory dialog box (def)
directory dialog box

Dialog boxes that allow you to open, save, name, find, view, copy, move, rename, delete, and print files.  They also let you create and remove directories.  Directory dialog boxes appear when you use any feature that retrieves or saves a file, such as Open, Save As, Insert File, and so on.


dialog box (def)
dialog box

Dialog boxes let you communicate with the WordPerfect program.  They display warnings and messages, and they let you select and implement options by choosing appropriate command buttons.  Dialog boxes have a title bar and a control menu, but they do not have a menu bar.  They can be moved to different locations on the screen.  Most dialog boxes must be closed before you can work in the document window, but a few will allow you to move between the window and the dialog box.

When a dialog box option is unavailable and cannot be used, it will appear dim.  If subsequent actions make the item available, it will change to a normal appearance.


text box (dialog box) (def)
text box (dialog box)

The area in a dialog box where you type text or where WordPerfect types text for you.  The selection insertion point must be in the text box before you can begin to type.


Viewer Setup

Lets you change the default settings for your Viewer.

How to Use It


Find Next

Lets you find the next page where the current Viewer search text occurs.  (Find Next appears only if you have used Find.)


Find Previous

Lets you find the previous page where the current Viewer search text occurs.  (Find Previous appears only if you have used Find.)


drop-down list (def)
drop-down list

A list of options that appears to "drop down" from an option when you click a button in a dialog box.  Drop-down lists are marked by down pointing arrows.


pop-up list (def)
pop-up list

A list of options that appears when a pop-up button is selected. Most pop-up lists are marked by double arrows or triangles and display mutually exclusive options.  The button itself shows the selected option.  Other pop-up lists, marked by single arrows or triangles, show the feature name rather than the selected option.


headword (def)
headword

A word that can be looked up in the Thesaurus.  A reference marked with a bullet is a headword, which, if selected, will display other useful words.


Keyboard Script (def)
Keyboard Script

A Keyboard Script can contain text, extended and WordPerfect characters, and simple commands (such as keystrokes that bring up a dialog box).  You can use any keystroke combination available in the Keyboard Editor.  Type keystroke combinations in brackets: {Alt+F7}.


About QuickFinder

QuickFinder, Indexer, Options, About

Purpose

Use About QuickFinder to read about your version of QuickFinder.

Steps

1	From QuickFinder, choose Indexer, then choose Options.

2	Choose About.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer

QuickFinder Indexer Options


Add QuickList Item

QuickList, Add Item

Purpose

QuickList appears on directory dialog boxes that let you open, save, and manage files.

Use Add QuickList Item to add items to the list of directories you use frequently.

Steps

1	Enter any directory dialog box.

2	Choose QuickList, then choose Add Item.

3	Type the directory or filename in the Directory/Filename text box.

4	Type a descriptive name in the Description text box.

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Edit QuickList Item

QuickList


Button Bar Image Editor

Button Bar Editor, double-click a button, Edit

Purpose

Use the Button Bar Image Editor to change the graphic on a button.

Steps

1	Open the Button Bar Editor.

2	Double-click the button you want, then choose Edit.

3	Select Draw to change the graphic one small square at a time.

or... Select Fill to change areas of one color to another color.

4	Choose any of the following options.

Copy

Paste

Undo

Clear

5	Choose OK and Close until you return to your document.

See Also

Button Bar Customize

Button Bar Editor


Button Bar Editor

Purpose

Use the Button Bar Editor to create and edit Button Bars.

Steps

1	Open the Button Bar Editor.

2	Select Activate a Feature, select a category and feature, then choose Add Button.

or... Select Play a Keyboard Script, type the keystrokes the button will play, then choose Add Script.

or... Select Launch a Program, choose Select File, specify the file you want to run, then choose OK.

or... Select Play a Macro, choose Add Macro, then specify the location, path, and filename of the macro.

3	To add a space between buttons, drag a Separator onto the Button Bar.

4	To move a button or separator, drag it on the Button Bar.

5	To delete a button or separator, drag it off the Button Bar.

6	Choose OK and Close until you return to your document.

See Also

Button Bar Customize

Button Bar Image Editor


Button Bar Customize

Button Bar Editor, double-click a button

Purpose

Use Button Bar Customize to change the text and graphics on buttons and to edit Help Prompts for buttons.

Steps

1	In Button Bar Preferences, select a Button Bar, then choose Edit.

2	Double-click the button you want to customize.

3	Type a new button label in the Button Text text box.

4	If you want, type a new Help Prompt.

5	To change the button graphic, choose Edit, change the image, then choose OK.

6	Choose OK and Close until you return to your document.

See Also

Button Bar Editor

Button Bar Image Editor


Change File Attributes

Purpose

The Change Attributes option appears on the File Options pop-up list in directory dialog boxes that let you open, save, and manage files and directories.

Use Change Attributes to change the Archive, Read-Only, Hidden, and System attributes of one or more files.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, select a drive from the Drives drop-down list to list the directories on that drive in the Directories list box, then double-click directory names to open directories and list their subdirectories until you locate and select the directory you want.

or... Select the directory path you want from the QuickList.

2	Select one or more files in the file list box.  Make sure the selected files are not open when you attempt to change file attributes.

3	Choose File Options, then choose Change Attributes.

4	Select or deselect the check boxes for the attributes you want to change.  Choose from the following options:

Archive

Read-Only

Hidden

System

5	Choose OK.

See Also

Directories List

Directory Dialog Box File Options

Drives

File List

QuickList


 Hint

To open a file without choosing OK, double-click a filename in the file list box of a directory dialog box that lets you open files.


Remove Highlights

Removes any highlights placed in the Viewer file by Find.


Language

Purpose

Use Language to specify the language of text in your documents.  WordPerfect Corporation applications use language codes to customize several features, including Date, Sort, Thesaurus, and Speller (if you have selected the correct dictionary) to the language being used.

At least one additional language module must be installed in order to use this feature.  You can purchase language modules separately.

Steps

1	Position the insertion point where you want to begin typing text.

or... Select the text you want to change to another language.

2	Open the Language dialog box.

3	Select a language from the Current Language list box.

or... Type a two-letter language code in the Language text box.

4	Select Disable Writing Tools (in this portion of the text) if you want Speller, Grammatik, or Thesaurus to skip the selected text.

5	Choose OK.


 Hint

Type an ampersand (&) in front of any character you want to make a mnemonic.


Search Switches

QuickFinder

Purpose

Use Search Switches to refine your search for file contents.  This feature applies to all text that follows in the Search For text box.

Steps

1	From QuickFinder, click the icon to the right of the Search For text box, then choose options to refine your search.

2	Type a word or phrase in the Search For text box.

3	Choose Find.

See Also

QuickFinder


 Hint

New key assignments work only when a document window is active (not when a dialog box is open).


 Hint

You can type the full pathname (drive letter, directory and subdirectory names, filename, and file extension) of a file in the Filename text box when you want to open or save a file without using the Drives, Directories, or file lists in a directory dialog box.  You can also type more than one pathname in the text box (separating multiple names with commas) to open as many as nine files at one time in one or more directories.  When you specify a filename without a drive and directory path, the file is searched for or saved in the current directory.

The filename can include as many as eight characters followed by a file extension that includes a period and three more characters.  When you specify a filename without an extension, WordPerfect will search for a file with the default extension that you specify in File Preferences or save the file with the extension that identifies the Format selected in a dialog box such as Save As.  Specify a filename that ends with the period if you do not want WordPerfect to add the default extension.


Import Indexes

QuickFinder, Indexer, Options, Import

Purpose

Use Import to access QuickFinder indexes created by others.

Steps

1	From QuickFinder choose Indexer.

2	Choose Options, then choose Import.  You can select more than one index at a time to import.

See Also

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer

QuickFinder Indexer Options


 Hint

Do not choose Yes to remove a directory that contains files or subdirectories unless you are sure you want to delete the contents of those files and subdirectories.  You will not be able to recover the files or subdirectories after you delete them.

If you do not select a directory before choosing Remove Directory in a directory dialog box, the application will read the current directory name as the directory that you want to remove.


 Hint

You can directly access the Add Word/Phrase dialog box to add items to the currently selected supplementary dictionary without choosing Dictionaries, Supplementary Dictionaries, and Edit options by choosing Add in the Speller dialog box before you start a spell-check.


 Hint

Name search works in the file list only when files are sorted by filename in ascending order.


Archive

Archives or backs up the file(s) the next time you run a third-party backup program.


Copy Files

Purpose

The Copy option appears in the File Options pop-up list on directory dialog boxes that let you open, save, and manage files and directories.

Use Copy to copy one file or multiple files.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, select a drive from the Drives drop-down list to list the directories on that drive in the Directories list box, then double-click directory names to open directories and list their subdirectories until you locate and select the directory you want.

or... Select the directory path you want from the QuickList list box.

2	Select one or more filenames in the file list box.

3	Choose File Options, then choose Copy.

4	Type the path or filename you want the file(s) copied to.

or... Click the list button, select the directory that you want the files copied to, then choose OK.

5	If you do not want to copy files that are identical to the files they would replace, select Don't replace files with the same size, date, and time.

6	Choose Copy.

See Also

Directories List

Directory Dialog Box File Options

Drives

File List

QuickList

Select Directory


Create Directory

Purpose

The Create Directory option appears on the File Options pop-up list in directory dialog boxes that let you open, save, and manage files and directories.

Use the Create Directory option to create a new directory.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, select the drive location for the new directory from the Drives drop-down list.

2	If you want to create the new directory within an existing directory, select the existing directory in the Directories list box or QuickList.

3	Choose File Options, then select Create Directory.

4	Specify the name of the directory you want to create in the New Directory text box.

5	Choose Create.

See Also

Directories List

Directory Dialog Box File Options

Drives

QuickList

Remove Directory


Index Name

QuickFinder, Indexer, Options, Create

Purpose

Use the Index Name text box to name the QuickFinder index you are about to create.

Steps

1	From QuickFinder choose Indexer.

2	Choose Options, then choose Create.

3	Type a new name, then choose OK.

See Also

Create Index

QuickFinder


Read-Only

Protects the file(s) from being modified or deleted.


Password Protect

Purpose

The Password Protect option appears in directory dialog boxes that let you protect a document with a password when you save it as a new or renamed file.

Use Password Protect to assign a password to a WordPerfect 5.X or 6.0 document when you save it as a file.  You can also use Password Protect to remove a password from a file.

Steps

To assign a password to a file,

1	In a directory dialog box (such as the Save As dialog box) that lets you save a document as a new or renamed file, specify the name of the file you want to save in the Filename text box.

or...  In the file list box in the directory dialog box, select the name of the file you want to replace with the file you are saving.

2	Choose a WordPerfect document format that supports the Password Protect feature (6.0 or 5.X) from the Format drop-down list.

3	Select the Password Protect check box, then choose OK.

4	Type the password that you want to use, then choose OK.

5	Re-type the password entered in step 3, then choose OK.

To remove a password from a file,

1	In a directory dialog box that lets you open files (such as the Open File dialog box), specify the name of the protected file, then choose OK.

2	Type the password, then choose OK.

3	In the open password-protected file, select a menu option (such as Save As from the File menu) that lets you save a new or renamed file.

4	In the directory dialog box that lets you save the file (such as the Save As dialog box), specify the name of the protected file, deselect the Password Protect check box, then choose OK.

5	Choose Yes to replace the password-protected file.

See Also

Directory Dialog Box (Open)

Directory Dialog Box (Save As)

Filename

File List

Password


Custom Columns

If you also select Show Column Labels, Custom Columns lets you select from a list of column types to display in a file list.


Location for Index Files

QuickFinder, Indexer, Options, Preferences

Purpose

Use the Location for Index Files to identify the directory where you want to place your QuickFinder indexes.

Steps

1	From QuickFinder, choose Indexer.

2	Choose Preferences from the Options drop-down list.

3	Specify a path in the Location for Index Files text box or choose Browse, then choose OK.

See Also

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer Options


Copy

Lets you copy the image to the Clipboard.


Delete Files

Purpose

The Delete option appears on the File Options pop-up list in directory dialog boxes that let you open, save, and manage files and directories.

Use Delete to delete one or more files.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, select a drive from the Drives drop-down list to list the directories on that drive in the Directories list box, then double-click directory names to open directories and list their subdirectories until you locate and select the directory you want.

or... Select the directory path you want from the QuickList list box.

2	Select one or more files in the file list box.

3	Choose File Options, then choose Delete.

4	Choose Delete.

See Also

Directories List

Directory Dialog Box File Options

Drives

File List

QuickList


Hidden

Hides the file(s) in directory dialog box file lists and QuickFinder Search Results lists.


Paste

Lets you paste the Clipboard contents to the image editor.


 Hint

To select a column label, click the right mouse button on a blank space between column labels, then choose an option.  You may need to scroll right to find a blank space.


Conversion Preferences Code Page

Purpose

Use Code Page Preferences to choose character sets for importing and exporting files in different languages.

Steps

1	In the Code Page Preferences dialog box, choose DOS and Windows Code Page options from the pop-up lists.

2	Choose an Input File and Output File Code Page from the pop-up lists.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Conversion Preferences


Undo

Lets you reverse your last change.


Edit QuickList Item

QuickList, Edit Item

Purpose

QuickList appears on directory dialog boxes that let you open, save, and manage files.

Use Edit QuickList Item to edit your list of frequently used directories.

Steps

1	Enter any directory dialog box.

2	If a QuickList is not displayed, choose QuickList, then choose Show Quicklist.

3	Select the item you want to edit.

4	Choose QuickList, then choose Edit Item.

5	Change the information in the text boxes.

6	Choose OK.

See Also

Add QuickList Item

QuickList


Clear

Lets you remove the entire graphic from the editing area.


 Hint

You can also click the right mouse button inside the file list box, then select the file option you want.


Add Directory or File

QuickFinder, Indexer, Create or Edit, Add Directory or File

Purpose

Use Add Directory or File to create or edit a directory pattern that you want to include in the index.

Steps

1	From QuickFinder, choose Indexer, then choose Create or Edit.  If you choose Create, specify an index name.

2	Type a path in the Add Directory or File text box or choose Browse to select the drives and directories to be indexed.  If you want to include subdirectories, check the Include Subtrees check box.

3	Choose Add to add the directory pattern to the list of directories to be indexed.

4	Choose Generate to generate the index.

See Also

Create Index

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer


Index File Information

QuickFinder, Indexer, Options, Information

Purpose

Use Index File Information to display information about the contents of your QuickFinder index files.

Steps

1	From QuickFinder, choose Indexer.

2	Choose Options, then choose Information.

You must have an index created or this option will be disabled.

See Also

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer

QuickFinder Indexer Options


Index Method

QuickFinder, Indexer, Generate

QuickFinder, Indexer, Edit, Generate

Purpose

Use Index Method to regenerate the entire index or just update the index with new, modified, or deleted files.  You normally want to choose Update Index because it is much faster than regenerating the entire index.  But as the incremental (.INC) index file gets large, it is recommended that you regenerate the entire index to speed up the update index process.

Steps

1	From QuickFinder, choose Indexer, then choose an index to update.

2	Choose Generate.

3	If you want to regenerate the entire index, choose Index All Files.  If you want to update the index with new, modified, or deleted files, choose Update Index With New or Modified Files.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer


Individual Index Options

QuickFinder, Indexer, Edit, Options

Purpose

Use Individual Index Options to specify indexing conditions for the specified QuickFinder Index.

Steps

1	From QuickFinder, choose Indexer, specify an index, then choose Edit.

2	Choose Options to display the Individual Index Options dialog box.

3	Choose an option from the Index Contains drop-down list.

Entire Document

Entire Document-Summary Fields

Text Only

Summary Fields Only

Filename Only

4	Check if you want to index WordPerfect Documents Only.

5	Check if you want to Include Numbers in Index.  By default numbers are excluded from the index to minimize the index size.

6	List file extensions you want to exclude from the index.

7	Specify an Index Level to determine how large an area to look for word patterns.

8	Specify how the index should treat extended characters in non-WP documents.  They can be interpreted as ANSI, ASCII, or excluded entirely.

9	Choose OK.

See Also

Edit Index

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer


Keyboard Editor

Purpose

Use the Keyboard Editor to create or edit a keyboard definition.

Steps

1	Open the Keyboard Editor.

2	Select Activate a Feature, select the keystroke to assign, select a category and feature, then choose Assign Feature.

or... Select Play a Keyboard Script, select the keystroke to assign, type the script, then choose Assign Script.

or... Select Launch a Program, select the keystroke to assign, choose Select File, specify the file you want to run, then choose OK.

or... Select Play a Macro, select the keystroke to assign, choose Assign Macro, then specify the location and filename of the macro.

3	To remove the assignment from the selected keystroke, choose Unassign.

4	To display the selected keystroke on the pull-down menus, select Assignment Appears on Menu.

 	5	Choose OK.

See Also

Button Bar Editor

Menu Bar Editor


Search Query

QuickFinder, Options, Load Search Query

QuickFinder, Options, Save Search Query

QuickFinder, Options, Delete Search Query

Purpose

Use QuickFinder Options to load, save, or delete a QuickFinder search query.

Steps

1	From QuickFinder, choose Options.

2	Choose Load Search Query to load a search query.

or... Choose Save Search Query to save a search query.

or... Choose Delete Search Query to delete a search query.

If you accidentally delete a Search Query, you can choose Cancel to exit the Delete Search Query dialog box without saving the changes.

See Also

Delete Search Query

Load Search Query

QuickFinder Options

Save Search Query


 Hint

Click the right mouse button inside a QuickList or Directories list box to display a QuickMenu that lets you choose which directories lists you want to display in the directory dialog box.  You can also select Change Default Directory to change the default for the current WordPerfect session every time you move to a new directory

The QuickMenu in the QuickList also lets you edit the QuickList.  The QuickMenu in the Directories list box lets you choose file options to create a directory and remove a directory.


Menu Bar Editor

Purpose

Use the Menu Bar Editor to move, delete, or add items to the pull-down menus on the menu bar.

Steps

1	Open the Menu Bar Editor.

2	Select Activate a Feature, select a category and feature, then drag the feature to the menu where you want it.

or... Select Play a Keyboard Script, type the keystrokes the menu item will play, then choose Add Script.

or... Select Launch a Program, choose Select File, specify the file you want to run, then choose OK.

or... Select Play a Macro, choose Add Macro, then specify the location, path, and filename of the macro.

3	To move a menu item, drag it to another position or to another menu.

4	To delete a menu item, drag it off the menu.

5	To add a submenu, drag the Menu icon to a menu position.

6	To add a dividing line, drag the Separator icon to a menu position.

7	Choose OK.

See Also

Edit Menu Text


Edit Menu Text

Menu Bar Editor

Purpose

Use Edit Menu Text to edit the text on menus and on menu help prompts.

Steps

1	Open the Menu Bar Editor, then double-click the menu item you want to edit.

2	Type new text for the menu item in the Menu Item text box.

3	If you want, type a new Help Prompt.

4	Choose OK and Close until you return to your document.

See Also

Menu Bar Editor


 Hint

The directory path you select in the QuickList or Directories list box displays in the Directory Name text box in the Select Directory dialog box.  When you choose OK, the same name will be displayed in the text box next to the list button you selected in the previous dialog box.


Sentence

Checks the sentence in which the insertion point is located in a document.


System

Identifies the file(s) as part of your computer's operating system.  The file(s) are not displayed in directory dialog box file lists or QuickFinder Search Results lists.


Move Files

Purpose

The Move option appears in the File Options pop-up list on directory dialog boxes that let you open, save, and manage files and directories.

Use Move to move one or more files to a different location.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, select a drive from the Drives drop-down list to list the directories on that drive in the Directories list box, then double-click directory names to open directories and list their subdirectories until you locate and select the directory you want.

or... Select the directory path you want from the QuickList list box.

2	Select one or more files in the file list box.

3	Choose File Options, then choose Move.

4	Type the path or filename you want the file(s) moved to.

or... Click the list button , select the directory that you want the files moved to, then choose OK.

5	Choose Move.

See Also

Directories List

Directory Dialog Box File Options

Drives

File List

QuickList

Select Directory


Move Index File

QuickFinder, Indexer, Options, Move

Purpose

Use Move Index File to move a QuickFinder index file to a different file location.

Steps

1	From QuickFinder, choose Indexer, then choose Options.

2	Select an index in the Index Names list box to move.

3	Choose Move to display the Move Index File Location dialog box.

4	Type a new directory and filename in the New Filename text box, then choose OK.

You can also specify a network drive for the file location.

See Also

Network Index File Location

QuickFinder Indexer

QuickFinder Indexer Options


Network Index File Location

QuickFinder, Indexer, Options, Move

Purpose

Use Move Index File to move a QuickFinder index file to a network file location.

Steps

1	From QuickFinder, choose Indexer, then choose Options.

2	Select an index in the Index Names list box to move.

3	Choose Move.

4	Type a network or local directory and filename in the New Filename text box, then choose OK.

See Also

Move Index File


Directory Dialog Box (Open)

Purpose

Directory dialog boxes with various titles appear in many applications that let you select and open a document.

Use this directory dialog box to select files to be opened into a new window or editor.  You can also choose File Options in the directory dialog box to copy, move, rename, delete, and print selected files; to change file attributes; to print file lists; and to create and remove directories.

Steps

1	Access a directory dialog box through a menu option that lets you open files.

2	Specify the name of the file you want to open in the Filename text box.

or... Select the drive, directory, and file type for the files you want to list, then select the file you want to open in the file list box.

3	Choose OK.

Choose from the following options for more information:

View

QuickFinder

File Options

QuickList

Setup

See Also

Filename

File List

Directories List

Drives

List Files of Type

Password


Open/Save As Setup

Purpose

Setup appears on directory dialog boxes that let you open, save, and manage files.

Use Open/Save As Setup to specify how you want to display the file list and to set the Speedup Files options.

Steps

1	Enter any directory dialog box, then choose Setup.

2	Select Change Default Directory to make the directory selected in the directory dialog box the default directory.

3	Choose a Default Save File Format from the drop-down list.

4	Make the changes you want, then choose OK.

Choose from the following options for more information:

Create Speedup Files

File List Display

Sort By

Sort Order


Password

Purpose

The Password dialog box appears when you attempt to open a password-protected file in a directory dialog box  that lets you open and manage files and directories.

Use Password to specify the password that lets you access a password-protected document.

Steps

To open a password-protected file,

1	In a directory dialog box, specify the name of the protected file you want to open in the Filename text box, then choose OK.

2	Type the assigned password, then choose OK.

To remove a password from a file,

1	In a directory dialog box that lets you open files (such as the Open File dialog box), specify the name of the protected file, then choose OK.

2	Type the password, then choose OK.

3	In the open password-protected file, select a menu option (such as Save As from the File menu) that lets you save a new or renamed file.

4	In the directory dialog box that lets you save the file (such as the Save As dialog box), specify the name of the protected file, deselect the Password Protect check box, then choose OK.

5	Choose Yes to replace the password-protected file.

See Also

Directory Dialog Box (Open)

Directory Dialog Box (Save As)

Password Protect


Print Files

Purpose

The Print option appears in the File Options pop-up list on directory dialog boxes that let you open, save, and manage files and directories.

Use Print to print one or more files.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, select a drive from the Drives drop-down list to list the directories on that drive in the Directories list box, then double-click directory names to open directories and list their subdirectories until you locate and select the directory you want.

or... Select the directory path you want from the QuickList list box.

2	Select one or more files in the file list box.

3	Choose File Options, then choose Print.

4	Choose Print.

See Also

Directory Dialog Box File Options

Filename

File List

Print File List

QuickFinder


Print File List

Purpose

The Print List option appears in the File Options pop-up list in directory dialog boxes that let you open, save, and manage files and directories.

Use Print List to print a list of selected files or all files displayed in the file list box.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, choose Setup, then select the File List Display options you want.  The information displayed on a printed file list is identical to the information displayed in the file list box.

2	Select the files in the file list that you want to include on the printed list.  Skip this step if you want to print the entire file list.

3	Choose File Options, then select Print List.

4	Choose the type of list you want, then choose Print.

See Also

Directory Dialog Box File Options

File List

File List Display

QuickFinder


QuickFinder Indexer

QuickFinder, Indexer

Purpose

Use the QuickFinder File Indexer to create or edit indexes.  A QuickFinder index is a full-text index containing all the words in a collection of files you specified.  Searching a QuickFinder index for a given word or phrase is extremely fast, compared to opening and searching each individual file's contents.

Steps

1	From QuickFinder, choose Indexer.

2	Choose Create, then type an index name.

or... Highlight the name of the index you want to edit, then choose Edit.

3	Type the name of the directory or file you want to add in the Add Directory or File text box, then choose Add.

or... Choose Browse for a list of files and directories.

or... Select the directories you do not want to index, then choose Remove (only if you are editing an existing index).

4	If you want to include all subdirectories under the directories you have added to the list, check the Include Subtree check box.

5	Choose Options if you want to specify individual index options, such as Exclude Files or Index Level.

6	Choose Generate to generate the index of the selected files.  If you are updating a previously created index, choose an Index Method option.

See Also

Index Method

Individual Index Options

QuickFinder


QuickFinder Preferences

QuickFinder, Indexer, Options, Preferences

Purpose

Use Preferences to change how QuickFinder creates an index.  Most of the options affect the speed of indexing.  Refer to the Individual Index Options help topic for additional information about setting QuickFinder preferences.

Steps

To change options for all indexes,

1	From QuickFinder, choose Indexer.

2	Choose Options, then choose Preferences.

To change options for a particular index,

1	Select the index.

2	Choose Edit, then choose Options.

See Also

Individual Index Options

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer

QuickFinder Indexer Options


Remove Directory

Purpose

The Remove Directory option appears on the File Options pop-up list in directory dialog boxes that let you open, save, and manage files and directories.

Use Remove Directory to remove a directory and to delete any subdirectories and files contained in the directory you want to remove.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, select a drive from the Drives drop-down list to list the directories on that drive in the Directories list box, then double-click directory names to open directories and list their subdirectories until you locate and select the directory you want to remove.

or... Select the directory you want to remove from the QuickList list box.

2	Choose File Options, then select Remove Directory.

3	Choose Remove, then choose Yes only if you are sure you want to delete a directory that contains files and subdirectories.

See Also

Create Directory

Directories List

Directory Dialog Box File Options

Drives

QuickList


Rename Files

Purpose

The Rename option appears on the File Options pop-up list in directory dialog boxes that let you open, save, and manage files and directories.

Use Rename to rename one or more files.

Steps

1	Select one or more files from the file list box.

2	Choose File Options, then choose Rename.

3	Type the path or filename you want the file(s) renamed to.

or... Click the list button , select the directory that you want the files renamed to, then choose OK.

4	Choose Rename.

See Also

Directory Dialog Box File Options

File List

QuickFinder

Select Directory


Rename Index

QuickFinder, Indexer, Options, Rename

Purpose

Use Rename Index to rename a QuickFinder index.

Steps

1	From QuickFinder, choose Indexer, then select an index name.

2	Choose Options, then choose Rename.

3	Type a new name in the New Name text box, then choose OK.

See Also

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer

QuickFinder Indexer Options


Directory Dialog Box (Save As)

Purpose

Directory dialog boxes with varied titles (such as Save As) appear in features that allow you to save a document as a new or renamed file.

Use this directory dialog box to specify the filename, directory location, and format of the file you want to save.  You can also choose File Options to copy, move, rename, print, and delete selected files; to print file lists; to change file attributes; and to create and remove directories.

Steps

1	In a directory dialog box, select the drive where you want to save a new or renamed file from the Drives drop-down list.

2	Select the directory where you want to save the file from the Directories list box or the QuickList.

3	Type the name of the file in the Filename text box.

or... In the file list box, select the file you want to replace with the saved file.

4	Choose the format you want from the Format drop-down list.

5	If you want to save the file with a password, select Password Protect.

6	Choose OK to save the file in the selected format.

Choose from the following options for more information:

View

File Options

QuickList

Setup

See Also

Directories List

Drives

Filename

File List

Format

Password Protect


Conversion Preferences

Purpose

Use Conversion Preferences to set default options for converting files.

Steps

1	In the Conversion Preferences dialog box, choose a Unit of Measure from the pop-up list.

2	Select an Underline conversion option.

3	Specify an Alignment Character.

4	Specify the page Width and Height.

5	Specify the margins you want.

6	Choose Language, select a language code, then choose OK.

7	Choose OK.

See Also

Conversion Preferences 4.2 Fonts

Conversion Preferences Code Page

Conversion Preferences DCA Fonts

Language


Conversion Preferences 4.2 Fonts

Purpose

Use Conversion Preferences to set and edit font conversion defaults for WordPerfect 4.2 documents.

Steps

1	In the Conversion Preferences dialog box, select the WordPerfect 4.2 font you want to convert in the Fonts list box.

2	Choose Edit, specify the font number, typeface, and pitch you want the font to convert to, then choose OK.

3	Choose Save.

See Also

Conversion Preferences

Conversion Preferences DCA Fonts


Entire Document

Indexes both text and document summary fields, including subfunctions:  headers, footers, footnotes, tables, graphics, and so on.  However, document summary information is combined with text information in the index.


Search Results
Search Results List

QuickFinder, Find, Search Results

QuickFinder, Options, Last Search Results

Purpose

A Search Results List, generated by a QuickFinder search, contains the files that match the search criteria you entered.  From the Search Results List you can open as many as nine files.  You can also copy, move, rename, delete, preview, or print files, or save the list for reference in further searching.

Steps

To generate a Search Results List,

1	From QuickFinder, type a search criteria, then choose Find.

2	If any files match the search criteria, a Search Results List will be displayed.  Otherwise you will see a No Files Found message.

3	From the Search Results List, select the file(s) you want to process, then choose either Open, View, or one of the File Options items to copy, move, rename, delete, or print files.

or... Choose QuickFinder to continue searching.

To save your Search Results List for future use,

1	From the Search Results List, check the Save Search Results check box, then choose either Open or Close.

2	To retrieve the saved search results list, choose QuickFinder again, choose Options, then choose Last Search Results.

To further refine your search,

1	From the Search Results List, choose QuickFinder.

2	Note that the Search In pop-up list contains a new item called Search Results List.  Choose this item if you want to search your previously created search results list.

3	You can check the Add Matching Files to Search Results List check box to include matching files to your list.

4	Choose Find.  The Search Results List will be displayed again if you have any matching files.

To use the QuickMenu to access the File Options menu,

1	Click in the Search Results List with the right mouse button.

See Also

QuickFinder

Search Results Sort Setup


Search Results Sort Setup

QuickFinder, Find, Search Results, Sort Setup

Purpose

Use Search Results Sort Setup to sort files in the QuickFinder Search Results by a specified search criterion, in either ascending or descending order.

Steps

1	In QuickFinder, type a search criterion you want to search on one of the text boxes, then choose Find.

2	In the Search Results List, choose Sort Setup.

3	Choose a sort option from the Sort Files By pop-up list.

4	Choose Ascending or Descending Order from the Order pop-up list, then choose OK.

See Also

QuickFinder

Search Results


Conversion Preferences DCA Fonts

Purpose

Use Conversion Preferences to set and edit font conversion defaults for DCA or DisplayWrite documents.

Steps

1	In the Conversion Preferences dialog box, select the DCA font you want to convert in the Fonts list box.

2	Choose Edit, specify the font number, typeface, points, and pitch you want the font to convert to, then choose OK.

3	Choose Save.

See Also

Conversion Preferences

Conversion Preferences 4.2 Fonts


 Hint

You can also use the Insert and Delete keys to select specific file options.  In the file list box, press Delete to select Delete Files.  In the Directories list box, press Insert to select Create Directory, or press Delete to select Remove Directory.  In the QuickList, press Insert to select Add Item, or press Delete to select Delete Item.


Entire Document-Summary Fields

Indexes both text and document summary fields, including subfunctions:  headers, footers, footnotes, tables, graphics, and so on. Document summary information is indexed separately to increase speed when searching document summary fields.


Viewer Find

Purpose

View appears on directory dialog boxes that let you open, save, or manage files.

Use Viewer Find to highlight all occurrences of the search words or phrases in the file.

Steps

1	Click the right mouse button inside the Viewer, then choose Find.

2	Type the text you want to find.

3	Select Match Whole Word Only if you do not want to find the search text within other words.

4	Select Case Sensitive if you want to search for capital letters just as you have typed them.

5	Press Enter.

6	To look for other pages that contain the search text, choose Find Next or Find Previous.

7	Choose Close.

See Also

Viewer


Viewer Font

Purpose

View appears on directory dialog boxes that let you open, save, or manage files.

Use Viewer Font to select the font (size and typeface) you want to display in the Viewer.

Steps

1	Click the right mouse button inside the Viewer, then choose Font.

2	Select a font and point size.

3	Select Bold or Italic if you want the entire Viewer text in bold or italic.

4	Choose OK.

See Also

Viewer


WordPerfect Characters

WordPerfect Characters

Purpose

Use WordPerfect Characters to access characters that do not appear on your keyboard, such as phonetic characters and characters in other alphabets.  You can insert these characters at your insertion point in a WordPerfect document or in some dialog box text boxes.

Steps

1	Place the insertion point where you want the character, then press Ctrl+W.

2	Select the character set you want from the pop-up list, then select a character.

3	Choose Insert to insert the character and leave the dialog box open.

or... Choose Insert and Close to insert the character and close the dialog box.


.BIF file (def)
.BIF file

Binary Initialization File.  A file that contains the settings information for WPCorp applications.


QuickFinder Indexer Options

QuickFinder, Indexer, Options

Purpose

Use the QuickFinder Indexer Options to specify indexing preferences or index operations.

Steps

1	From QuickFinder, choose Indexer, then choose Options.

See Also

About QuickFinder

Delete Index

Import Indexes

Individual Index Options

Move

Preferences

QuickFinder

QuickFinder Indexer

Rename Index


QuickFinder Options

QuickFinder, Options

Purpose

Use Options to refine, save, delete, or reuse searches.

Steps

1	Choose Options from the QuickFinder dialog box.

See Also

Clear Search

Delete Search Query

Load Search Query

QuickFinder

Save Search Query

Search Document Summary Fields

Search Query

Search Results


group box (def)
group box

A grouping of related options in a dialog box.


 Hint

You can click the list button to find other directories.


Sort Order

Open/Save As Setup, Sort Order

Purpose

Setup appears on directory dialog boxes that let you open, save, and manage files.

Use Sort Order to specify the order in which filenames will appear in the files list box.

Steps

1	Enter any directory dialog box, then choose Setup.

2	Select Ascending or Descending from the Sort Order pop-up list.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

File List Display

Open/Save As Setup

Sort By


dialog box title bar (def)
dialog box title bar

The horizontal bar across the top of the dialog box that contains the name of the dialog box and the Control-menu box.


active (def)
active

A window or dialog box that is currently in use.  Called the current window when a document is displayed.


.ALL file (def)
.ALL file

A file that contains information for several different printers.  WPCorp applications use .ALL files to generate .PRS files for your specific printer when you select a printer.


alphanumeric (def)
alphanumeric

Composed of letters or numerals or both.  Text and data can be sorted alphanumerically or numerically.  When sorting something numerically, 2 comes before 10.  When sorting something alphanumerically, 10 comes before 2.


ANSI (def)
ANSI

American National Standards Institute.  One of the standard formats for representing characters on a computer.  The ANSI character set consists of 256 characters.  The first 128 characters are the same as the ASCII character set; the second 128 (characters 129-256) differ from the IBM extended character set.  Compare with ASCII.


application (def)
application

Software designed to carry out a certain kind of action or activity, such as word processing, electronic mail, or spreadsheet entries.  Sometimes called a program.


application icon (def)
application icon

A unique icon that represents the application when it is minimized.


argument (def)
argument

A variable, constant, or expression required by a command or function.


ASCII (def)
ASCII

American Standard Code for Information Interchange.  One of the standard formats for representing characters on a computer.  The extended ASCII character set consists of 256 characters.  ASCII text is useful when you share files between programs.  A DOS text file is usually in ASCII format.  Compare with ANSI.


attributes (def)
attributes

The elements that determine the appearance of text (for example, bold, italic, 10-point) or a graphic (for example, fill, line width, background color).


automatic font change (AFC) (def)
automatic font change (AFC)

A font change that the user does not explicitly specify in the document but that automatically takes place to handle a change in the current attribute, size, or position of text.


back up (def)
back up

To save copies of files for safekeeping.  You can back up files as you work on them to protect your work in case of a power failure or machine problem, and you can have WPCorp applications make archive copies of your files to safeguard against replacing the original document.


baseline (def)
baseline

The invisible line upon which text is placed.  Each letter sits immediately on the baseline.  For letters with descenders (such as g, j, p, and y), the descenders drop below the baseline.


baud (def)
baud

The conventional unit of measurement used to describe data transmission speed.  One baud is one bit per second.


baud rate (def)
baud rate

The speed at which data is transmitted from one digital device to another, such as over a modem or between a computer and printer.  The devices must be configured at the same baud rate for information to transfer between them correctly.


BIOS (def)
BIOS

The Basic Input/Output System or the part of the computer operating system that communicates with the screen, the keyboard, printers, and other peripheral devices.


built-in font (def)
built-in font

A font that is built into the printer.


bullet (def)
bullet

A symbol, such as a filled circle, that may precede each item in a list.


byte (def)
byte

The amount of space needed to store a single character (number, letter, or code).  A byte generally represents eight binary digits (bits). 1024 bytes equals one kilobyte (K).


cache (def)
cache

A buffer area in a computer or a special section of random access memory (RAM).  A cache is continually updated to contain recently accessed data or program instructions to reduce access time while a program is running.


card (def)
card

A removable printed-circuit board that is plugged into an expansion slot (such as a graphics card, clock card, sound card, or fax card).


cartridge fonts (def)
cartridge fonts

A group of fonts contained on a ROM chip in a plastic cartridge that plugs into a printer.  The chips contain font definitions that do not require downloading and are not lost from memory in a power failure.


cascade (def)
cascade

To display document windows in overlapping format on the screen. Compare with tile.


cascading menu (def)
cascading menu

An additional list of menu items opening from a single menu item.


CD-ROM (def)
CD-ROM

Compact Disk-Read Only Memory.  Means of data storage using optical storage technology.  A single CD-ROM disk can hold more than 650 megabytes of information, or half a billion characters of text.  Unlike floppy disks, most CD-ROM disks can be read from but not written to.


cell (def)
cell

The intersection of a row and a column in a table or spreadsheet.


check box (def)
check box

A small box next to an option in a dialog box.  Clicking an empty check box selects the option; clicking a marked check box deselects the option.


check mark (def)
check mark

Mark placed next to a menu item that is turned on.  When the item is turned off or when it is not active, the check mark is removed.


choose (def)
choose

To use a mouse or the keyboard to pick a menu item or dialog box option that initiates an immediate action.  Compare with select.


clear (def)
clear

To remove the X from a check box, or to remove a check mark from a menu item.  If a check box is clear, that option is turned off.


click (def)
click

To press and release a mouse button (usually the left button) once.


Clipboard (def)
Clipboard

An area of memory, also called a buffer, where text and graphics can be stored to await further action.  It is a temporary holding place for items that have been cut or copied.  The item remains on the Clipboard until you cut or copy an additional item or until you exit Windows.


close (def)
close

To shut down or exit a dialog box, window, or application.


codes (def)
codes

Hidden markers that control how documents appear on the screen and at the printer.  Most commands insert codes into a document.  You can see these codes by choosing Reveal Codes.


command (def)
command

An instruction given to a computer to carry out a particular action.


command button (def)
command button

A button in a dialog box that carries out a command such as Open, Close, Exit, OK, or Cancel. The selected command button is indicated by a dotted rectangle.


compressed file (def)
compressed file

A file that has been specially prepared to conserve disk space. WPCorp applications are shipped with compressed files; you must run the Installation Program before you can use them.


Control menu (def)
Control menu

The menu containing commands that will open, close, maximize, minimize, or restore a window or dialog box.  You can display a Control menu by clicking the Control-menu box or by pressing Alt+Spacebar.


Control-menu box (def)
Control-menu box

A small rectangular button in the upper left corner of a window or dialog box. Clicking a Control-menu box will display the Control menu; double-clicking the Control-menu box will close the window or dialog box. Several windows can be open at the same time, each with its own Control-menu box.


conversion (def)
conversion

A process by which files created in one application are changed to a format that can be used in another application.


CUA (def)
CUA

Common User Access.  A set of terminology, keystrokes, and commands designed by Microsoft to provide standardization among applications. WPCorp applications come with a keyboard that is CUA compliant.


current directory (def)
current directory

The directory at the end of the current directory path.  It is the directory that is searched first for a requested file and where a file is stored if you do not specify a path.


DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange) link (def)
DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange) link

A connection between a file created by a Windows application that supports DDE and a WordPerfect document.  This connection lets you transfer information from the source file into the WordPerfect document.  If both files are open, the transferred information can be updated automatically when information changes in the source file.

WordPerfect for Windows also can establish spreadsheet links to some spreadsheet applications that do not support dynamic data exchange.


default (def)
default

A program's predetermined setting or action that takes effect unless specifically changed.


delimiter (def)
delimiter

Most commonly used to refer to a character or code that marks the beginning or end of an item, such as a sentence, paragraph, page, record, field, or word.  Also used in  dynamic delimiter  to refer to a character that expands to enclose part of an equation.


deselect (def)
deselect

To remove the X from a check box, or to remove a check mark from a menu item.


desktop (def)
desktop

The screen background and environment for all applications in Windows.


dimmed (def)
dimmed

The appearance of an icon, a command, or a button that cannot be chosen or selected.


display font (def)
display font

Also called screen font.  Font as it appears on the computer screen.


dither (def)
dither

To combine several different colored pixels to create a new color.


document window (def)
document window

The window in which documents are created or edited.


DOS (def)
DOS

Disk Operating System.  Software that oversees disk I/O, video support, keyboard control, and internal commands.  A computer needs a disk operating system to function.


DOS prompt (def)
DOS prompt

The on-screen characters, such as C:\>, indicating that you can enter DOS commands.


double-click (def)
double-click

To press and release the mouse button twice in rapid succession.


drag (def)
drag

To move text or an object by positioning the pointer on the item you want to move, pressing the mouse button, moving the mouse, then releasing the mouse button.


driver (def)
driver

A set of commands used to run a peripheral device such as a printer or monitor.  For example, .PRS files are drivers that instruct a printer on how to print a WordPerfect file.  Also called printer driver.


ellipsis (def)
ellipsis

A punctuation mark consisting of three successive periods (...). Choosing a menu item or command button with an ellipsis opens a dialog box.


expanded memory (def)
expanded memory

Specification for addressing more than 640K of memory.  To access expanded memory, you need a special memory board or driver.


extended memory (def)
extended memory

Random access memory that exceeds the DOS standard of one megabyte.  It is built into the hardware of a 286, 386, or 486 computer.  It can be accessed with a memory management program.


file (def)
file

A collection of information stored on disk under a single name.


file extension (def)
file extension

The optional three-letter suffix following the period in a filename.


file format (def)
file format

The arrangement and organizational pattern of the information in a file.  The application under which a file was created determines its format.  Files created in one application are not accessible by another application unless they are converted to the proper format.


filename (def)
filename

The name given to a data file used by applications to perform open and save operations.  In DOS and Windows applications, filenames can have as many as eight characters with an optional extension of as many as three characters.  The filename and extension are separated with a period.


fixed-pitch font (def)
fixed-pitch font

Also called monospaced font.  A font that allocates the same amount of space for every character (for example, an  i  takes up as much horizontal space as a  w ).  Compare with proportionally spaced font.


font (def)
font

A group of letters, numbers, and symbols with a common typeface.  Fonts are described by name, appearance, and size, as in Helvetica Bold 10pt.


function keys (def)
function keys

A set of keys, usually labeled F1, F2, F3, and so forth, used by themselves or with Shift, Ctrl, and Alt keys to provide quick access to certain features in an application.


group (def)
group

A set of related options in a dialog box, often with its own subtitle.


handle (def)
handle

An on-screen marker, usually a small black square, that lets you size and manipulate an object or item in a drawing.  Handles appear around selected objects.  To use a handle, drag it with the mouse.


hexadecimal (def)
hexadecimal

A numbering system based on 16 digits, 0 through F, used in computer programming as a convenient shorthand for working with binary numbers.


highlight (def)
highlight

The change to a reverse-video appearance when a menu item or area of text is selected.


iconq  (def)
icon

A small graphics image that represents an application, a command, or a tool.  Clicking or double-clicking an icon will produce an action.


inactive window (def)
inactive window

A window that is not currently being used.  Its title bar changes appearance, and keystrokes and mouse actions do not affect its contents.  An inactive window can be activated by clicking it.


incrementing button (def)
incrementing button

A button in a dialog box that lets you specify an amount by clicking it with the mouse instead of typing numbers.


.INI file (def)
.INI file

A file that stores setup and startup information for Windows applications.


insertion point (def)
insertion point

A blinking vertical bar that designates the position on the screen where text or codes will be inserted or deleted.  Sometimes called a cursor.  Compare with mouse pointer.


kerning (def)
kerning

Altering the space between a pair of characters to give a uniform appearance.


kilobyte (K) (def)
kilobyte (K)

1024 bytes of information or storage space.


landscape orientation (def)
landscape orientation

The position of the page in which the long edge of the page runs horizontally.  Compare with portrait orientation.


language code (def)
language code

A two-letter code that represents the language of files such as .LEX, .THS, .TRS, and .ICR files.


leading (def)
leading

The amount of white space between lines of type.


.LEX file (def)
.LEX file

The main dictionary file for use with Speller.  The .LEX file may also contain hyphenation information.


list box (def)
list box

A box that displays a list of choices.  When a list is too long to display all choices, it will have a scroll bar, so that you can view additional items.


list button (def)
list button

In dialog boxes, a way to get to another dialog box to select files or change directories.  It appears as a small file-folder button next to a text box.


macro (def)
macro

A series of commands and menu selections in a file that can be replayed by a few keystrokes or by a mouse click.


main dictionary (def)
main dictionary

The Speller dictionary provided with WPCorp applications, or a compatible third-party dictionary.


megabyte (M) (def)
megabyte (M)

1024 kilobytes (1,048,576 bytes) of information or storage space.


memory (def)
memory

A computer's data storage area, measured in RAM and ROM.


menu bar (def)
menu bar

The area at the top of a window containing headings for pull-down menu items.


message box (def)
message box

A type of dialog box that appears with information, a warning, an error message, or a request for confirmation to carry out a command or action.


MIDI (def)
MIDI

Musical Instrument Digital Interface.   A format that allows communication of musical data between devices such as computers and synthesizers.


mnemonics (def)
mnemonics

Underlined letters on menu commands or dialog box options indicating keystroke access for that item or option.


modem (def)
modem

Modulator/demodulator.  A device that transmits digital computer data over telephone lines.  Modems can be external or internal (built into the computer).


monospaced font (def)
monospaced font

Fonts that use the same amount of horizontal space for each character in the font (for example, an  i  takes up as much horizontal space as a  w ).  Monospaced fonts are also referred to as fixed-pitch fonts. Compare with proportionally spaced fonts.


mouse button (def)
mouse button

The part of the mouse that can be pressed (or clicked) manually and that controls certain functions that may be customized to suit the user.  WPCorp documentation uses mouse button to mean the left button (button 1).


mouse pointer (def)
mouse pointer

A symbol that indicates a position on screen as you move the mouse on your desktop.


movement keys (def)
movement keys

Keys on the keyboard that control insertion point movement within a document.  They include the arrow keys, Page Up, Page Down, Home, and End.


multitasking (def)
multitasking

A process that allows a computer to perform various tasks simultaneously.  Also, the method by which some operating systems allow the user to open and run several applications at one time.


newspaper column (def)
newspaper column

Text flows down a column to the bottom of a page, then starts again at the top of the next column to the right.  Compare with parallel column.


open (def)
open

To start an application, to insert a document into a new document window, or to access a dialog box.


option (def)
option

A choice inside a dialog box.


outline family (def)
outline family

The collective term for a main level in an outline and all subordinate levels and text under it.  For example, if the main levels of an outline are numbered I, II, III, and so on, an outline family would include item I and items A, B, and C under it, with all related text.


palette (def)
palette

An on-screen box or window that contains drawing tools, available colors, or possible fill patterns.


parallel column (def)
parallel column

Text grouped across the page in rows.  The next row starts below the longest column of the previous row.  Compare with newspaper column.


parallel interface (def)
parallel interface

An interface in which several bits of information (usually 1 byte) are transmitted simultaneously.  Compare with serial interface.


parallel printer (def)
parallel printer

A printer that accepts information by way of a parallel interface.


parameter (def)
parameter

A variable used with a command to indicate a specific value or option.


path (def)
path

The address that tells a computer where to locate a directory or file on a disk or network.  A path includes the drive, the root directory, and any subdirectory names that branch from the root directory.


pitch (def)
pitch

The number of monospaced characters printed per linear inch.


pixel (def)
pixel

Short for picture element.  A pixel is the smallest dot that can be represented on a screen or in a paint (bitmap) graphic.


point (def)
point

To move the mouse until the tip of the mouse pointer rests on an item.


point sizeq  (def)
point size

Unit of measure commonly used to indicate font sizes.  One point equals 1/72".


pop-up definition (def)
pop-up definition

A graphic or dot-underlined, colored word that you can click to display a definition or explanation.


port (def)
port

A connection device between a computer and another component, such as a printer or modem.  For example, a printer cable is plugged into the printer port on the computer so information can be sent to the printer.


portrait orientation (def)
portrait orientation

The position of the page in which the long edge of the page runs vertically.  Compare with landscape orientation.


print queue (def)
print queue

The list of print jobs waiting to be sent to a particular printer.


printer definition (def)
printer definition

A file that contains instructions for a program (like WordPerfect) to format printed pages on a particular printer.  Also known as a printer driver.


printer driver (def)
printer driver

The software that enables a program to communicate with the printer so that information can be printed. WordPerfect printer drivers are identified by a .PRS file extension.  Also called drivers.


program (def)
program

Software designed for a certain use, such as word processing, electronic mail, or spreadsheet entries.  Also called an application.


proportionally spaced font (def)
proportionally spaced font

Also called a variable-pitch font.  Fonts that vary the amount of horizontal space used by characters in the font (for example, the letter i usually gets less space than the letter w).  Compare with monospaced fonts.


.PRS file (def)
.PRS file

A file that contains the printer definition and a complete description of a print station (printer, sheet feeder, fonts, and forms).  A .PRS file is created from a .ALL file when a printer is selected.


QuickList (def)
QuickList

A list that lets you access a directory or group of files without entering the full pathname every time you want to locate the same group of files.


QuickMenu (def)
QuickMenu

A pop-up menu that lists a specific set of items that apply to a particular feature.  You can open a QuickMenu by placing the mouse pointer over the object and pressing the right mouse button.  You select the option you want by clicking it with the left mouse button.


radio button (def)
radio button

One of a set of buttons found before options in a dialog box.  Only one radio button in a set can be selected at a time.


RAM (def)
RAM

Random Access Memory.  The working space or temporary storage area for the program you are using and the document on your screen.  RAM is erased when the power is turned off.


Restore button (def)
Restore button

A button that lets you return the window to the size and position it was prior to being either maximized or minimized.


ROM (def)
ROM

Read Only Memory.  The part of a computer's main memory that contains the basic programs that run the computer when it is turned on.  ROM cannot be erased.


root directory (def)
root directory

The fundamental directory of a disk, created when the disk is formatted.


scalable font (def)
scalable font

A font that can be printed in virtually any point size, depending on the limits of the software and printer used.


screen font (def)
screen font

Also known as a display font.  A font, usually rendered in low-resolution, that mimics a printer font.


scroll (def)
scroll

To move the insertion point through a document or list that extends beyond the screen display.


scroll bar (def)
scroll bar

The bars on the right side and bottom of the window that let you move vertically and horizontally through a document, list, or graphic by clicking the scroll arrows or dragging the scroll box.


select (text or objects) (def)
select (text or objects)

To highlight text that will be affected by the next action.


select (options or commands) (def)
select (options or commands)

To use a mouse or the keyboard to pick a menu item or dialog box option that does not initiate an immediate action.  The action takes place after you choose OK.  Compare with choose.


selection insertion point (def)
selection insertion point

The highlighted text, dotted rectangle, or insertion point that shows you where the next keystroke or mouse action will apply in a dialog box or window.


serial interface (def)
serial interface

An interface in which information is transmitted one bit at a time. Compare with parallel interface.


serial printer (def)
serial printer

A printer that accepts information from the computer by way of a serial interface.  Compare with parallel printer.


shortcut key (def)
shortcut key

A keystroke or keystroke combination that gives you quick access to a feature.


size (def)
size

To change the size of a selected item by dragging the sizing handles that surround it.


sizing handle (def)
sizing handle

The small solid squares that appear on the borders of a graphics box or a graphics line that has been selected.  You can drag these handles to size the box and its contents.


soft font (def)
soft font

A font file that is located in a file on a disk.  When the printer is switched on, soft font files must be copied (downloaded) from the disk to the printer.


sort key (def)
sort key

Words, fields, or phrases that are used to define criteria in sorting specific items in a document.


spreadsheet (def)
spreadsheet

A grid made up of columns and rows that contain data or formulas often used for financial planning, cost estimating, and other accounting tasks.


spreadsheet import (def)
spreadsheet import

To copy information from a spreadsheet file into a WordPerfect document one time only.  Compare with spreadsheet link.


spreadsheet link (def)
spreadsheet link

A connection from a spreadsheet file into a WordPerfect document.  It lets you transfer information from the spreadsheet into the document. You can update the transferred information as often as necessary to reflect changes made in the spreadsheet file.


Status Bar (def)
Status Bar

The line at the bottom of a document window that shows information such as the document number, page, line, and vertical and horizontal position of the insertion point.


submenu (def)
submenu

An additional list of menu items opening from a single menu item.


supplementary dictionary (def)
supplemental dictionary

A dictionary created and personalized by the user.  Supplemental dictionaries include words and phrases not found in the main dictionary.


syntax (def)
syntax

The rules for organizing elements in an operation.  For example, macro commands require a specific syntax or organization for them to function properly.


temporary file (def)
temporary file

A file that a program creates when it is running.  Temporary files are deleted when the program is exited properly.  For example, WordPerfect creates temporary overflow and backup files.


text box (graphics) (def)
text box (graphics)

A type of graphics box that can be used for placing and rotating text.


text file (def)
text file

A file saved in ASCII file format.  It contains text, spaces, and returns, but no formatting codes.


tile (def)
tile

To display open windows side by side, with no window overlapping any other window.  Compare with cascade.


toggle (def)
toggle

To turn a feature on and off with the same keystroke or menu selection.


variable-pitch font (def)
variable-pitch font

Also called proportionally spaced font.  A font that varies the amount of space used by each character.  Compare with monospaced font.


wildcard (def)
wildcard

Character used to replace one character (?) or any number of characters (*) in a search string.  These two characters are conventions in most applications.


window (def)
window

A method of displaying a document so that many of its elements appear graphically and many features are immediately available as on-screen choices.  The place where you type your documents is called a document window.


workspace (def)
workspace

The part of the document window where you actually work with the text of the document.


.WPG file (def)
.WPG file

WordPerfect graphic file.  A file extension added to images in the WPCorp graphics image format.


WYSIWYG (def)
WYSIWYG

What You See Is What You Get.  Refers to a computer screen display that approximates the printed page, showing fonts and graphics in correct proportions.


zoom (def)
zoom

To expand or reduce the image of a document or graphic on the screen. Zooming does not change the actual size of the text or graphics.


application window (def)
application window

The window that contains the operating features of the application, such as the menu bar, Button Bar, and document window.  Document windows are placed within the application window and, if your computer has enough memory, you can open as many as nine document windows at a time.


title bar (def)
title bar

The horizontal bar across the top of each window that contains the name of the application or window, the Control-menu box, and the maximize, minimize, and restore buttons.  Sometimes the title bar also contains help prompts that give you information about menu items you select.


minimize button (def)
minimize button

A button that you use to shrink an application window or document window to an icon.


maximize button (def)
maximize button

A button that you use to enlarge a small application window or document window to its maximum size.  A window that is smaller than a full-screen window, but not minimized to an icon, can also be maximized by double-clicking its title bar.


Button Bar (def)
Button Bar

A feature that contains buttons representing features you use often. You can create your own customized Button Bars.


Power Bar (def)
Power Bar

A feature that contains buttons representing the most frequently used text-editing and text-layout features.


Contents button (def)
Contents button

A Help button you can use to return to the main Contents screen which helps you quickly navigate through specific areas of Help.


Search button (def)
Search button

A Help button you can use to search for Help topics by typing in keywords.


Back button (def)
Back button

A Help button you can use to return to the last topic you opened.


History button (def)
History button

A Help button you can use to display the last 40 Help topics you opened, with the most recent at the top of the list.  To reopen a topic, double-click it.


Print button (def)
Print button

A Help button you can use to print the current Help topic.


Browse buttons (def)
Browse buttons

Buttons which display the previous (<<) or next (>>) topic in a series of grouped or associated topics.  When you reach the first or last topic in the series, the corresponding previous or next button is dimmed.


 Hint

You can reduce the size and move the Help window to keep it on-screen while you follow the steps.

Choose Always on Top from the Help menu above to display the Help window "on top" of other applications, even when it is minimized. Or, size both Help and the application window so they do not overlap.


 Hint

File types and formats are identified by filename extensions such as .wpd for WordPerfect 6.0 for Windows documents, .exe for executable files, .bat for batch files, and so on.  Unless you change it in File Preferences, WordPerfect will add a .wpd extension to any WordPerfect 6.0 for Windows document file that you specify without an extension in a directory dialog box such as Open or Save As.

If you specify a filename without an extension and select a format other than the WordPerfect document format from the Format drop-down list in a dialog box such as Save As, WordPerfect will add the extension that identifies the selected format.  Choose Setup in the Save As dialog box to change the Default Save File Format that is selected on the Format drop-down list when you open the Save As dialog box.


 Hint

You can select a continuous range of items from a file list by clicking and dragging up or down over those items.  Or you can click an item at one end of the range, then hold down the Shift key and click the item at the other end of the range.

To select noncontinuous items from a list, hold down the Ctrl key as you click each item you want.  To select all items on a list, hold down the Ctrl key, then press the forward slash (/) key.

To move to a specific file in a file list that is sorted in ascending filename order, click inside the list, then type the first letters of the filename until the file is selected.


 Hint

If you do not select a directory before choosing Remove Directory in a directory dialog box, the application will read the current directory name as the directory that you want to remove.


 Hint

If the Button Bar is displayed, you can click the right mouse button over the Button Bar, then choose Edit.


 Hint

The colors you can select with each mouse button appear in the Colors group box.


 Hint

If you map a number or letter key without a modifier key, it will no longer act as an alphanumeric key.


Document Text

Lets you view the body of a document (instead of the Document Summary).


Save Format

Purpose

The Save Format dialog box appears when you attempt to save a document which was converted from another format when you opened the document.

Save Format allows you to save the file in the current default format, the original format, or in another format.

Steps

1	Open a document that was saved in a format other than your current default format, make any changes you want, then select a menu option (such as Save from the File menu) that lets you save changes to a previously-saved document file.

2	Choose the default format or the original format.

or... Choose Other, choose OK, then choose the format you want from the Format drop-down list.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Directory Dialog Box (Save As)

Format

Open/Save As Setup


Hex

Displays a file in hexadecimal mode.


Copy to Clipboard

Lets you copy to the Clipboard anything that is selected in the Viewer.


Document Summary

Lets you view the Document Summary of a file (instead of the body of the document).


Word Wrap

Wraps document text in the Viewer window so that all the text shows regardless of the window size.


Viewer Setup

Purpose

View appears on directory dialog boxes that let you open, save, and manage files.

Use Viewer Setup to change Viewer default display options, such as  Document Summary.

Steps

1	Click the right mouse button inside the Viewer, then choose Viewer Setup.

2	Select any options.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Viewer


Find

Lets you find words or phrases in the document displayed in the Viewer.

How to Use It


Font

Lets you change the font that will show in the Viewer.

How to Use It


 Hint

To cancel your changes and reset to the default from your document, press Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Backspace.


Text Only

Indexes only textual information without summary fields or other subfunctions.


 Hint

To assign a WordPerfect Character to a key, select Allow assignment to characters, select a key from the list box, select Play a Keyboard Script, press Ctrl+W, select and insert the character, then choose Assign Script.


 Hint

If a QuickList is not displayed, choose QuickList, then choose Show QuickList.


 Hint

A QuickFinder index is a full-text index of all the words in a collection of documents.  A QuickFinder index can speed up a search dramatically.


 Hint

Filling in more than one field performs a logical AND operation.


 Hint

Make sure you have documents with document summary information.


 Hint

If you choose Summary Fields (from the Options dropdown list) again to collapse the QuickFinder dialog box, all document summary fields are cleared and are not used in the search.


 Hint

See the Reference manual for a description of all the search switches.


 Hint

It is a good idea to regenerate the entire index to speed up the index process.


 Hint

Index level refers to the amount of information stored in the index, that is, which document, paragraph, line, or sentence the word is contained in.  Indexing at the larger levels (document, hard page, or page) decreases the size of the index.  Indexing at the smaller levels increases the index size but allows you to find multiple words within the same line, sentence, or paragraph much faster.


 Hint

If a query has been saved with document summary fields (expanded mode), then the summary fields display when you load the query.


 Hint

You can also click the right mouse button on the Directories list box or on the QuickList, then choose an option.


Filename Only

Indexes only DOS filenames.


Summary Fields Only

Indexes only document summary fields.


Viewer Go To Page

Viewer, Go To Page

Purpose

View appears on directory dialog boxes that let you open, save, or manage files.

Use Viewer Go To Page to view multiple-page fax files.

Steps

1	Click the right mouse button inside the Viewer, then choose Go To Page.

2	Specify the page number you want to view.

3	Choose OK.

See Also

Viewer


 Hint

The OK button is always the top command button on the right side of a directory dialog box.  The actual title of the button may vary depending upon the title of the directory dialog box.  For example, in the directory dialog box titled Import Indexes, the OK button is titled Import.


 Hint

It is recommended (and easier) to set directory paths pointing to shared network directories from within WordPerfect by using the WPCNET Settings icon.  Only paths that require relative drive settings should be edited using the BIF Editor.


 Hint

To find a more specific Help topic about your task, use the Search button above to look up the title of the dialog box.